DENTAL FORMULARY HERMANN PRINZ The lecturer must not he the ant, collecting all things indis- criminately from all quarters, as provender for his discourses; Nor the spider, seeking no materials abroad, hut spinning his web of speculative doctrine from within himself; But rather the bee, extracting crude honey from various flowers, storing it up in the recesses of his brain, and submitting it to the operation of his internal faculties, until it be matured and ready for use. Lord Bacon. PREAMBLE. DENTAL FORMULARY A PRACTICAL GUIDE FOR THE PREPARATION OF CHEMICAL AND TECHNICAL COMPOUNDS AND ACCESSORIES AS USED IN THE OFFICE AND LABORATORY BY THE DENTAL PRACTITIONER V WITH AN INDEX TO ORAL DISEASES AND THEIR TREATMENT BY HERMANN PRINZ/A.M., D.D.S., M.D. PROFESSOR OF MATERIA MEDICA AND THERAPEUTICS; THE THOMAS W. EVANS MUSEUM AND DENTAL INSTITUTE, SCHOOL OF DENTISTRY, UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, PHILADELPHIA, PA. THIRD EDITION, THOROUGHLY REVISED LEA & FEBIGEB PHILADELPHIA AND NEW YORK 1923 Copyright LEA & FEBIGER 1923 PRINTED IN U. S. A. PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION. The second edition of the Dental Formulary, including many reprints, has been exhausted for some time past. Owing to numerous other duties, unavoidable delay was caused in the preparation of the manuscript for the third edition. The new edition of the Dental Formulary has been com- pletely revised; many important additions have been made, especially in regard to recent improvements concerning the preparation of investment compounds, impression waxes, etc., and in the chapter dealing with the preparations for the mouth and teeth. The index to oral diseases has been completely rewritten. The matter which has become obso- lete has been discarded. A number of recipes have been modified according to present needs, and many tests have been carried out to verify the composition and usefulness of pharmaceutical and technical compounds. Only those formulas are presented which have been shown to possess real merit and to be worthy of an extended trial at the hands of the profession. An earnest effort has been made to present the whole matter so as to be of assistance to professional colleagues in their daily tasks. The writer again emphasizes what he has stated in the preface of former editions, namely that each formula as specified in this book, may be simply regarded as representing a basic compound; it may be employed as such or modified to suit conditions at hand. In general, however, it should be remembered that most of these formulas, especially those of a technical nature, represent the practical experience of mature minds who are known as experts in their respective branches. V VI PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION It is gratifying to know that a Spanish edition of the Dental Formulary lias appeared some time ago, and that a German edition is to be published in the very near future. The author wishes to thank his many professional friends who have assisted him most generously in the preparation of the third edition of the Dental Formulary. Evans Dental Institute; University of Pennsylvania, 1923. H. P. FROM THE PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. The many inquiries regarding formulas for technical and chemical compounds, or special methods of procedure relative to the treatment of oral diseases, received from dental practitioners, has been the prime incentive in the preparation of this volume. Its object is to furnish to the practitioner and the student a reliable guide for technical information as needed in the office and laboratory of a busy practice. No claim of originality is made for all the recipes and formulas—such complexity is rarely the product of a single brain. Due credit has been given wherever originality could be clearly established. The matter has been gleaned from English, German and French current literature and other sources. The author has carefully selected, modified when necessary, and in the majority of cases made tests to establish reliability. Each formula as represented in this work may be simply regarded as a basis; it may be employed as such or modified to suit the conditions at hand. In general, however, it should be remembered that most of these formulas represent the practical results of mature minds who are known as experts in their specific branches. Formulas, recipes, and special processes as published in the dental journals, and even in text-books are frequently selected at random without due consideration of their practicability or their trust- worthiness; they often contain mistakes which naturally produce unreliable and, under certain conditions, dangerous results. The book is primarily intended to be a practical guide, consequently all scientific theories or matters of controversy have been purposely omitted. While the author feels he has VII VIII FROM THE PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION covered a wide field, yet he is aware of the fact that the book is of necessity incomplete in many respects. This, however, may be expected of any work of its size and nature. Whether a book of the nature of a dental formulary is needed by the English speaking practitioner, the future has to decide. Similar works published in German and in French have been successful. It is the intention of the author to continue the task before him, keeping the book up to date by constantly enlarging and modifying future editions according to need. H. P. CONTENTS. CHAPTER I. Plaster-of-Paris Preparations, Separating Media, Cast Varnishes, Investment Compounds for Metallic Plate Bases and Cast Inlays, Moulding Materials, etc. . . 11 CHAPTER II. Gutta-percha Preparations, Dental Rubbers, Modelling and Inlay Waxes, Plastic Impression Compounds, etc. . 26 CHAPTER III. Cements, Adhesives, and Varnishes 42 CHAPTER IV. Hard and Fusible Alloys, Solders, Fluxes and Amalgams; Refining of Precious Metals; Tempering of Metals; Metal Polishes; etc 57 CHAPTER V. Electro-plating, Coloring, Lacquering, and Etching of Metals 110 CHAPTER VI. Preparations for the Mouth and Teeth 135 CHAPTER VII. Pharmaceutical Compounds 158 IX X CONTENTS CHAPTER VIII. An Index to Oral Diseases—Their Etiology, Diagnosis and Treatment. Immediate Treatment of Acute Poisoning. Saliva and Urine Analysis. Diagnostic Hints . . . 191 CHAPTER IX. Miscellaneous 246 CHAPTER X. Tables 302 DENTAL FORMULARY. CHAPTER I. PLASTER-OF-PARIS PREPARATIONS, SEPARATING MEDIA, CAST VARNISHES, INVESTMENT COM- POUNDS FOR METALLIC PLATE BASES AND CAST INLAYS, MOULDING MATERIALS, ETC. TO COLOR PLASTER-OF-PARIS IMPRESSIONS. Dissolve a few crystals of red aniline (eosine or Scarlet B.) in the water which is to be used for mixing the plaster of Paris. TO INCREASE THE COHESION OF PLASTER OF PARIS FOR IMPRESSION PURPOSES. Add to the freshly mixed plaster of Paris a small quantity of loose fibers of absorbent cotton. IMPROVED IMPRESSION MATERIAL. 1. Plaster of Paris 10 parts Powdered asbestos 12 “ Powdered chalk 4 “ Marble dust 1 part 2. Powdered sand 3 parts Powdered chalk 3 “ Marble dust 3 “ Plaster of Paris 6 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 11 12 DENTAL FORMULARY The compound may be colored with mineral red, crocus martis, etc. Low fusible alloys may be readily poured into the dried and warmed impression made of these compounds. TO HARDEN PLASTER-OF-PARIS CASTS. 1. Borax 1 part Water 50 parts Boil the dried plaster cast in this solution. 2. Prepare a saturated solution of sodium bicarbonate and place the dried cast in this solution until it is saturated with it. Remove and dry. 3. Prepare a saturated solution of boric acid in hot water and add sufficient water of ammonia to form a soluble ammonium borate. Mix the plaster with this cold solution or saturate the dried cast with it. In a few days the cast will be sufficiently hard to allow polishing with a soft wheel brush. 4. Freshly slaked lime, sifted .... 1 part Plaster of Paris 6 parts Mix with hydrant water. The thoroughly dried cast made of this mixture is placed in a saturated aqueous solution of zinc sulphate or iron sul- phate and kept in the respective solution for two hours. It is then removed and dried. Zinc sulphate does not alter the white color of the cast, while iron sulphate produces a light green shade which, in time, gives an “oxidized” appearance to the cast. Casts prepared according to this method are about twenty times as hard as ordinary plaster casts. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 13 5. The plaster cast is dried at about 250° F. until it is deprived of all moisture. It is now placed in a hot aqueous solution of barium hydrate (5 per cent) and kept there until saturated. The cast is removed, dried and smoothed with fine sand- paper and placed in a 10 per cent aqueous solution of oxalic acid, in which it remains a few hours. The color of the cast is not altered by this treatment. If a permanent tint is required, the plaster cast is placed, prior to the above treat- ment, into a saturated solution of copper sulphate, or iron sulphate, or chrome sulphate, thus producing, respectively, bluish, greenish, and orange tints. (Wachsmuth’s process.) 6.—Marbleized Plaster-of-Paris Casts. Powdered alum 4 parts Ammonium chloride 4 “ Plaster of Paris 17 “ Mix thoroughly, stir in water, and cast in the ordinary way. 7.—Encaustic Plaster-of-Paris Casts. Heat the plaster cast to about 175° F.; place into melted stearic acid and keep in this liquid from three to five minutes; remove dry and burnish with a soft brush until an even polish is obtained. Larger plaster casts may be saturated with a solution of Stearic acid 3 parts Gasoline1 20 “ After the evaporation of the gasoline the cast is treated as outlined above. 1 In all cases where gasoline or benzine is recommended for preparing solutions of fats, oils, resins, rubber, etc., for technical purposes, carbon tetrachloride is preferably employed. Carbon tetrachloride (CCI4), commercially known as “Carbona” and by other proprietary names, is a non-inflammable efficient substitute for the above hydrocarbons. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 14 DENTAL FORMULARY 8.—Beerite. Very fine marble dust 100 parts Very fine powdered glass 15 “ Very fine freshly slaked lime .... 7 “ The carefully mixed and sifted powder is mixed with a thin aqueous solution of sodium silicate (dental silex, soluble glass), and immediately cast into the mould. The cast requires from three to four hours for complete hardening. Beerite produces very hard and sharp casts. TO HASTEN THE SETTING, AND TO PREVENT EXPANSION OF PLASTER CASTS. One part of potassium sulphate, or sodium chloride, or alum, dissolved in 8 to 9 parts of water before adding the plaster of Paris, hastens its setting very materially and, to some extent, prevents expansion. TO RETARD THE SETTING OF PLASTER CASTS. 1. Mix the plaster of Paris with from 2 to 4 per cent of powdered marshmallow root; the addition of 4 per cent retards the setting of the cast about one hour. 2. Very small quantities of citric acid (lemon juice) or acetic acid (vinegar), added to the water before mixing the plaster of Paris, will retard its setting. TO PREVENT WARPAGE OF PLASTER CASTS. The prompt separation of the cast from the impression will largely obviate warpage. TO REDUCE THE SIZE OF PLASTER-OF-PARIS CASTS. Alcohol 1 part Water 2 parts Plaster of Paris, enough to suit N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 15 The cast is allowed to dry for a few days in a warm place. After the alcohol has completely evaporated, the finished cast will be about times smaller in all directions than the original model from which the impression was made. By repeating the process any desired reduction may be obtained. TO DISSOLVE “SET” PLASTER OF PARIS. Prepare a cold saturated solution of sodium hyposulphite (also known as sodium thiosulphate or as the “hypo” of the photographer) in water and place the plaster-of-Paris cast or article covered with it into this solution. An ordinary dental cast, when placed in this solution, will become com- pletely disintegrated within a few hours. TO REMOVE PLASTER OF PARIS FROM RUBBER PLATES. Immerse the plate for a half hour in a weak solution of hydrochloric acid, remove, and wash in a weak solution of sodium carbonate. A SIMPLE MEANS OF REMOVING PLASTER-OF-PARIS BANDAGES. In spite of the use of special instruments, the removal of plaster-of-Paris bandages, etc., is often troublesome and, in case of a recent fracture, may cause injury. Methods of softening the plaster by water, either alone or with the addition of salt, are rarely successful, as the bandage becomes coated with a layer of grease, which prevents their action. Satisfactory results have been obtained by thoroughly moistening the line of section with strong vinegar applied on a tampon of cotton wool. After a minute the plaster will be found completely softened so that it may be easily divided with a pocket-knife or ordinary scissors—a procedure easy for the surgeon and painless for the patient. By this method a plaster cast for fracture of the femur, consisting of 80 turns of bandage, may be removed in about a minute and a half. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 16 DENTAL FORMULARY TO REPAIR BROKEN PLASTER-OF-PARIS CASTS. 1. Celluloid 1 part Acetone 5-10 parts Keep well corked and away from fire. 2. Solution of sodium silicate (dental silex, soluble glass) 1 part Barium sulphate, enough to make a paste. 3. Zinc oxyphosphate cement, mixed to a thin cream. , P. S.—The plaster casts must be perfectly dry before any cement can be used successfully. SEPARATING FLUIDS FOR PLASTER-OF-PARIS CASTS. 1. Powdered shellac 10 parts Borax 5 “ Hot water—not boiling (150° F.) . . 100 “ Water-soluble aniline dye, enough to color. Put the ingredients into a bottle and shake well. The solution will be ready for use in two or three days. 2. Castor oil 3 parts Alcohol 1 part Alcohol-soluble aniline dye, enough to color. The solution is ready for immediate use. 3. Scrubbing soap 1 part Hot water 8 parts Dissolve and add: Lard oil 8 parts Shake well before using. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 17 4. Boiled linseed oil painted very thin over the impression forms a good separating medium. Castor oil 1 part Cocoanut oil 2 parts SEPARATING FLUID FOR AMALGAM DIES. IMPRESSION VARNISHES. 1. Gum sandarac 2 parts Alcohol1 5 “ 2. Gum shellac 1 part Alcohol 3 parts VARNISHES FOR PLASTER CASTS. 1. Gum sandarac 4 parts Gum mastic 2 “ Venice turpentine 1 part Alcohol 10 parts The varnish is colorless, elastic and leaves a fine glossy surface. An alcohol-soluble aniline dye may be added to give the desired tint. 2. Gum sandarac 1 part Rosin, light colored 1 “ Alcohol 4 parts P. S.—Alcoholic varnishes may be made elastic by the addition of 2 parts of castor oil to every 100 parts of the finished varnish. 1 Tax-free denatured alcohol, i. e., grain alcohol made unfit for internal purposes by the addition of small quantities of wood alcohol, etc., may be successfully substituted for the high-priced pure grain alcohol in all technical preparations. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 18 DENTAL FORMULARY 3.—Collodion Varnish. To 4 parts of sulphuric ether add 2 parts of collodion and 2 parts of “silver gloss” (to be obtained from dealers in painters’ supplies). Let the mixture stand for forty-eight hours, and shake well before using, Keep well corked. 4.—Dental Silex. Commercial solution of sodium silicate, also known as liquid or soluble glass, is diluted with 2 to 3 parts of warm water. Let stand for a few days and pour off the supernatant clear solution. MOULDS FOR DUPLICATING PLASTER CASTS FROM ORIGI- NAL CASTS OR MODELS. 1. Fresh slaked lime 10 parts Sugar 10 “ Glycerin 12 “ Dissolve the sugar in the glycerin by heating upon a water-bath, and stir in the lime. 2. Carpenter’s glue 20 parts Gelatin 20 “ Glycerin 35 “ Water 25 “ Cotton-seed oil 20 “ Place the glue, the gelatin and the water in an enamelled double (rice) boiler, let stand for twenty-four hours, heat until dissolved and add the glycerin and the cotton-seed oil with constant stirring. Directions: Place the dry, talc-coated model in the moulding flask and pour the warm solution over it. Let it stand until perfectly hard. Carefully remove the cast from the elastic mould. A number of casts may be obtained from the same mould. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 19 3. Carpenter’s glue 200 parts Water 50 “ Soak the glue in the water over night, pour off the excess and add: Glycerin 50 parts • Melt over a low fire under constant stirring until the total mass weighs 250 parts PREPARATION AND PAINTING OF DURABLE PLASTER CASTS. Three parts of plaster of Paris and 1 part of whiting are very intimately mixed by running this mixture through a fine sieve. For a binding fluid a solution of French hare or any other good quality of carpenter’s glue, in water, is used. This is prepared by soaking 5 parts of the glue in 100 parts of water for about twelve hours and heating the mixture until solution takes place. A very thick mixture of the powder and the liquid glue is now prepared and, as this cannot be poured, it is carefully painted into the impression with a fine hair pencil. A few more layers are added with the pencil, rocking the tray after each addition to prevent air bubbles, and finally the tray is filled up with a spatula. At least twelve hours are necessary before the cast is separated. The impression should be well soaped; no oil or varnish must be used. Modelling compound impressions must be perfectly dry. After separation, the cast should be further dried for about a week, when it is ready to be painted. A thin coat of boiled linseed oil is brushed over the surface and after this is thoroughly dry, the cast is then painted with artist’s tube oil colors, thinned down with oil of turpentine. The follow- ing list of colors is serviceable for the purpose: 1. Madder lake 3, dark rose. 2. Bright English red. 3. Carmine cinnabar. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 20 DENT A L FORM UFA R Y 4. Light ochre No. 1. 5. Brilliant yellow, light. 6. Terra di Siena. 7. Prussian blue. 8. Parisian ultramarine. 9. Green, light cinnabar. 10. Burned Terra di Siena. 11. Ivory black. 12. Kremnitz white. Kremnitz white (a fine quality of white lead), mixed with carmine cinnabar is to be used to represent normal mucous membrane, while inflamed membrane will be nicely repre- sented by madder lake mixed with light ochre; white, slightly blended with light ochre, produces a color similar to that of the teeth. The balance of the model is to be painted black. Water colors may be used for the same purpose; the painted casts must then be varnished. Aluminum enamel paint makes a good, durable cast varnish and paint combined. TO BRONZE PLASTER CASTS. Prepare the cast by sizing it once or twice with boiled linseed oil. The dried cast is now bronzed with any desirable shade of either dry or wet bronze. CLEANING OF PLASTER CASTS. 1. Make a thick paste of powdered cornstarch and hot water, and, with a soft brush, paint the hot mixture evenly over the cast. The layer of starch must be quite thick. After drying slowly, the starch will split and may be scalded off with the dirt without injury to the cast. 2. Prepare a saturated solution of boric acid in ammonia water, place the dried cast in this solution until thoroughly saturated; remove and dry. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 21 MOLDINE. Pure dry clay is mixed with sufficient glycerin to make a plastic mass. Place the moldine in a vessel and cover with a mixture of Glycerin 1 part Water 9 parts Boil, under constant stirring, until the water is evaporated. TO RESTORE HARDENED MOLDINE. PLASTILINE. (Artificial Modelling Clay). Lard 50 parts Washed sulphur 30 “ Clay 14 “ Zinc oxide 6 “ MOULDING SAND. Moulder’s sand, a fine quality ... 3 parts Powdered clay 1 part Mix with Glycerin 1 part Water 2 parts Best dry moulding sand 5 parts Sperm oil 1 part OILED MOULDING SAND. INVESTMENT COMPOUNDS FOR SOLDERING, CHEOPLASTIC CASTINGS, ETC. 1. Plaster of Paris 4 parts Moulding sand 4 “ Fire clay 1 part Mix and pass through a fine brass wire sieve. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 22 DENTAL FORMULARY 2. Anthracite coal ash 20 parts Plaster of Paris 30 “ Powdered soapstone 3 “ Mineral red 2 “ 3. Plaster of Paris 7 parts Asbestos powder 5 “ Powdered soapstone 1 part 4. Plumbago 1 part Calcined marble dust 1 “ Plaster of Paris 2 parts 5. Powdered soapstone 1 part Plumbago 3 parts Asbestos, grade No. 3 5 “ Plaster of Paris 7 “ 6. Plaster of Paris 7 parts Silex 14 “ Graphite, powder 12 “ 7. Plaster of Paris 33 parts Silica, fine 45 “ Silica, coarse 22 “ 8. Red bird gravel 1 part Plaster of Paris 2 parts P. S.—1. Pumice stone should not be used in an invest- ment compound. Pumice stone is a form of vulcanic glass N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 23 which readily melts when heated, thereby edging the enamel of the artificial teeth. 2. Borax and silicates in the form of sand, etc., which are present in many investment compounds, readily unite, even at a low heat, to form a low fusing glass which may run over the teeth during soldering. The teeth become rough and covered with numerous small cracks. INVESTMENT COMPOUNDS FOR GOLD CAST INLAYS, ETC. 1. English china clay 2 parts Powdered pure sand 2 “ Plaster of Paris 3 “ 2. Powdered soapstone 1 part Powdered asbestos 9 parts Plaster of Paris . 10 “ Powdered pure sand 10 “ 3. Plaster of Paris 12 parts Powdered silex 5 “ Powdered Ceylon graphite .... 3 “ 4. Powdered mica1 1 part Marble dust 1 “ Plaster of Paris 2 parts 5. Plaster of Paris 2 parts Powdered silex2 (lithowhite) .... 3 “ 1 Powdered mica may be obtained from the United States Mica Mining and Milling Company, at Micanite, Colorado. 2 Powdered pure sand, silex, lithowhite, “Kiesel” “Kieselguhr” are names given to, more or less, the same substances i. e., impure preparation of silicon oxide. Silex, or lithowhite, may be obtained from the Bridgeport Wood Finishing Company, 72 W. Lake Street, Chicago, Illinois. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 24 DENTAL FORMULARY 6. Powdered soapstone 2 parts Marble dust 2 “ Graphite 2 “ Plaster of Paris 6 “ 7. Plaster of Paris 2 parts PowTdered mica 1 part Marble dust, pulverized fine .... 1 “ Quantities are by measure, not by weight. The mica and marble dust should both be powdered as fine as flour. ARTIFICIAL STONE. Calcium hydrate 19 parts Pure silica 20 “ Aluminum oxide 42 “ Price. DENTAL CONCRETE. Ward. Plaster of Paris 17 parts Flint, No. 200 30 “ Silica XXX 36 “ BAKED CLAY MODELS. The plaster-of-Paris impression is filled with a hot gelatin or glue solution (see page 19). After cooling, a perfect thick- walled impression of this cast in hard plaster of Paris is prepared, and set aside for a few hours to dry. A good quality of potter’s clay is carefully pressed in this impression and set aside in a warm place for two hours to dry. The impression is now carefully removed and the clay model is lightly burned at about 1800° F. in a suitable furnace. The cold model is now coated with a mixture of Majolika enamel and water and burned again. Three colors of enamel are required; pink for representing the mucous surfaces, ivory for the teeth and black for the body of the model. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by- weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 25 FIRE-BRICKS. When not exposed to mechanical injury a mixture of 1 part (bulk) of fireclay and 3 to 4 parts (bulk) of sawdust, moistened with water and worked into form and burnt, enables a very much higher temperature to be obtained in a furnace than can be obtained with ordinary fire-bricks. In building a furnace of fire-bricks or slabs, fireclay must be used as cement instead of mortar. The fireclay should not be mixed with water as is usually the case, but with a thin solution of silicate of soda. A furnace of this kind is readily adapted to muffles for continuous gum work, crucibles, ladles, etc. If the furnace is required for muffles, a ledge should be left at the back about five inches above the top of the fire box to carry the muffle and the front will have to be built up, leaving a hole for the door about nine inches above the top of the muffle, to enable fresh fuel to be added as required. If the shaft is nine inches wide clear inside, the muffle should not exceed four and a half inches, as room is required on each side to allow the fuel to fall down over the sides of the muffle. If no blower is used a high chimney is required to furnish the necessary draught. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. CHAPTER If. GUTTA-PERCHA PREPARATIONS, DENTAL RUB- BERS, MODELLING AND INLAY WAXES, PLASTIC IMPRESSION COMPOUNDS, ETC. Purified gutta-percha 10 parts Chloroform 95 “ Alcohol 5 “ SOLUTION OF GUTTA-PERCHA. TRAUMATICINE. Purified gutta-percha 1 part Chloroform 9 parts Lead carbonate 1 part Shake the mixture frequently until complete solution of the gutta-percha has taken place. Set aside for a few days and finally decant the clear liquid. Keep in well-stoppered bottles. Gutta-percha base plate 10 parts Chloroform, a sufficient quantity. CHLORO-PERCHA. EUCA-PERCHA COMPOUND, BUCKLEY. Gutta-percha base plate 480 parts Menthol 16 a Thymol 24 “ Eucalyptol 480 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 26 DENTAL FORMULARY 27 TEMPORARY STOPPING. 1. White beeswax 1 part Gutta-percha base plate 4 parts Prepared chalk 4 “ Melt the wax on a water bath, add the gutta-percha, stir until liquefied, and incorporate the chalk. Knead until thoroughly mixed and pass through a dental rolling mill, having grooved rolls. 2. Gutta-percha base plate 2 parts Zinc oxide 8 “ Calcium sulphate 1 part 3. Dissolve pure gutta-percha in five times its weight of chloroform, allow to deposit, pour the clear solution upon zinc oxide (double the quantity of gutta-percha taken) make into a paste, and spread into sheets, which are cut into suitable pieces. 4.—Flagg. White beeswax 2 parts Gutta-percha base plate 6 “ Powdered silex 3 “ Powdered feldspar 3 “ 5.—Hill. Powdered feldspar 1 part Powdered silex 1 “ Powdered quicklime 2 parts Gutta-percha base plate, a sufficient quantity to make a stiff mass. 6.—Jacob. Gutta-percha base plate *1 part Powdered silex 4 parts N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 28 DENTAL FORMULARY 7.—Coppered Gutta-Percha. Gutta-percha base plate 6 parts Copper oxide, black 6 “ Zinc oxide . 12 “ 8.—Silver Nitrate Gutta-Percha. Gutta-percha base plate 2 parts Zinc oxide 10 “ Silver nitrate 1 part 9.—Aluminum Gutta-Percha. White gutta-percha base plate ... 16 parts Aluminum powder 10 “ Zinc oxide 2 “ Prepared chalk 1 part 10.—Stanno-Percha. Equal parts by weight of gutta-percha base plate and sifted sponge tin (see page 62) are put in a mortar, the mortar is placed in a heated sand bath and the ingredients are thoroughly kneaded until a grayish-blue mass is obtained. The mass is now divided into two equal parts; the first portion is reserved, while the second portion is again kneaded with an equal amount of sponge tin. The first portion is soft and is used for lining the cavity, while the second (harder) portion is used for the body of the filling. IMPRESSION GUTTA-PERCHA. Gutta-percha 35 parts Zinc oxide 9 “ Vermilion 56 “ IDEAL BASE PLATE. 1. Black gutta-percha 1 part Gum shellac 18 parts N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 29 2. Gum shellac 1 part Perfection impression compound, Keer . “ Melt the gum shellac on a low fire and gradually add, under constant stirring, the impression compound. Pour on a glass slab and roll with a wet rolling pin to the desired thickness. 3. Artificial gum shellac (metakaline) . . 1 part White beeswax 4 parts DENTAL RUBBERS. After Dr. E. Wildman. Dark Brown. Caoutchouc 48 parts Sulphur 24 “ Red. Caoutchouc 48 parts Sulphur 24 “ Vermilion 36 “ Dark Pink. Caoutchouc 48 parts Sulphur 24 “ Zinc oxide 30 “ Vermilion 10 “ Grayish-white. Caoutchouc 48 parts Sulphur 24 “ Zinc oxide 96 “ Black. Caoutchouc 48 parts Sulphur 24 “ Ivory, or drop black 24 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 30 DENTAL FORMULARY Jet Black. Caoutchouc 48 parts Sulphur 24 “ Ivory, or drop black 48 “ TO RESTORE HARDENED DENTAL RUBBER. Place the rubber sheet in warm water, let it soften, remove the cloth sheets and thoroughly brush the rubber with warm soap suds. Wash in wTarm water, dry the sheets and with a soft sponge dipped in oil of turpentine thoroughly wash over the sheets on both sides. After the oil of turpentine has been absorbed, the rubber is ready for use. TO MAKE A TRUE RUBBER SOLUTION. Ethylene dichloride, commonly known as Butch Liquid, and not ethyl chloride, gives a true solution, not merely a diffusion of rubber, and has the advantage of being non- inflammable. Its solvent power is greater than carbon disulphide, chloroform and carbon tetrachloride; it has a boiling point of 130° F. and is more volatile than other solvents, and its vapors are non-explosive. COLD VULCANIZATION. Sulphur chloride 1 part Carbon disulphide 30 parts The rubber cast is plunged in this solution and left there from sixty to eighty seconds. It is now removed, left to dry in a warm room (about one to two minutes) and washed in a weak alkaline solution, i. e., a 2 per cent solution of sal soda in water. It is claimed by Ilempe that the gradual hardening and deterioration of vulcanized India rubber goods is due to the spontaneous evaporation of the solvent liquids contained in India rubber and those introduced during the process of CONSERVATION OF VULCANIZED RUBBER GOODS. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 31 vulcanization. Other observers claim that the evaporation of the solvents, especially in the presence of air and sunlight, or in cold temperature, causes the sulphur present in the vulcanite gradually to oxidize and finally to form sulphuric acid, which, in turn, destroys the rubber. Keeping the rub- ber goods immersed in a weak alkaline aqueous solution or in paraffin oil, stored away from light at room temperature, will act as a permanent preservative. According to Larine, there are only three solutions of the many employed in experimental work which have shown themselves to be of practical value, namely, a 3 per cent solution of phenol, a 3 per cent solution of aniline, and an 8 per cent solution of glycerin, with an equal amount of alcohol, in water. Three per cent phenol is the best method of all. The author has seen tubes that had been immersed for ten years in this liquid which had not altered a particle during this long period; a truly remarkable fact, when we consider the rapidity with which such articles deteriorate in the air. The only precaution to be observed is to have the containers of such size as to prevent kinks. Another advantage is that the liquid does not change its character. The flasks may be opened at any time without the necessity of preparing a fresh solution. Three per cent aniline acts in a similar manner, though a slight lengthening and increase in volume is noted in the case of black rubber. Alcohol-glycerin solution has no effect on deteriorated articles, but new rubber goods are preserved when immersed therein. PRESERVING RUBBER DAM. Secure only such rubber as is in the best possible condition. Too much care in this direction cannot be exercised. Rub- ber, being an organic substance, necessarily undergoes a change when exposed to the air and must, therefore, be protected in order to insure its usefulness. To accomplish N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 32 DENTAL FORMULARY this end, secure a number of Mason’s glass jars, filling the same with pure boiled water and adding to each jar of water a few drops of such antiseptics as phenol or lysol. Then immerse a loose roll of fresh rubber dam in an upright position, taking the precaution to shake out all the air between the folds before screwing on the cover. The jar should at all times be filled with water to the point of over- flowing in order to exclude all air. Rubber preserved in the above manner can be kept in perfect condition, if necessary, for a period of about one year. For use, remove the desired amount, dry the rubber and rub down with talcum powder. STICKY WAX. 1. Rosin 16 parts Yellow beeswax 8 “ Vermilion 1 part Melt on a water bath and stir together, pour on a glass slab and roll with wet fingers into pencils or pour in moulds. (See pages 34 and 36.) 2. Yellow beeswax 4 parts Rosin 1 part Gum damar 1 “ 3. Yellow beeswax 1 part Rosin 3 parts 4. Gum damar 1 part White beeswax 4 parts Light yellow rosin 7 “ 5. Yellow beeswax 48 parts Light rosin 84 “ Gum damar 12 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 33 PINK BASE PLATE WAX. 1. White beeswax 50 parts Paraffin 25 “ Alkanet root, whole 1 part Melt the wax and the paraffin and add the alkanet root. Leave on the fire until the desired shade of pink is obtained, strain through cheese cloth into tin moulds, about or yg-inch thick. Have the moulds coated with a film of glycerin. The lids of the tin boxes in which dental rubber is sold make good moulds. To polish the sheet wax, pass between the rubber rollers of a wash wringer. 2. White beeswax 40 parts Gum turpentine 10 “ Cotton-seed oil 3 “ Vermilion 4 “ 3. (To be used in hot weather.) White beeswax 20 parts Crude turpentine 4 “ Cotton-seed oil 1 part Vermilion 2 parts 4. (To be used in cold weather.) White beeswax 20 parts Crude turpentine 6 “ Cotton-seed oil 2 “ Vermilion 2 “ 5.—Hard Base Plate Wax. Yellow beeswax 50 parts Gum mastic 6 “ Prepared chalk 3 “ Vermilion 4 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 34 DENTAL FORMULARY 6. Rosin 1 part Ceresin 3 parts Paraffin 6 “ 7. Yellow beeswax ....... 1000 parts Venice turpentine 130 “ Lard 65 “ Red bole 725 “ MAKING SHEET WAX. 1. Melt the wax in a rather narrow vessel; fill a round, smooth pint bottle with cold water, coat the outer surface with a film of glycerin or soap suds and dip the bottle in the melted wax, quickly remove it and, if the wax coat is not sufficiently thick, dip again. Cut the sheet with a sharp pen knife and immediately flatten out. 2. Take two pieces of ordinary glass; have both warm, dry and oiled. Place the first piece upon a flat surface and at each corner place a small block of wood of the thickness of the wax desired. Pour a sufficient quantity of the melted wax upon the plate and quickly lay the second glass over the first, pressing the same until each corner touches the gauge blocks. 3. A porous cell, made for electric batteries, about 3| x 7 inches, is filled with cold water, and thoroughly wet all over. Wipe the cell with a damp sponge or cloth to remove superfluous moisture; then with a steady hand plunge the cell down into the wax, and remove rather slowly. The wax should not be too hot—the cooler it becomes the thicker the N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 35 sheets will be. If very thick sheets are desired a second plunge may be made. Quickly cut the sheets on opposite sides of the cylinder, remove, and place in a pan of cold water. After three or four plunges put fresh cold water in the cell. The sheets may be trimmed by shearing before they become too cold and brittle. Rosin 1 part Yellow beeswax 16 parts WAX FOR PARTIAL IMPRESSIONS. GOLD INLAY IMPRESSION WAXES. 1. Yellow beeswax 10 parts Gum damar 10 “ Yellow ceresin 20 “ Hard paraffin (120° F. melting point) . 30 “ Carnauba wax 30 “ Dye stuff to suit Melt the beeswax, ceresin, paraffin and carnauba wax in a porcelain dish on a water-bath, add the gum damar in small portions and stir constantly until a uniform mass is obtained. Remove from the fire and add the dyestuff. Gold inlay waxes should be colored deeply with a dye especially suitable to the needs of the operator. Lamp black or an oil-soluble aniline dye are best suited for this purpose. (The red and blue “Cerasine” or “Sudan Red” aniline dyes are to be recommended.) Gold inlay wax may be cast into sticks as outlined below. 2.—Inlay Impression Wax. Price. Stearic acid 110 parts Paraffin 10 “ Beeswax 15 “ Tamarack1 10 “ Gum damar 110 “ 1 Tamarack is a trade name for American larch turpentine. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 36 DENTAL FORMULARY 3. White beeswax 1 part Hard paraffin 1 “ 4. Yellow beeswax 10 parts Carnauba wax 30 “ Hard paraffin 50 “ CASTING STICKS OF STICKY WAX, INLAY IMPRESSION WAX, ETC. Obtain glass tubing of convenient length; the tubing should have fairly thick walls. The bore may be of any diameter, to | inch gives convenient sticks of wax. The ends of the tubes should be ground, not melted smooth, as melting lessens the bore at the point of fusion. Thoroughly clean the tubes and dry the inside by pushing pieces of cotton wool through them. The tubes must then be lubricated to prevent the wax from sticking. Do not lubricate with oils; glycerin forms a very effective lubricant for this purpose; and is easily applied by saturating pieces of cotton wool with it and pushing them through the tubes. Having the wax melted and the tubes lubricated, fill each of the tubes as follows: Attach a piece of rubber tubing to one end of the glass tube; take the other end of the rubber tubing in the mouth. Dip the free end of the glass tube into the melted wax and suck the wax up until the tube is full. Pinch the rubber tubing close to the glass tube, and the tube, full of wax, can then be lifted and laid in a horizontal position. Then release and remove the rubber tubing. The wax will not run out. Repeat the process until all tubes are filled. When cool, the sticks of wax can readily be pushed out of the tubes. If a piece of wax should stick in a tube, it is either because the tube was not properly lubricated or because its bore was not uniform. Pink wax base plate may be cast into sticks for “waxing up” in the same manner, but owing to the much greater fluidity of pink wax when melted, it is more difficult to manipulate. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 37 ENGRAVER’S WAX. 1. Yellow beeswax 1 part Tallow 1 “ Burgundy pitch 2 parts 2. Cotton-seed oil 1 part Rosin 1 “ Beeswax 2 parts Pleat common rosin in a suitable vessel until it flows freely, then add, slowly, and with constant stirring, plaster of Paris until on dropping a small portion on a plate or marble slab and allowing it to cool, then prying it off with the point of a knife it springs off with a metallic ring. With too little plaster it is soft and bends; with too much it is hard and brittle and loses its adhesiveness. This is used by jewelers for a variety of purposes; to cement pieces of thin metal to chucks for turning, to cement stones into fittings, and tools into metal and wooden handles. It is handy in a dental laboratory for cementing felt and brush wheels to the chucks of the polishing lathe. JEWELER’S WAX. IMPRESSION WAX. Hard paraffin 1 part Yellow beeswax 7 parts 1. Lard 15 parts Venice turpentine 25 “ Yellow beeswax 200 “ White bole 150 “ Melt the wax, turpentine and lard together, then incor- porate the white bole. When a uniform mass is obtained, MODELLING WAX. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 38 DENTAL FORMULARY pour the mixture into cold water. Knead the mass under the water until it assumes a uniform degree of plasticity. 2. Cotton-seed oil 1 part Venice turpentine 4 parts Cornstarch 8 “ Yellow beeswax 16 “ Vermilion 1 part TO CLARIFY WAX REMNANTS. 1. Melt about a pound of wax remnants, bring to a boil, and break a fresh egg in the boiling wax, stir for three to four minutes, until the egg is coagulated, and strain through cheese-cloth. 2. In a flat vessel, having sloping sides, melt a pound of wax remnants in an equal amount of water; stir a tablespoonful of sulphuric acid, added in a slow stream, into the hot wax, let it cool, and cut off the lower sediment. 3. The wax remnants are melted and strained through cheese- cloth and boiled in Oxalic acid 1 part Water 50 parts On cooling, the wax separates from the oxalic acid solution. TO FILTER WAX. The wax may be dissolved in chloroform, carbon disulphide or other solvents, and then filtered through paper in a well- covered heated glass funnel. A simpler method consists in heating the wax with 5 per cent of its own weight with N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 39 sodium sulphate on a water-bath for about fifteen minutes and then filtering through a cotton plug inserted into a glass funnel surrounded by a hot-water jacket. TO DETERMINE THE MELTING POINT OF WAXES, FATS, RESINS, ETC. The material whose melting point is to be determined is carefully melted in a small, perfectly dry beaker, and a capillary tube is dipped into the liquefied substance, and, when filled, one end of the tube is sealed in the flame and it is then put aside in a cool place for several hours. At the end of this time the tube is tied to the bulb of a delicate ther- mometer, the length of the tube being the same as the ther- mometer bulb. The thermometer and attached tube are placed in water and gently warmed until the capillary column of the wax, fat, etc., becomes transparent. At this moment the thermometric reading is made, which indicates the melting point of the substance under observa- tion. MODELLING COMPOSITION. 1. Stearin 25 parts Gum damar 50 “ Powdered soapstone 85 “ Carmine, enough to color. Melt the stearin on a water-bath, add the gum damar, and when melted stir in the powdered soapstone, tinted with the carmine. 2. Stearic acid 20 parts Oleic acid 4 “ Gum copal 19 “ Ivrapplac 17 “ Powdered soapstone 40 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 40 DENTAL FORMULARY 3. Manila copal 30 parts Light-colored rosin 30 “ Carnauba wax 10 “ Stearic acid 5 “ Powdered soapstone 75 “ Carmine, enough to color. 4. Best light-colored rosin 50 parts Gum copal 2 “ Yellow ceresin 8 “ Gum turpentine 5 “ Powdered soapstone 50 “ Menthol | part Fresh slaked lime 10 parts Coloring.—Red: Florentine lake. Brown: Crocus mar- tis (iron hydroxide). 5. Stearin 25 parts Semi-solid gum copal 25 “ Powdered soapstone 50 “ Carmine, enough to color. CARVING COMPOUND FOR CROWN CUSPS. Powdered Ceylon graphite .... 1 part Perfection impression compound, Kerr . 4 parts Melt the perfection impression compound in a porcelain capsule on a water-bath, add the graphite under constant stirring, and roll or mould into sticks. (Metalloid Compound). ELASTIC COMPOUND FOR CROWN AND PLATE SWAGER. Gelatin 250 parts Zinc oxide 175“ Glycerin 400 “ Water 300 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 41 Mix the zinc oxide with 200 parts of glycerin to a smooth paste; boil the gelatin in the water and the remaining glycerin until dissolved, and stir it into the zinc oxide paste. After twelve hours the mass becomes solid, resembling unvulca- nized rubber. LIQUID CONTINUOUS GUM ENAMEL. Pink celluloid 15 parts Oil of cedar wood 5 “ Acetone 30 “ Paint the solution two or three times over that portion of the vulcanite plate which is usually occupied by pink rubber. Each coat must be thoroughly dry before the next is added. Polish with prepared chalk. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. CHAPTER III. CEMENTS, ADHESIVES, AND VARNISHES. Dental cements may, according to their chemical nature, be divided into: DENTAL CEMENTS. Oxyphosphate of zinc cements, Oxychloride of zinc cements, Oxysulphate of zinc cements, and Silicate cements. The Oxyphosphate of Zinc Cements. The oxvphosphate of zinc cements were introduced into dentistry in 1878 by the Rostaing Brothers, of Dresden, under the name of “Dentinogen.” On account of the superiority in regard to their wearing qualities over the other dental cements, they at once gained great popularity, and they have become an indispensable medium for certain phases of reconstruction of tooth substances, the attachment of artificial substitutes to natural teeth, etc. The liquid of the oxyphosphate cements consists of a more or less concentrated phosphoric acid solution, to which is added zinc phosphate, aluminum phosphate, or strontium phosphate, in various proportions, more or less, to the point of saturation. Commercially, three forms of phosphoric acids are met with: 1. Orthophosphoric acid, U. S. P., H3P04. It is a colorless, inodorous, strongly acid liquid of a syrupy consistency which is miscible with water and alcohol in all proportions. It has N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 42 DENTAL FORMULARY 43 a specific gravity of 1.710 and contains about 85 per cent of absolute orthophosphoric acid. Besides this acid, weaker solutions (a 50 per cent and a 10 per cent solution) are also found in the market. On standing, the acid gradually deposits crystalline prisms, which are readily redissolved when slightly heated. Orthophosphoric acid readily absorbs water from the atmosphere. 2. Metaphosphoric acid or glacial phosphoric acid; HP03. It is found in commerce in glassy sticks or lumps, containing from 10 to 15 per cent sodium metaphosphate, which is added to give tenacity, transparency and hardness to the sticks. The acid is readily soluble in water, the solu- tion gradually changes to orthophosphoric acid. The acid is very hygroscopic. 3. Pyrophosphoric acid; II4P2O7. It is a white, hygro- scopic, glassy mass which gradually changes to orthophos- phoric acid. A satisfactory acid for dental cement powders may be prepared in the following manner: One part of pure zinc phosphate, 20 parts of glacial phosphoric acid in sticks, and 10 parts of distilled water, all quantities by weight, are placed in a glass-stoppered bottle and set aside in a mod- erately warm place and occasionally shaken until the solu- tion is completed. The acid is then filtered through a cone of glass wool placed tightly into the neck of a glass funnel. The first portions of the filtrate are returned to the funnel until the solution runs off perfectly clear. The acid is immediately transferred to small glass bottles and tightly corked. Care should be taken to have the bottles perfectly dry. If the cement powder when mixed with the acid hardens too quickly, the latter should be lightly concen- trated on a sand bath; if the cement sets too slowly, a very small quantity of distilled water should be added to the acid. Occasionally it will be found that the last part of the acid gives poor results when mixed with the powxler; it is then best to discard the fluid instead of trying to remedy the . evil by heating, etc. A small office preparation bottle N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 44 DENTAL FORMULARY with a ground glass cap makes a good container for the acid for office use. The powder of the oxyphosphate cements consists principally of a pure zinc oxide prepared especially for this purpose, and it is usually referred to as a basic zinc oxide. This basic zinc oxide may be employed in its pure form or more or less tinted with various metallic colors to produce the desired shades. Some makers add small amounts of specially prepared Portland cement to the zinc oxide. It is claimed that the well-known Harvard cement repre- sents a mixture of this kind. Various analyses made have shown that the powder of the Harvard cement contains approximately 87 per cent of basic zinc oxide and 13 per cent of Portland cement. Portland cement is approximately composed of Silica 20 to 25 per cent Aluminum oxide 6 to 8 “ Iron oxide 4 to 5 “ Calcium oxide 60 to 65 “ Magnesium oxide 1 to 2 “ A pure zinc oxide may be prepared by dissolving pure metallic zinc in nitric acid, U. S. P. The solution is evapo- rated in a porcelain vessel until it solidifies on cooling. The basic zinc oxide may be prepared as follows: One pound of pure zinc oxide, prepared as above, or one of the English preparations known as Hubbuck’s or Wilson’s, is thor- oughly mixed with a | ounce of boric acid previously dissolved in water or alcohol. The mixture is tightly packed into a Hessian crucible covered with a fire-clay slab and put into a warm place to dry. Finally it is exposed to a white heat for several hours. After cooling, the crucible is broken, the vitrified zinc oxide is powdered, passed through fine bolting-cloth, and bottled for use. The cement powder thus prepared should not be exposed to the atmosphere, as it readily absorbs moisture. Cement powder may also be prepared by using a mixture of: N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 45 Pure zinc oxide 250 parts Pure magnesium oxide 50 “ Boric acid 5 “ or by mixing pure zinc oxide with a 2 per cent nitric acid solution well diluted with water. The process of vitrifica- tion is the same as referred to above. Much of the basic zinc oxide used for dental cements in the United States is imported from Germany; deHaen’s Chemical Works, in List, near Hannover, enjoy a wide reputation for making a very pure article, especially adapted for such purposes. The tinting of the basic zinc oxide is best accomplished by adding suitable mineral colors. Black oxide of man- ganese, cadmium sulphide and cobalt blue are useful to produce the various shades desired. Only very small quan- tities are needed. Yellow ochre and Terra di Siena are also used for such purposes, but with less success. By keeping on hand small quantities of the colors referred to above, the various shades may be extemporaneously prepared. (See Appended Formulas for details in preparing the color materials.) For mixing the cement, a large, thick, polished glass slab and a stiff, non-corrodible spatula are best adapted. Steel spatulas discolor the cement, due to the action of the phosphoric acid and they may precipitate certain chemicals added to the cement powder, as silver, for instance. The best results are obtained by using an agate, bone or Bakelite spatula. “The manipulator who becomes familiar with the proper conditions during the mixing of cement as felt under the spatula will obtain far better results than one relying on the incorporating of definite proportions. In mixing any oxyphosphate, the beginning must be a clean slab and spatula. Then the powder and liquid must be placed thereon sufficiently apart to render it possible to cut in a small addition of powder in a cleanly manner, and incorporate it thoroughly with the liquid, without having a borderland half-mixed, to help impart a clotty condition. Each addition N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 46 DENTAL FORMULARY of powder must be manipulated until there is the feeling and appearance of a thorough mixture before more powder is added in the same manner. Take plenty of time, making the additions of powder compare to the volume of the mix, i. e., as many separate additions in making a small mix as a larger one.” (Ames.) The temperature of the glass slab should be approxi- mately 60° F.; a little warmer in a cold room, and vice versa in a warm room. The humidity of the air also materially influences the setting of the cement. In connection with the application of oxyphosphate cements the question is frequently asked: Why do pulps die under an oxyphosphate cement filling? Analyses made of various cement powders revealed the presence of certain arsenical compounds in very small quantities which were apparently demonstrated by the arsenical mirror. This test is seemingly erroneous, as Hauser has shown. Cement pow- ders are frequently tinted with ultramarine, a fine blue pig- ment which is artificially prepared from a mixture of Glauber’s salt, charcoal, soda and sulphur. The presence of small quantities of this pigment in the cement powder gives a sulphur mirror which closely resembles that of the arsenical mirror. It should be remembered that arsenical compounds, if present in the oxide, are probably completely volatilized during the vitrifying process of the latter, or they are changed to some inert compound. The dying of the pulps under an oxyphosphate cement filling is probably better explained by attributing it to the chronic irritation resulting from the free phosphoric acid present in an incompletely mixed cement, or to a poorly excavated cavity. Careful excavation and varnishing of the cavity prior to inserting the filling materially reduces the danger. Hydraulic cements, i. e., such as are used for inlay work, give better results, according to Ames, if the cavity prepared for their reception is slightly moistened with water after it has been previously dehydrated with alcohol. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 47 The Oxychloride of Zinc Cements. The powder of these cements consists principally of pure white zinc oxide; it is rarely colored. The English zinc oxide (Hubbuck’s or Wilson’s) is, in general, to be pre- ferred for cement powders. The oxide should be thoroughly dried before it is employed, and kept in well-stoppered bottles to prevent absorption of moisture from the air. The liquid of the zinc oxychloride cements is usually composed of a concentrated solution of zinc chloride in water. A suitable liquid may be prepared by dissolving 1 ounce of zinc chloride in \ ounce of distilled water; after standing a few days, it is filtered and the solution is then ready for use. To reduce the quick setting of the cement, a very small quantity of borax may be added to the powder. (See Appended Formulas for details in preparing the cement.) The Oxysulphate of Zinc Cement. The oxysulphate of zinc cement is probably best known in dentistry as “Fletcher’s Artificial Dentine.” The cement consists of a powder which is usually composed of a pure dry zinc oxide to which small amounts of dehydrated zinc sulphate and, sometimes, powdered gum mastic are added. The fluid is composed of a 40 per cent solution of gum arabic in water. (See Appended Formulas for details in preparing the cement.) The Silicate Cements. Within recent years much interest has been manifested here and abroad in a new form of dental cements known as silicate cements. These cements are primarily intended to replace gold and, to some extent, porcelain, as employed for filling purpose in the anterior teeth. On account of the translucency of the finished plug, these fillings resemble tooth structure closely, and this is probably the reason why they are so extensively used at present. The silicate cements have been in use for about sixteen years, and of late they have been materially improved. Silicate cements are by no means N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 48 DENTAL FORMULARY of recent origin. For technical purposes, they are prepared by mixing liquid sodium or potassium silicate (dental silex) with prepared chalk, calcium oxide, zinc oxide and other suitable chemicals. As a dental filling material such mix- tures are not suitable, although they have been experimented with extensively; they require too much time for hardening. Manufacturing chemists have endeavored to incorporate into the powder of these new cements certain silicates, in conjunction with other suitable compounds, which when properly mixed with the ordinary cement liquid (acid phos- phate of zinc solution or liquid orthophosphoric acid) form a comparatively quick-setting cement. The resulting filling possesses the hardness of the ordinary phosphate of zinc cement, with an increased resistancy to the fluids of the mouth and a peculiar porcelain-like translucency. A number of analyses have been published relative to the composition of the silicate cement powders, which, with a reasonable percentage of errors, show the following approximate composition: Quartz 28 to 35 per cent Kaolin 50 to 55 “ Lime 10 to 12 “ Magnesia 1 to 2 “ Some manufacturers, in the circulars accompanying their cements, lay special stress upon the fact that the extraordinary qualities of their products depend upon cer- tain rare metals, especially beryllium. Beryllium, also known as glucinum, is a rare metal belonging to the mag- nesium group. Its natural oxides are found in certain parts of France and of Norway, and they also occur in crystalline form as emerald, a gem of pure green color, and in opals. The kaolin mined in St. Yrieux, France, of which the celebrated Limoges porcelain is made, contains beryllium oxide; and this very kaolin, on account of its purity, enters largely into the make-up of some of the silicate cement powders. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 49 According to a German patent, Ascher’s artificial enamel is prepared as follows: A solution of basic beryllium nitrate, Be(N03)2.2Be0, is precipitated with sodium silicate. Na2Si03. The precipitate is kept under water for some time. It is then filtered, washed, dried, and lightly calcined. The resultant preparation is ground very fine and mixed with powdered glass or pure china clay. Schoenbeck’s process consists in taking sodium-aluminum fluoride (cryolite), silicic acid and calcium oxide, fusing the same with a beryl admixture up to 5 per cent, cooling and pulverizing, and then adding to the resultant powder a phosphoric acid (meta-, ortho- or pyro-) containing a little aluminum hydroxide in suspension, until a plastic mass ensues. The making of cements of the silicate group as well as of the oxyphosphate group requires a great deal of technical knowledge which is imperative for its ultimate success. An intimate knowledge of the manufacture of these cements is of less importance to the dentist than certain definite details regarding its manipulation. For this reason the detailed instructions accompanying the various cements should be closely observed to insure success. Test fillings made in extracted teeth are the best means to acquire the necessary technic. For mixing the cement, nothing but a spatula made of some non-metallic, impervious material will do; an agate, bone or Bakelite spatula gives the best service. A few burnishers and round-headed instruments made of agate, Bakelite, bloodstone, or of platinum, gold, nickel and tantulum, or plated therewith, are essential. Metal instru- ments should be coated with a thin film of vaseline. Silicate cement possesses much less adhesiveness than the oxyphos- phate cements, consequently the suitable preparation of the cavity should be duly considered. It should not be packed into the cavity in small pellets, but rather the entire bulk of the filling should be placed at once, pressed into position, and shaped accordingly. Ample time must be allowed for thorough setting under the rubber dam. The filling is N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 50 DEN TA L FORM ULA R Y polished with strips and discs well vaselined, and after the filling is finished it should be well coated with melted hard paraffin. To avoid discoloration of the cement in mixing and filling, Ascher has issued the following instructions for the manipu- lation of his “Artificial Enamel”: Discoloration is absolutely impossible, if the enamel is rightly treated. If the material were at fault, every filling inserted would discolor—not an occasional one, as is generally the case. There are three reasons for discoloration existing. First—The entering of foreign pigments or secretions into the filling. If the enamel is properly mixed and intro- duced under sufficient pressure, there is not the slightest porosity (as exact measurements have proven) and an intrusion of foreign matter is impossible. If, however, the material has been indifferently mixed and not properly con- densed, it contains loose particles of powder that have not been compounded, and spaces which, in mixing, being pressed into the tough mass, are filled with air. The enamel is porous and liable to absorb foreign matter. To avoid this, mix quickly, incorporating all powder possible, until the mass curls from the slab when the flat side of the spatula is run lightly over it; then thoroughly mix with heavy spatu- lation to force out the air particles. Introduce under heavy pressure, for the same reason. If the pulp is nearly exposed, use cavity lining to avoid strangulation. As long as the material is plastic, everything coming in contact with it must be non-metallic and absolutely clean. Second-—If the surface of the filling is rough or poor margins exist, foreign pigments, which change the color of the whole tooth by deposits, will influence the surface and boundaries. The deposits of the pigments on a rough surface are much more intense and stay considerably longer. The roughness is caused by using coarse strips and discs, by insufficient polishing, and by destroying the upper sur- face in cases where the filling is exposed to the saliva too soon. To avoid this, construct an exact and nicely finished N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight, DENTAL FORMULARY 51 margin. The filling must not come below the margin of the cavity. A very smooth, highly polished surface must be obtained, and there must be sufficiently long protection against saliva, so much more the thinner the enamel was mixed. Stir liquid thoroughly each time, discard residue of bottle, and keep rubber dam on for at least twenty minutes. Third—The enamel in itself contains no substances which through any reaction could produce any pigment. It does contain pigments usually found in all silicates and other cements, and these are, of course, sensible to certain influences. Sulphuretted hydrogen and products of reduction can be observed as causes of darkening. But the forming of sulphuretted hydrogen and products of reduction are hardly possible, and one can scarcely attach much impor- tance to them. Should they appear, however, they could only cause a superficial discoloration—a slight indication ”— which may be easily removed by a toothbrush or, eventually, by a little tooth powder. In this case a deeper or stronger discoloration is impossible. In the darkening of lingual fillings one thing must be observed. Discoloration of the surface in consequence of roughness is more liable here, as the lingual side of the teeth cannot be kept clean. In addition, in a mirror a filling always appears considerably darker on account of the optical difference of the tooth substance. AMALGAM CEMENT. Freshly mixed amalgam and oxyphosphate of zinc cement, mixed to a thick creamy consistency, about equal parts, are thoroughly incorporated and inserted into the cavity. OXYPHOSPHATE OF ALUMINUM. Powder. Aluminum powder 40 parts Oxyphosphate of zinc cement powder . 60 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by Weight. 52 DENTAL FORMULARY Liquid. Oxyphosphate of zinc cement liquid. OXYPHOSPHATE OF COPPER. Powder. Black oxide of copper 50 parts Oxyphosphate of zinc cement powder . 50 “ Liquid. Oxyphosphate of zinc cement liquid. OXYPHOSPHATE OF GOLD. Powder. Precipitated gold powder 2 parts Oxyphosphate of zinc cement powTder . 1 part Liquid. Oxyphosphate of zinc cement liquid. 1.—Powder. SihTer chloride 2 parts Oxyphosphate of zinc cement powder . 98 “ Liquid. Oxyphosphate of zinc cement liquid. OXYPHOSPHATE OF SILVER. 2.—Powder. Silver phosphate 2 parts Oxyphosphate of zinc cement powder . 98 “ Liquid. Oxyphosphate of zinc cement liquid. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 53 OXYSULPHATE OF ZINC CEMENT (Artificial Dentine.) Powder. Powdered gum mastic 7| parts Calcined zinc oxide 100 “ Calcined zinc sulphate 12 “ Liquid. Gum arabic 25 parts Water 65 “ Alcohol 10 “ Liquid phenol £ part OXYCHLORIDE OF ZINC CEMENT. 1. Powder. Zinc sulphate, exsiccated 1 part Zinc oxide 3 parts Mix and calcine in a sand crucible at a red heat for about ten minutes; remove, powder, and bolt through fine cheese- cloth. Keep in well-stoppered bottles. Liquid. Zinc chloride 50 parts Water 25 “ Let stand for twenty-four hours and filter. 2. Powder. Powdered white glass 3 parts Zinc oxide, calcined 9 “ Liquid. Borax part Zinc chloride 20 parts Hot water 6 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 54 DENTAL FORMULARY OXYCHLORIDE OF MAGNESIUM CEMENT. (Sorel’s Magnesia Cement.) Powder. Magnesium oxide, heavy 10 parts Liquid. Magnesium chloride, saturated solution . 10 parts TIN CEMENT. Powder. Sponge-tin powder (see page 162) . . 1 part Oxyphosphate of zinc cement powder . 1 “ Liquid. Oxyphosphate of zinc cement liquid. GUTTA-PERCHA CEMENT FOR SETTING CROWNS, BRIDGES, ETC. Aristol 10 parts Oil of eucalyptus 30 “ Chloroform 30 “ Pink base plate gutta-percha, enough to make a stiff paste. CEMENT FOR REPAIRING CELLULOID. The broken surfaces are brushed with a mixture of 3 parts alcohol and 4 parts ether, and as soon as the celluloid has softened the pieces are firmly pressed together. Instead of the alcohol-ether mixture the following solution may be employed: 1. Gum camphor 1 part Gum shellac 5 parts Alcohol 20 “ 2. Celluloid 1 part Acetone 20 parts N. B.—Parts as used in this Denial Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 55 RUBBER CEMENT FOR DENTAL BASE PLATES. 1. Caoutchouc 10 parts Carbon disulphide, enough to make a thick fluid. Keep in well-stoppered bottles. 2. Unvulcanized dental rubber .... 10 parts Chloroform, enough to make a thick fluid. 1. Phenol, crystals 1 part Collodion 10 parts Yellow rosin 10 “ Ether 40 “ PULP CAPPING VARNISHES. 2. Gum mastic 2 parts Balsam of Peru 2 “ Chloroform 6 “ CAVITY VARNISHES. 1. Select gum copal 50 parts Ether 50 “ Betanaphthol 5 “ Dissolve, filter through a well-covered filter, and add enough ether to make the whole measure 75 “ 2. Gum damar 1 part Rosin, light-colored 6 parts Ether 4 “ Alcohol 4 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 56 DENTAL FORMULARY 3. Gum camphor 6 parts Gum copal 25 “ Ether 50 “ 4. Gum copal 2 parts Acetone 3 “ 5. Celluloid Impart Acetone 10 parts Amyl acetate 15 “ 6.—Carbolized Rosin. Rosin 4 parts Phenol crystals 4 “ Chloroform 3 “ 7.—Zapon Varnish. Celluloid 2 parts Gum camphor 1 part Ether 30 parts Alcohol 70 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. CHAPTER IV. HARD AND FUSIBLE ALLOYS, SOLDERS, FLUXES AND AMALGAMS; REFINING OF PRECIOUS METALS; TEMPERING OF METALS; METAL POLISHES; ETC. ALLOYING OF GOLD PLATE OF VARIOUS CARATS. After William H. Dorrance. Pure gold may be alloyed for dental purposes with an alloy consisting of: Pure silver ■ 40 parts Pure copper 60 “ according to the following equation: Present weight X present carat = whole mass; Required carat or, in figures, for making 18-carat gold. 100 parts X 24 carats — = 18)2400= 133 j parts = 100 parts pure gold 18 carats 20 parts pure copper (60 %) 13 J parts pure silver (40%) 133 J parts = whole mass. COIN GOLD. An American ten-dollar goldpiece weighs 258 grains and is 21.6-carat fine. It consists of: Pure gold 90 parts Pure copper 9 “ Pure silver 1 part N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 57 58 DENTAL FORMULARY Dental gold of various carats may be made as follows, according to the above formula: 18-Carat Gold Plate. Coin gold 100 parts Pure copper 9 “ Pure silver 11 “ 19-Carat Gold Plate. Coin gold 100 parts Pure copper 5j “ Pure silver 8| “ 20-Carat Gold Plate. Coin gold 100 parts Pure copper If “ Pure silver “ 22-Carat Gold Plate. Coin gold 100 parts Pure gold 75 “ Pure silver 5 “ GOLD ALLOYS. 14-Carats. Yellow. Pale red. Red. Pure gold . . 14 parts 14 parts 14 parts Pure silver . . 6 “ 3 “ 1 part Pure copper . 4 “ 7 “ 9 parts Yellow. Red. Pure gold . 16 parts 16 parts Pure silver . 4.2 u ■*■3 12 u X5 Pure copper 3* “ 6f “ 16-Carats. Pure gold . Yellow. 18 parts Red. 18 parts Pure silver . 3* “ oi « "2 Pure copper oi it z2 3| “ 18-Carats. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 59 20-Carats. Pure gold 20 parts Pure silver 2 “ Pure copper 2 “ GOLD PLATE. Weinstein. 1. Gold 88 parts Platinum 7\ “ Palladium 2\ “ Silver 2 “ Melting point 2075° F. 2. Gold parts Platinum 8| “ Palladium 2 “ Silver \ “ Copper 4| “ Melting point 1975° F. CAST GOLD. Weinstein. 1. Gold 80 parts Platinum 9| “ Palladium “ Silver 1 part Copper 7 parts Melting point 1975° F. 2. Pure gold 450 parts Pure platinum 25 “ GOLD PLATE FOR SEAMLESS CROWNS. Evans. Coin gold 5 parts Pure gold “ Pure silver “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 60 DENTAL FORMULARY Evans. Coin gold 5 parts Pure gold 9 “ Pure silver 1 part CROWN GOLD. CLASP METAL. 1.—Evans. Pure gold 10 parts Copper 2 “ Silver '1 part Platinum 1 “ 2.—Weinstein. Gold 63 parts Silver 17 “ Copper 7 “ Platinum 13 “ SUBSTITUTES FOR GOLD. 1. Copper 11.71 parts Platinum 2.40 “ Silver 3.53 “ 2. Zinc 1 part Copper 7 parts Platinum 16 “ SILVER COIN ALLOY. Pure silver 9 parts Pure copper 1 part ALLOYS FOR CHEOPLASTIC CASTINGS. 1.—Lower Denture Alloy. Gold 1 part Silver 2 parts Tin 20 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 61 2.—Samsioe’s Alloy. Platinum parts Gold 2\ “ Silver 29 “ Tin 65 “ 3.—Watt’s or Weston’s Alloy. Silver 1 part Tin 5 parts 1. Silver 5 parts Aluminum 95 “ {Note.—Aluminum base plates should not be invested in plaster of Paris which has been mixed with salt water. Sodium chloride in the presence of organic or inorganic acids will destroy aluminum.) ALUMINUM ALLOY. 2. Copper 1 part Silver . 6 parts Aluminum 93 “ Copper 90 parts Aluminum 10 “ This alloy is used as a substitute for low-carat gold plate; it is extensively employed in the manufacture of regulating appliances. It possesses a color similar to gold, is tenacious, ductile and malleable, and melts at about 1800° F. It may be soldered with 16 to 18-carat gold solder. Clasps may be made from this alloy; they should be thoroughly annealed and very slowly cooled, so as to retain a strong spring temper. ALUMINUM BRONZE. Platinum 1 part Silver 4 to 5 parts DENTAL ALLOY. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 62 DENTAL FORMULARY It melts at about 1800° F. It is soft and pliable and in many respects superior to pure silver. Dental rubber may be vulcanized to dental alloy without destroying its integrity. It may be soldered with 18-carat gold solder or with silver solder. MAGNALIUM. An alloy of aluminum with 10 to 15 per cent of magnesium, having a specific gravity 2.4 to 2.6 It has a silver-white color, is tenacious and ductile, and is recommended as a superior substitute for aluminum intended for plate work. Magnalium plate, No. 20 gauge, has a tensile strength of about 30,000 pounds per square inch. Magnalium resists oxidation more readily than aluminum, and is almost unaffected by dry or damp air, water, gaseous ammonia, carbon dioxide, sulphuretted hydrogen, and most organic acids. The thermal conductivity of magnalium is much greater than that of aluminum. VICTORIA METAL. An alloy composed of copper, nickel and zinc. It is in many respects equal to aluminum bronze, but softer, and possesses no elasticity. SPONGE-TIN. A solution of pure stannic chloride is precipitated with pure zinc, and the resultant sponge-tin is thoroughly washed in boiling water, until free from all acidity, and dried in a drying-room. The sponge-tin appears as a gray felt, consisting partly of light, dust-like tin particles, partly of metallic fibers and scales. It is used for filling teeth much like moss-fiber gold. Pluggers as used for sponge-gold are advised for making fillings. Scheurer. COMMERCIAL ALLOYS. Cosmos Alloy. Copper 68.77 parts Zinc 30.14 “ Lead 1.09“ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by Weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 63 Copper 60.2 parts Zinc 38.8 “ Lead 0.34 part Randolf’s Alloy. Silver 20 parts Copper 50 “ Nickel 30 “ Ruoltz’s Alloy. Reetz’s Alloy. Copper 15 parts Tin 2.34 “ Lead 1.82 “ Antimony 1 part Stellite Alloy. The manufacturers claim that “ stellite is a newly dis- covered alloy of cobalt, chromium, and semi-rare metals. It resists oxidation better than any known metal except gold and platinum.” LOW FUSION ALLOYS. Melting Antimony. Lead. Tin. Cadmium. Bismuth. point deg. F. Brophy’s 0 2| 91 0 3 240 Berry’s . 4 10 16 0 16 Crouse’s 0 5 5 1 8 190 Erman’s 0 1 1 0 2 199 Harper’s 0 4 4 1 7 180 Hodgen’s 2 5 3 0 8 244 Melotte’s . 0 3 5 0 8 205 Merck’s 0 25 25 20 55 162 Molyneau’s. Newton’s . 0 3 2 2 5 140 0 2 .3 0 5 212 Richmond’s: 1 . . 0 5 3 0 8 202 2 . . 0 19 20 13 48 Rose’s . 0 8 3 0 8 203 Simpson’s . Wood’s: 0 19 20 13 48 1 , , 0 4 2 1 7 158 2 , . 0 20 40 26 96 135 N. I}.—Parts as qs§d in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight, 64 DENTAL FORMULARY Note.—The metals have to be melted according to the above arrangement, i. e., melt the antimony first, when completely fused, add the lead, then the tin, then the cad- mium and finally, under constant stirring (with a low flame) the bismuth. Lead. Tin. Bismuth. Melting point, deg. F. 125 125 75 212 100 100 100 257 200 200 100 288 280 300 50 311 200 240 50 335 300 200 50 347 100 100 0 370 LOW FUSING ALLOYS FOR VALVE PLUGS. DIE- AND COUNTER-DIE METALS. Die Metals. Copper. Antimony. Zinc. Tin. 1 . . . . . 3 0 39 8 2 .... . 6 3 48 10 3 . 0 0 50 50 4. (Haskell’s) . . 1 2 0 8 Counter-die Metals. Lead. Tin. Bismuth. 1 . 4 1 0 2 . 3 1 2 3. (Haskell’s) . . 5 1 0 CARBON COATING FOR METAL DIES. Rosin 1 part Oil of turpentine 3 parts Dissolve and keep in a well-stoppered bottle. Paint the solution over the die and burn it off. BABBITT METAL. Haskell. This is the only metal having all the fine requirements for a dental die, which are: (1) Non-shrinkage; (2) hardness, so as not to batter; (3) toughness, so as not to break; (4) N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 65 a smooth surface; (5) melting at a low temperature. The proper formula is copper, 1 part, antimony, 2 parts; tin, 8 parts; melting in the order named. l)o not overheat, as it will oxidize the tin. SPENCE METAL. Sulphur 4 parts Iron sulphide 3 “ Lead sulphide 3 “ Zinc sulphide 3 “ Melt the sulphur in an earthenware pot and stir in the sulphides in very fine powder. Spence metal melts at about 320° F.; it is very hard and expands slightly on cooling. It gives sharp casts and may be poured into oiled plaster-of- Paris impressions. It is largely used as a die metal in the dental laboratories of England and on the European continent. SOLDERS. Pure silver 1 part Pure zinc 2 parts Pure copper 3 “ . The silver and copper are melted together in a sand or graphite crucible lined with borax; the zinc, wrapped in tissue paper to prevent oxidation, is quickly thrust into the molten mass and the whole is stirred together with a clay- pipe stem held in a pair of tongs. To prepare solder, melt 1 part of this alloy with 6 to 7 parts of clippings of the gold plate under construction. Gold Solder Alloy; Dorrance. GOLD SOLDERS. 1. Coin gold . For: 14-carat gold. . 13 16-carat gold. 15 18-carat gold. 17 20-carat gold. 19 Silver . . 7 5 4 4 Copper . . 3 3 2 2 Brass pins . . 1 1 1 1 N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 66 DENTAL FORMULARY 2. Melt together from 5 to 7 parts of scraps of the gold plate under construction with 1 part of English brass pins.1 3.—Low Fusing. 14-carat gold solder 1 part Silver solder 1 “ 4.—Made from Coin Gold. For 20-carat Gold Plate. $5.00 gold piece 16 grains cadmium. For 18-carat Gold Plate. $5.00 gold piece 16 grains copper 16 grains cadmium. For 14-carat Go’d Plate. $5.00 gold piece 16 grains silver 48 grains copper 16 grains cadmium. 5.—Zinc Type. Pure gold . For: 14-carat gold. . 50 18-carat gold. 65.5 20-carat gold. 73.7 22-carat gold. 82.5 Pure silver . . 26 19.0 12.0 8.0 Pure copper . 18 10.0 9.1 4.3 1 English brass pins, which may be obtained at a Notion Store furnish a good quality of brass for such purposes. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 67 6.—Zinc-Cadmium Type. For: 14-carat gold. 16-carat gold. 18-carat gold. 20-carat gold. Pure gold . 57.5 65.0 74.0 82.3 Pure silver 13.0 9.5 6.5 3.8 Pure copper . 22.0 18.0 12.0 8.3 Pure zinc . 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 Pure cadmium 12.0 10.5 10.0 8.5 7.—Peeso. 20- Coin gold 48 parts Nay’s 18-carat gold solder . . . . 30 “ Copper 6 “ 21- Coin gold 50 parts Peeso’s 20-carat gold solder . . . . 50 “ PLATINUM SOLDER. Platinum 25 parts Gold 75 “ IRIDIO-PLATINUM SOLDER. 1. Use platinum solder. 2. Watt’s crystal gold and platinum make an easy flowing 10 per cent platinum solder for uniting the framework in inlay, crown, bridge or continuous gum work. It flows almost as easily as pure gold. It should be used with a flux. SILVER SOLDERS. 1. Pure silver 6 parts Pure copper 3 “ Pure zinc 1 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 68 DENTAL FORMULARY 2. Coin silver 90 parts Zinc 10 “ 3. Pure silver 12 parts Brass (English brass pins) .... 6 “ SOLDER FOR NICKEL OR GERMAN SILVER. Use silver solder. (Monrey.) 12 3 Tin 80 85 88 Copper 8 G 5 Aluminum .... 12 9 7 ALUMINUM SOLDER. Melting point Tin. Lead. Bismuth. deg. F. 1 25 560 1 10 542 1 5 512 1 3 480 1 2 435 1 1 370 2 3 n 1 335 2 1 340 3 2 334 3 1 356 4 1 365 5 1 378 G 1 381 4 4 1 320 3 3 1 279 2 2 1 288 1 2 2 228 5 3 3 201 SOFT SOLDERS. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 69 SOLDER FOR ATTACHING METAL TO GLASS, PORCELAIN, ETC. Bismuth 1 part Lead 6 parts Antimony 9 “ The alloy expands on cooling, hence its usefulness as a “solder” to attach metal to glass, porcelain, etc. FLUXES FOR HARD SOLDERING. 1. Calcined borax (borax glass) .... 1 part Yellow vaseline 2 parts 2. Borax 240 parts Boric acid 240 “ Ammonium chloride 12 “ Potassium carbonate 5 “ Hot water 2000 “ 3.—Weinstein. Borax glass, fused 55 parts Boric acid, not fused 35 “ Silica 10 “ Place in a clean sand crucible, and bring to a fair red heat. When fluid, pour the mixture into cold water. Remove from the water as soon as possible, dry, pulverize, and pass through a fine sieve. 4.—Dodel. Borax 7 parts Boric acid 7 “ Distilled cold water 50 “ Shake, until dissolved. 5. Calcined borax (borax glass) .... 4 parts Calcined sodium chloride 3 “ Calcined potassium carbonate ... 2 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 70 DENTAL FORMULARY 6. Calcined borax (borax glass) .... 7 parts Ammonium chloride 1 part 7. Phosphoric acid, U. S. P 5 parts Water 5 “ Alcohol 5 “ TO TEASE SOLDER A common slate pencil is better for teasing solder than an instrument. The solder does not adhere to it and it does not heat up and burn the fingers. It can also be used for stirring fusible alloys. Small crevices, holes, etc., may be easily covered with solder by first filling these cavities with sponge-gold. FLUXES FOR SOFT SOLDERING. 1. Dental cement liquid (phosphoric acid) . 1 part Alcohol 1 “ 2. Zinc 5 parts Hydrochloric acid 10 “ Dissolve, and, after reaction has ceased, add Ammonium chloride 3 parts Water 10 “ 3. Pieces of zinc are dissolved in hydrochloric acid until the acid is saturated. The resultant solution of zinc chloride is mixed with an equal amount of a mixture of equal parts of ammonia water and alcohol. After standing a few days the solution is filtered and is then ready for use. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 71 4. Zinc chloride 2 parts Water . 4 “ Alcohol 4 “ 5. Rosin 45 parts Suet 45 “ Melt, and add, with constant stirring Ammonium chloride 10 parts FLUX FOR SOLDERING ALUMINUM. Stearic acid 80 parts Zinc chloride 10 “ Tin chloride 10 “ SOLDER FOR REPAIRING BROKEN METAL, FINE INSTRU- MENTS, ETC., WHEN HEAT WOULD BE INJURIOUS. (Cold Solder.) Solder: Tin 10 parts Silver 8 “ Bismuth 1 part Platinum 1 “ Melt together, cast in an ingot and rasp to filings. Mix filings, 3 parts, and flux, 1 part, to a smooth paste when about to use. Omitting the bismuth gives a granular mass suitable for filling crevices; omitting the platinum reduces the strength and requires an hour to harden. Flux: Metallic sodium 1 part Mercury 50 parts Keep in glass-stoppered bottle. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 72 DENTAL FORMULARY THE MANUFACTURE OF DENTAL AMALGAM ALLOYS. N. K. Garhart. The metal formulas of all dental amalgam alloys that are usually found on the market are composed of two or more of the following four metals: Silver, tin, copper and zinc. Silver, tin and copper are the metals most commonly used, although zinc in conjunction with these three is becom- ing more frequently used. Gold and platinum are not used to any appreciable extent. Only minute traces of these metals can be found in the so-called gold and platina alloys. It is not the expense of making the alloy that concerns the average manufacturer, but the expense of marketing his products precludes the use of such expensive metals. Simple silver and tin formulas are rarely used nowadays. The test of time has proven that such simple formulas make very poor alloys. Copper and zinc have an effect of controlling the shrinking factor of an alloy, also hastening its setting properties. That copper toughens and increases the edge- strength has been known for many years. It also is well known that it causes discoloration when present in large quantities. Aluminum, bismuth and antimony have been exploited for the purpose of adding some special virtue to alloys. I must admit that I have never found any advan- tages in using any of these metals. Alloys containing appreci- able amounts of bismuth and antimony discolor the hand to an unusual degree while aluminum can never be used in quantities beyond 1 per cent. If larger amounts of aluminum are used the amalgam will suddenly decompose, setting free the mercury and converting the other metals to oxides. Various forms of bronze have been suggested for imparting a beneficial action to alloys. My observation and experience has been that such beneficial results are mainly due to copper, which constitutes about 80 to 90 per cent of the bronze. Most amalgam authorities claim that silver is the expanding element and tin the contracting element of all amalgamating alloys. Hereinafter my experiments will prove that this is not altogether true. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 73 We have heard a great deal of discussion in regard to the so-called white alloys, and the question is daily asked us if our alloy will maintain its color indefinitely in the mouth. Since I believe that the discussion of color should come under the head of formulas, I propose to dispose of this matter now. Amalgams either oxidize or sulphidize in the mouth. I actually believe that most of the discolora- tion is due to oxidation. We all knowT that any form of gold under 18k will rapidly discolor in the mouth; hence if it requires pure gold from 80 to 90 per cent fine to prevent discoloration, why should it not require the same amount of gold to prevent amalgam from discoloring? You will readily appreciate the fact that it is impossible to use such a high percentage of gold, and experience has proven that even 15 per cent of gold will not prevent discoloration in amalgam fillings. Of course manufacturers say that they make alloys that will not discolor, but you may believe as much of this story as you wish. We know that some alloys discolor more easily than others. You can always attribute this cause to the presence of too much tin or copper and sometimes both metals. The reason why a great many alloy fillings retain their bright color in the mouth is due to the constant polishing that they receive from the mastication of food. You cannot attribute the retention of color to any other cause, inasmuch as minute quantities of other metals and special methods of preparing the alloy will not protect the amalgam from discoloring. In chemistry we have certain fixed and immutable laws which are beyond the control of man. It is common belief that the smelting of alloys is a simple procedure. All that is required is a crucible, the metals, some borax and a furnace in which we are to liquify the metals with heat. To the competent metallurgist the proper smelting of alloys is not a difficult proceeding. That it requires technic and skill is perfectly true. Not all formulas are melted alike; hence a full knowledge of the chemistry of metals is required. Most metals have a great affinity N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 74 DENTAL FORMULARY for oxygen when in a molten state, and some of them are volatile at certain temperatures. To preserve the integrity of the formulas so that loss due to volatilization and liqua- tion, or separation of the metals will not occur during the smelting and pouring process are a few of the important features to which the metallurgist must give careful atten- tion. In regard to the furnace work I will say that the gas and air must be under perfect control. This requires the use of delicate regulators. Both gas and air should be under pressure and so proportionately mixed as to always maintain a deoxidizing atmosphere in the furnace. Powdered carbon as a preventative for oxidation is far preferable to borax. If by any accident some of the molten mass should oxidize, borax will dissolve the oxides, while carbon will reduce them to the metallic state. Carbon has a greater affinity for oxygen than that possessed by any of the metals most commonly used for amalgam purposes. It is quite necessary that the metals must be treated in the furnace for some time so that their chemical union may be completed. Graphite crucibles are most generally used for holding the metals. The use of crucible covers is necessary for preventing oxida- tion during the smelting process. Simply liquefying the metals, stirring and pouring them will not produce a homo- genous product. The use of iron rods for stirring should be abandoned, and compressed carbon rods substituted in their place. Molten alloy will dissolve iron, and it will also attack the ingot mould, which is usually made from cast iron. The ingot moulds should be covered with a thin film of carbon, which is readily accomplished by smoking it over a coal-oil flame. I have always considered it a wise policy to smelt each ingot separately, and so have my furnaces designed to hold a number of small crucibles. The cutting process is the method employed for reducing the ingot to a fine state of division, so that the alloy will readily combine with mercury. This process is one of the most important branches of this industry. Most makers cut or shave their alloys on an ordinary lathe. The lathe N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 75 tool is usually fed by hand. The self-feeding mechanism of an ordinary lathe is entirely too coarse for this purpose. Several years ago I abandoned the hand process of cutting alloys, and had designed for my use a special automatic tool-feeding mechanism. The filing process is not a scientific way of cutting alloys. The filings are not uniform and there is no method for sharpening the file. A cylindrical file is generally used, and because of their great expense they are used until they are well worn out. When the file is new small particles of steel break off with the alloy. These steel particles must be carefully removed with the aid of an electro-magnet. It requires but a short time for the file to become dull; hence the alloy thereafter is torn off by friction. Since heat is a product of friction, it is very apparent that filings take up oxygen from the atmosphere. The shaving method requires the use of keen-edged tools, and is by far the most scientific way to cut alloys. The tools are sharpened from time to time, thereby producing a clean and even cut. The finest grade of steel is employed and they are carefully tempered to the required degree of hardness, in keeping with the character of alloy to be cut. Alloys containing large quantities of copper and silver are very brittle. The quick-setting alloys are so brittle that they are very difficult to shave. They are usually cut in the form of a needle-like shaving. In this state they combine more readily with mercury than when they are in a flake-like form. The failure of a manufacturer to imitate another’s pro- duct is not due to the formula, but to the cutting process. Chemical analyses will reveal the exact metal formula of any alloy. It is not the formula but the exact method of cutting that bothers imitators. So it will be observed that the personality of the alloy can be readily changed by the cutting process. We may take two alloys of the same formulas, one cut in thin shavings, and the other in thick ones. They will mix and set so differently that the N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 76 DENTAL FORMULARY average practitioner would conclude that they were widely different from each other in formula. It is this variation in the thickness of the shavings that has a wonderful influence upon shrinkage, expansion, edge-strength and setting factors of an alloy. The hand method of feeding the tool in cutting alloys will always produce an ununiform product. Amal- gams made from such alloys will always show variable results in the mouth. The annealing process is the means employed by various manufacturers for artificially aging their alloys. I)r. Black advanced the idea of heating fresh cut alloys for several days at a temperature of 120° F. Other investigators have since shortened the length of time required for artificially aging by using boiling water. The various makers of quick- setting alloys claim that their products will not change from further aging. These claims are distinctly false and mis- leading. All quick-setting alloys will set slower after they have stood in your office for one year. These alloys are only partly annealed and very slightly so at that. Any quick- setting alloy can be annealed so as to be extremely slow- setting if subjected to the boiling water process for a con- siderable length of time. Fresh quick-setting alloys when properly cut possess several points of expansion. The annealing process will remove this expansion; hence they are treated until they only show from \ to 1 point of expan- sion. So you will note that quick-setting alloys are only partly annealed, and they will change when left in your office for any length of time. The manufacturer is in a better position to judge of the merits of alloys than the average dentist. He has the entire clinical experience of his trade to rely upon and he gains much valuable information from his competitor’s trade as well. The old saying that “two heads are better than one” aptly applies to this case. The question of testing alloys is one which has concerned the dental profession ever since amalgams first came into practical use. The results that I have obtained from N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 77 using the micrometer have led me to believe that it is the only reliable and accurate means for determining the pre- serving properties of amalgam fillings. I do not wish to ignore the “test of time,” nor do I care to ignore the great number of cases of faulty manipulation upon which a great number of these tests have been unconsciously based. As far as the accuracy of the micrometer is concerned, it has proven conclusively that alloys which show the best results on this instrument always give the best results in the mouth. It records every particle of shrinkage and expansion with great delicacy and accuracy. Fillings made from slightly expanding quick-setting alloys will not fail in the mouth. Should a failure happen you can safely attribute the cause to faulty manipulation, or preparation of the cavity, or else to a condition of the tooth structure, which must be of such a degenerate character that it could not be saved by any artificial means. According to my estimation the glass tube test is a very unreliable and inaccurate method for ascertaining the tooth- preserving qualities of amalgam. The walls of any artificial matrix should compare favorably with those of the dentine. The walls of the tooth are left rough by the action of the bur, and thus afford an ideal surface for an amalgam or a crystalline compound to adhere. Amalgams are nothing more than metal cements, of which the copper and the silver are the hardening agents. Take any cement which does not leave a polished surface and it will not adhere to a polished surface like that of glass. Portland and lime cements will not adhere to glass, but when applied to any roughened material like brick the adhesion is complete. The greatest obstacle in the way of properly filling a glass tube with amalgam is the removal of excess mercury. There is no mechanical method for securing the tube so that the proper pressure can be applied to condense the filling in place. Only a downward pressure can be exerted which forces the mercury to the inner walls of the tube. This surplus mercury is reabsorbed again after your work has been completed, N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 78 DENTAL FORMULARY thereby, producing shrinkage, especially at the periphery of the filling. Lateral pressure is necessary to force the dry amalgam to the periphery of the filling. The existence of these grave faults in using this test no operator can deny. I consider any test unreliable that cannot be duplicated with some degree of accuracy. It is impossible to fill six tubes with the same make of alloy and obtain the same results in all cases. I firmly believe in the microscope for examining margins. The best plan is to photograph your work from month to month. These photographs are your records of any changes that might have occurred. The flow and the crushing tests of alloys are of no practical importance, inasmuch as these factors are amply great enough in all alloys. It is an easy matter to make a poor alloy with a good edge strength. Spheroiding or changing of form is nothing more than excessive shrinkage. This condition of affairs can be directly attributed to faulty manipulation of the alloy. Dr. Black could have given some valuable information on this subject had he submitted some spheroidal fillings to a chemical analysis. Had the quantity of mercury been estimated, he could have proven the presence of surplus mercury. An alloy containing as low as 45 per cent silver when properly manipulated and inserted in the cavity will not flow to an appreciable degree. Nearly every high grade alloy will stand any strain that masticating stress can impose upon it. Dr. Black deserves great credit for presenting the practical utility of the micrometer to us. It certainly fills a long-felt want, and affords a scientific means for standardizing our products without relying upon the conflicting data that we are in the habit of receiving from our trade. I have com- piled some important tests which will throw some light upon the subject of alloys. Before presenting these tests to you I desire to call your attention to some conclusions of Dr. Black’s work. He stated that it was impossible for the manufacturer to produce an alloy which would give uniform N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 79 DENTAL FORMULARY results from any set formula. At the time that he made these statements there was a great deal of truth in his remarks, and it was that which led me to take up this work of investigation. It occurred to me that we should look for some fault in our smelting, annealing or cutting processes as being the probable cause of variation in our finished product. My theory has been, if like conditions prevailed throughout the entire process of making alloys that like results would always be obtained. I will afterwards prove that this fault was mainly due to a variation in the thickness of cut, as a result of using the hand process of cutting our alloys. This variation in the thickness of cut produced a like variation in the shrinking and expanding factors of the resulting amalgam. It was for this reason alone that I adopted the use of a special automatic machine for cutting my alloys. There is one more thing that Dr. Black stated which did not seem practical to me. He claimed that filed alloys gave better results than the shaved variety. He never presented a scientific explanation of this assertion. Had he carried his investigations further he would have found that filed alloys are coarse cut products, while the shaved alloys were invariably cut very thin at the time that he made his experiments. When he was carrying on these experiments, the various makers of alloys were in the habit of cutting their alloys in extremely thin shavings, which were very popular with their trade. Had alloys been cut in much thicker shavings there would have been no difference in his results. Having called your attention to these important facts we will carefully compare the results of my tests of various formulas with them. Each formula was annealed for fifteen minutes in boiling water, and they were cut in four different thicknesses of shavings. No. 1 cut is the thinnest. The others are progressively 25 per cent thicker. The test plugs of amalgam measured f inch in diameter and \ inch in depth. They weighed 2.3 grammes, or about 35.5 grains. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 80 DENTAL FORMULARY The fillings were inserted in a hardened steel matrix or tube. The alloy was carefully weighed and mixed with an exact quantity of mercury sufficient to produce a stiff plastic mass. The usual precautions were taken in regard to watering the amalgam, and these tests were made under the same conditions, so far as it was within my power to accomplish it. Each sample was subjected to a twenty-four- hour test, and usually after the sixth hour no further move- ment could be detected. FORMULA NO. 1. Silver 45, copper 10, tin 45 per cent. Shrinkage, cut 1—9.5 2— 3— 4— 4.5 points No. 1 required equal parts of mercury and alloy; No. 2, 1.4 parts mercury to 1.5 parts alloy; No. 3, 1.3 parts mer- cury to 1.5 parts alloy; No. 4, 1.2 parts of mercury to 1.5 parts of alloy. Silver 50, tin 45, copper 5 per cent. Shrinkage, cut 1—14.5 2— 3— 4— 6.0 points FORMULA NO. 2. Proportions of mercury and alloy required were the same as in formula No. 1. FORMULA NO. 3. Silver 55, tin 40, copper 5 per cent. Shrinkage, cut 1—11.5 2— 3— 7.0 4— 5.0 Proportions of mercury and alloy same as in No. 1 formula. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 81 FORMULA NO. 4. Silver 60, tin 38, copper 1, zinc 1 per cent. Shrinkage, cut 1—8.5 2— 3— 4— Proportions of mercury and alloy used same as in No. 1 formula. FORMULA NO. 5. Silver 68, tin 32 per cent Shrinkage, cut 1—12.0 2— 3— 8.0 4— 4.5 Portions of alloy and mercury used were 5 of alloy and 6 of mercury for 1 and 2, equal parts for 3 and 4. FORMULA NO. 6. Silver, 68, tin 28, copper 2.5, zinc 1.5 per cent. Shrinkage, cut 1—-3.5 2—2.0 Expansion 3— .5 4—1.5 Points Proportions of mercury, 7 of mercury and 5 of alloy for 1 and 2; 6 of mercury and 5 of alloy for 3 and 4. FORMULA NO. 7. Silver 60, tin 35, copper 5 per cent. Only No. 4 cut measured. Shrinkage 3.5 points. Mer- cury 1.2 to 1.5 of alloy. We will see what these tests prove in regard to formulas. Your attention is called to the various cuts of No. 1 formula. Carefully compare these shrinking factors with those of Nos, N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 82 DENTAL FORMULARY 2, 3 and 5. You will note that the shrinking factors are much less in No. 1 formula than in Nos. 2, 3 and 5. The silver factor of Nos. 2, 3 and 5 formulas is much higher than that of No. 1, and yet the former alloys show a greater percentage of shrinkage. The shrinkage factors are greater with one exception, and that is the No. 4 cut of No. 5 formula. If silver is the expanding element, and tin the contracting element, then formulas 2, 3 and 5 should show the best results. Your attention is next called to the percentage of copper in Nos. 2 and 3 formulas. It will be seen that it is just 50 per cent less than the amount contained in No. 1 formula. It is quite evident that copper overcomes shrinkage to a wonderful degree. While silver possesses this property, it may be regarded that the combination of the two metals are the elements of an alloy. Let us compare the shrinking factor of No. 4 cut of formula No. 1 with that of No. 4 cut of formula No. 7. The results show us that there is one point in favor of No. 7. The percentage of copper is 50 per cent less in No. 7 than in No. 1. The silver required to overcome this reduction is three times that of the copper, or just 15 per cent. These results prove to us that the expanding influence of the copper is much greater than that of the silver. Your attention is called to No. 5 formula. Please note the very high percentage of silver that it con- tains. This formula contains no copper in its composition. It carries just 23 per cent more silver than No. 1 formula. A careful comparison of the shrinking factors of the No. 5 formula with that of No. 1, and including the shrinking and expanding factors of formula No. 6, will prove conclusively that simple tin and silver combinations are the worst for- mulas that any manufacturer can use. We will now com- pare the shrinkage factor of No. 4 cut of formula No. 7 with that of No. 4 cut of formula No. 4. It will be seen that the results are slightly more favorable for the No. 4 formula than for the No. 7. You will particularly note that No. 4 formula only contains 1 per cent each of copper and zinc, while No. 7 formula contains fully 5 per cent copper. Sum- ming up these results we are led to believe that a four-metal N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 83 formula is the best that any manufacturer can adopt for his alloy. By using such a formula the percentage of copper can be greatly reduced simply by the addition of a small percentage of zinc. The four-metal formula eliminates the factor of rapid discoloration of the amalgam, since only a small percentage of copper is required when zinc is employed. So it will be seen that the manufacturer is confined to the use of these four metals for the formulas of his medium- priced alloys, since the extremely high price of gold and platinum metals precludes their use entirely. These tests prove that the quick-setting formula is the best tooth preserver. You will recognize No. 6 formula to be Dr. Black’s, which is used by all makers of quick- setting alloys. Owing to its very quick-setting features this amalgam has never been very popular. In a great many instances have fillings failed that w~ere made from quick-setting alloys. The lack of edge-strength and crum- bling nature of these fillings proved conclusively that they had failed due to premature setting or crystallization of the amalgam. Many operators are in the habit of working the soft amalgam in the palm of the hand to prevent it from setting. In many cases they carry this operation too far, and the result is a filling which soon crumbles to pieces. As a matter of precaution, where large fillings are to be inserted it is the best policy to make two mixes when using quick-setting alloys. All medium and slow-setting alloys produce slightly shrinking amalgams. The very best medium-setting alloys average from 8 to 16 points shrinkage. My experiments have aided me in producing a medium setting, 60 per cent silver alloy, having from 2 to 3 points of shrinkage. By carefully annealing my 68 per cent silver formula I have produced a medium-setting alloy that will show neutral results on the micrometer. I have yet to find other medium- setting alloys that will show such efficient results. Again referring to my tests, you will note that for each increase in the thickness of shaving there is a corresponding decrease in the shrinkage factor of the amalgam. You N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 84 DENTAL FORMULARY must bear in mind that there is a limit to the cutting process and that No. 4 cut is entirely too coarse for quick-setting alloys. Less mercury is required to make a perfect mix of the No. 4 cut than for the No. 1. When wafering the amalgam, more mercury can be expressed from cut No. 4 than from cut No. 1. These facts account for the greater amount of shrinkage in the thinner shaved alloys. It all depends upon the nature of the formulas as to how thick the shavings should be cut. In conclusion, I will state that it is impossible for any manufacturer to better his product without the use of the micrometer. This delicate instrument is just as necessary to the alloy maker as the analytical balance is to the chemist. Every batch of alloy should be standardized, and the mi- crometer is the only practical instrument for this purpose. They are regarded as an expensive luxury by most manu- facturers, therefore they have not come into general use. COMPENSATION AMALGAM ALLOY. Fenchel. 1. Silver 55 parts Tin 45 “ Copper 3 “ Cut into fine filings. 2. Silver 40 parts Tin 55 “ Copper 3 “ Cut into fine filings. 3. Silver 50 parts Tin 45 “ Platinum 2 “ Gold 3 “ Zinc 3 “ Copper 3 “ Cut into coarse filings. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 85 Mix the above cut alloys without further melting according to the following formula: No. 1 3 parts No. 2 3 “ No. 3 1 part REFINING OF MERCURY. 1. Two pounds of mercury are placed in a strong bottle with 4 ounces of water and 1 ounce of ferric chloride solution and mixed by agitation until the mixture becomes a grayish magma. Let stand in a cool place for two to three days, remove the watery portion, wash the mercury with diluted hydrochloric acid and hot water until it assumes a bright color. Dry the mercury by placing a few thicknesses of filter paper in a large porcelain dish, pouring the mercury over it and repeating the operation two or three times. Finally run the mercury through a cone of filter paper with a pinhole at its apex. 2. Place the mercury with finely powdered loaf sugar and water in a strong bottle, cork, and shake vigorously. Then by means of a bellows blow air into the bottle, again corking and shaking the bottle, repeating this process several times. Finally run the mercury into a cone of stiff paper with a pinhole at the apex. The mercury filters clear from the metallic oxides produced by the action of air and sugar upon the debasing metals in the impure mercury. 3. The distillation of commercial mercury from an ordinary glass retort provided with a Liebig condenser produces chemically pure mercury. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 86 DENTAL FORMULARY TO IMPROVE THE AMALGAMATION OF DENTAL ALLOY. Mix the alloy and mercury by shaking in a thick-walled test-tube and pass once or twice through the flame before kneading in the mortar. MODERN AMALGAM ALLOYS. Silver, Tin, Copper, Zinc, Gold, Platinum, per cent. per cent. per cent. per cent. per cent. per cent. Acme .... 65.00 29.00. 5.00 l 00 Ash & Son’s . 66.54 27.16 5.02 0 90 Black’s 68.50 25.50 1 00 5.00 Davis’ 42.41 51.42 3.21 3.20 Eureka 55.00 40.00 3.00 2 00 Fellowship 67.45 26.80 5.73 0 55 Fidelity . 67.76 26.30 4.71 1 23 Flagg’s contour . 64.00 32.00 4.00 Flagg’s submarine 60.00 35.00 5.00 Fletcher’s 40.00 56.00 4.00 Gibraltar . 68.50 25.50 5.00 1 00 Globe .... 44.89 51.90 0 50 2.71 Hedstrom’s . 66.00 27.00 5.00 2 00 Herbst’s . 53.85 38.46 7.69 Hodgen’s . 53.00 42.30 4.70 Justi’s Superior . 35.20 69.10 3.50 1 80 0.32 0.8 Lawrence’s 44.06 50.43 5.51 Lorenz’s . 49.79 48.87 0.70 0.37 Micrometric . 67.14 26.64 4.31 1 91 Odontographic . 66.87 26.48 6.21 trace 0.28 Rego .... 66.54 28.14 4.21 1 06 Sauer’s 41.67 50.00 8.33 Skogsborg’s . 56.00 40.00 4.00 Standard . 53.55 35.03 2.76 8.82 Sterion 61.89 31.85 4.16 2 10 True Dentalloy . 65.91 27.13 5.21 1 52 Twentieth century 67.03 27.13 4.87 1 10 Welch’s . . . 46.00 51.90 1.70 0.40 Witzel’s . 53.00 40.00 5.00 2.00 Zsigmondy’s . 50.00 33.33 16.67 N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 87 TO PREVENT AMALGAMATION OF GOLD IN THE MOUTH. Coat the gold with a quick-drying mastic—or sandarac varnish prior to placing the amalgam filling. REFINING OF PRECIOUS METALS. The refining of precious metals requires an intimate chemical knowledge and an extended experience with the various methods involved. To refine small quantities of gold, silver or platinum is not a profitable process for the busy dentist. It is far more economical to collect the precious metal scraps, filings, etc., until $100 worth are accumulated. They may then be melted and sent to a United States sub-treasury, which in due time will remit a check representing the actual value of the material, or the gold may be sold to a reliable refiner. The refining of gold in the dental laboratory may be successfully carried out by a number of methods, of which the following are especially adapted to the needs of the prac- titioner. The dry method, the quartation method, and the wet method are available for this purpose. The Dry Method. 1. Remove particles of plaster, wood, base metals, plati- num pins, etc., from the scraps. 2. Pass a magnet through the scraps to remove iron particles. 3. Wash the gold scraps in boiling water and dry them upon filter paper. 4. Place the scraps in a crucible lined with borax, and cover with a mixture of 3 parts of borax and 1 part of salt- peter. Heat and keep in a molten state for half an hour, adding small amounts of sal ammoniac from time to time. Stir thoroughly with a compressed carbon rod (electric light carbon) and pour into a suitable ingot mould. If the gold is still too brittle when passed through the rolling mill, certain base metals have not been fully removed. The gold is again N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 88 DENTAL FORMULARY melted and small quantities of mercuric chloride (corrosive sublimate) are added. Extreme care should be exercised not to inhale the very poisonous fumes of the sublimate. The dry method of refining gold produces good results if the gold scraps are fairly uniform in character; platinum and iridium remain unchanged in the gold, while all the base metals are removed as oxides or chlorides. A few Dixon black lead crucibles, a small Fletcher injector furnace, and a hood to carry off the fumes, constitutes the simple outfit. Very small quantities of gold scraps may be fairly well refined by employing the above process upon a piece of charcoal, using a good compound blow-pipe for melting the gold. It consists in melting the gold scraps with about three times their weight of pure silver; the alloy is poured into a bar ingot mould and the cast ingot is rolled out into thin rib- bons. These ribbons are then coiled in a spiral and placed into hot commercial sulphuric acid. The silver and base metals are dissolved and the gold remains in a porous mass which, after washing in water, may be melted and poured into moulds. Platinum and iridium are not removed by the quartation method. The gold produced in this way is about 995 per cent pure. The Quartation Method. The Wet Method. Not less than 1 ounce of gold scraps or precipitated waste gold should be used in refining by the wet method. To prepare waste gold for refining, precipitate the waste gold solution with iron sulphate, dissolved in water. Eight parts of the washed and dried sediments are mixed with Potassium carbonate 4 parts Sodium chlorate 2 “ Powdered common bottle glass ... 2 “ Place in a crucible and melt. Stir with a compressed carbon rod and pour into a mould. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 89 Gold scraps for refining by this method are prepared as outlined under: The dry method. Place an ounce of prepared gold in a porcelain dish and cover it with aqua regia; 4 ounces of the acid are required for each ounce of gold. Aqua regia for such purposes should be freshly prepared by mixing 1 ounce of nitric acid with 3 ounces of hydrochloric acid; only C. P. acids are to be used. Place the dish in a sand-bath and apply heat until the gold is dissolved. Care should be taken to allow the poisonous fumes to be carried off, as they are dangerous to the health of the operator and especially destructive to metal instruments, etc. Decant the clear solution from the sediment, evaporate it to a syrupy consistency, and care- fully add, with constant stirring, about \ ounce of hydro- chloric acid. Again heat until the acid is removed. Dilute the solution with | gallon of distilled water, heat for an hour, and set aside for twenty-four hours to allow the freshly formed silver chloride to settle. Filter through paper into a large glass bottle and wash the remaining silver chloride three or four times with hot distilled water, running the washings into the original filtrate. Add to the contents of the bottle 1| ounces of ammonium chloride, shake well until dissolved, and set aside for twenty-four hours. Any plati- num present is precipitated as platinic sal ammoniac. The liquid is now filtered through a wet paper filter and the remaining platinic sal ammoniac is washed with a pint of boiling distilled water to which 2 drachms of sal ammoniac have been added. The whole precipitate is now poured into the filter and the liquid is drained off. To precipitate the gold from the solution, oxalic acid, sulphurous acid, ferrous sulphate, and other chemicals are used. Iron sulphate is well suited for working with small quantities. For every ounce of the original gold, 4 ounces of ferrous sulphate are required. The iron sulphate is dissolved in 1 pint of distilled water and filtered into the gold solution; the gold will be precipitated in the form of a brown powder. About 20 drops of hydrochloric acid are added, N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 90 DENTAL FORMULARY the bottle is vigorously agitated and set aside for twenty-four hours to allow complete precipitation. The gold magma is now filtered through paper and repeatedly washed with hot distilled water. After the filter containing the gold has become perfectly dry, it is placed in a crucible, covered with a mixture of 2 parts of borax and 1 part of saltpeter, and heated until the gold becomes fluid, and it is then poured into a suitable ingot mould which has been previously slightly oiled and heated. To recover the silver, place the dry filter containing the silver chloride in a crucible and cover with a mixture of 6 parts sodium carbonate and 1 part powdered charcoal; heat until the silver becomes fluid, and then pour into a suitable ingot mould which has been previously slightly oiled and heated. After melting, the silver will be found in the bottom of the crucible. Platinum is recovered from the platinic sal ammoniac by burning the dried filter in a porcelain capsule. The capsule is subjected to a slow continuous red heat until all ammonium chloride is driven off. The platinum will remain in the form of a grayish-black mass, known as platinum sponge. The platinum sponge is now melted on a piece of soft char- coal with the oxy-hydrogen blow-pipe into a button of pure platinum. THE WORKING OF STEEL. Dr. C. C. Allen. The giving of a certain desired degree of hardness to a piece of steel has come generally to be called tempering, but, scientifically speaking, the tempering of a piece of steel does not refer to any particular degree of hardness it may have at any particular time, but refers to the percentage of carbon contained therein. Thus two specimens of steel, each containing a different percentage of carbon, might both be brought by proper manipulation to an equal hard- ness ; but the term “ temper ” is so universally used in referring to the process of obtaining some desired degree of hardness N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 91 that it lias come to be correct. The ordinary method of tempering steel is to heat the articles to be tempered to a bright red heat, but not above the point of recoalescence, and plunge into water, oil, mercury, or some tempering solution, thereby depriving the heated metal of its heat more or less suddenly; and the quicker the heat is extracted from the metal, the harder it will be. After this is done, most articles are found to be harder than is desired and too brittle to be useful, but a part of the hardness is removed from the steel by resorting to the process known as drawing the temper. This is accomplished by reheating to a less degree and quenching when the color of the piece indicates to the experienced eye that the desired degree of hardness has been reached. These colors run from almost a dead white to what is generally known as a steel blue—thus a range of degrees of hardness from the natural annealed condition of the metal to the utmost hardness which it is capable of receiving. A list of the colors as generally given is as follows: Pale yellow, straw-yellow, brownish-yellow, purplish-brown, purple, light blue, dark blue, blackish-blue. Temperatures range from 430° to 600° Fahrenheit. Where great accuracy in temper is desired for a number of articles, such as burs, excavators, etc., they are heated in large quantities, and great precaution is taken to heat only to such a degree as will give the best temper for the purpose. No two lots of steel are exactly alike in the percentage of carbon contained, and therefore it may be determined beforehand what particular degree of heat is best suited to the material to be worked. The hardening of steel articles is always accompanied by a certain amount of change of form, and this change of form, while slight and of no moment in such cases as burs and excavators, is very serious in many other articles. Various schemes are employed to obviate this working in delicate pieces of work. Thus sheets of metal are liable to curl up to such a degree as to be useless, and are sometimes hardened between plates of N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 92 DENTAL FORMULARY cold steel, which keeps them straight. Many articles are straightened with wooden mallets after having been har- dened—this is the case with such things as small files, ribbon saws, etc.; but an article once tempered does not admit of much further manipulation. Again, many articles are ground into shape after having been hardened. This is always the case when hard steel bearings are made for fine machinery. The art of tempering is one which requires much experience in order to obtain the best results, but it is an interesting thing and everyone should know something about it. In addition to tempering tool steel or steels which contain a sufficient amount of carbon to make it practicable to harden them in the usual way, we have a method known as case- hardening. Case-hardening may be employed in low-grade steels or in wrought iron or cast iron, and frequently is so treated where it is practicable to have the surface only of an article hardened. The process consists in converting the surface of the metal into steel, which surface is, of course, hardened as other steel is. The layer of steel thus produced is usually very thin. This may be accomplished in a number of ways. One way which is used a great deal is the heating together of yellow prussiate of potash and some substance which contains a great deal of carbon, such as leather shavings. This combined with the articles to be hardened, is heated in a closed vessel to a red heat and held at this heat for some length of time, when the articles are taken out and plunged into cold water. If this process is properly carried out the metal will be found to have a surface too hard to be filed. Another and a cleaner way, and one better adapted to our wants, is to heat the article or articles to be case-hardened with cyanide of potassium in an iron vessel to a good bright red, then remove the articles with pliers and, wdiile still red hot, plunge them into water. The result noted before will be obtained. In each case a part of the carbon of the mixture combines with the iron to make steel. Potassium cyanide melts and will bear a red heat without N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 93 change; but it should always be borne in mind that this is a very dangerous poison. In working steel and fashioning it into its desired form it is nearly always desirable that it shall be soft, and many times it is also desirable that the finished article should be soft. The process of softening steel or any other metal is called annealing. To anneal steel it is necessary to bring it to a red heat and then cool it very slowly—the opposite, in fact, to the process of hardening. Large articles of steel may be fairly well softened by heating as mentioned and allowing to cool in the atmosphere; they should, however, be buried in some material which retards the radiation of heat. One of the best ways is to pack in sawdust; lime is sometimes used, also powdered charcoal. Small articles, such as broaches, needles, etc., to be annealed, must be protected from the atmosphere after heating, or they will be found to be brittle. This is because the atmosphere itself robs them of their heat so quickly that they are hardened. The slow cooling of articles to be annealed is supposed to be necessary to give the molecules time for rearrangement. But, unfortunately for this theory, there are metals which are best annealed by sudden cooling. Steel, besides being rendered softer by annealing, is made more malleable and ductile. One great change in it is its loss of tensile strength. A piece of steel which is properly tempered and will bear a strain of 225,000 pounds per square inch is not safe under a greater strain than 85,000 pounds if it is well annealed. A familiarity with steel and iron is well worth the while of any dentist. TEMPERING STEEL. Steel of a grade suitable for tools, hardened by heating to a hardening heat and cooled in cold water, and then re- heated to about 425° F., is of just about the right hardness for engraving tools, small lathe tools, etc. Reheated to 500° F., it is suitable for taps, dies, drills, etc.; 550° F. makes it just about right for cold-chisels, saws, etc.; 575° F. leaves but N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 94 DENTAL FORMULARY little hardness in the steel, but enough to make it suitable for springs. At about 650° F. the effect of hardening is all gone and the steel has become soft again. In practice the temperature is determined by the change in color of a polished surface of the steel; at 425° F. it is a very pale yellow, and as the temperature is increased it becomes straw color, chocolate, tinged with crimson, light purple, dark purple, and finally blue. Dental cavity-forming tools should be quite hard at the cutting surfaces and approaching a spring temper just beyond. All tools used in the root canals should be very little harder than a spring temper— just sufficiently hard to cut soft bone, yet not at all brittle. Color Scale of Temperature in Tempering of Steel. 430°—450° F. pale straw = enamel chisels. 470° F. full yellow = excavators. 490° F. brown = pluggers; scissors. 510° F. brown with purple = saws; axes. 530° F. purple = knives. 550° F. light blue = watch springs. 560° F. full blue = augers. 600° F. dark blue = hand saws. Color Scale of Temperature. This table is the result of an effort to interpret in terms of thermometer readings, the common expressions used in describing temperatures. It is obvious that the values are only approximations. Color. Temperature deg. F. Incipient red heat 900-1000 Dark red heat 1200-1400 Bright red heat . 1500-1700 Yellowish red heat . 1900-2100 Incipient white heat 2300-2500 White heat 2000-2800 N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 95 ROUGH METHOD OF ESTIMATING HIGH TEMPERATURES. Temperature deg. F. Zinc melts at . 800 Slight glow in dark at 975 Dark red heat at 1280 Cherry-red heat at 1650 Bright cherry-red heat at 1800 Silver melts at 1900 Gold melts at 2012 Orange heat at 2100 Copper melts at 2190 White heat at 2350 Steel melts at 2465 Dazzling white heat at 2750 Wrought iron melts at 2900 Platinum melts at 3240 TEMPERATURE PRODUCED BY VARIOUS FLAMES, The highest temperatures afforded by flames are, according to Fery, as follows: Temperature deg. F. Bunsen burner, with sufficient access of air 3400 Bunsen burner, with insufficient access of air 3105 Acetylene flame 4645 Denayrouz’s burner (alcohol and air) . . 3383 Denayrouz’s burner (alcohol and petroleum ether, equal parts) 3700 Alcohol flame 3100 Hydrogen flame in open air 3450 Oxyhydrogen mixture 4390 Oxygen and illuminating gas-blast flame . 4000 Electric arc (estimated) 6800 Temperature of the sun (estimated) . . 14,075 N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 96 DENTAL FORMULARY HEAT CONDUCTING POWER OF METALS. Silver .... 100 Tin .... 14 Copper ... 74 Bismuth ... 12 Gold .... 53 Iron .... 12 Zinc .... 36 Lead .... 9 Brass .... 24 Platinum ... 8 Cast iron 0.125 per cent Copper 0.193 “ Brass 0.210 Lead 0.319 “ Tin 0.278 CONTRACTION OF CASTINGS IN COOLING. TO TEST NEW CRUCIBLES. Heat to redness and put a cold iron rod into crucibles, touching the bottom. Cracks will expand and may easily be seen. Cover the bottom of a box, made of sheet iron, with powdered animal charcoal to the thickness of about one- sixteenth of an inch. Animal charcoal is readily prepared by burning pieces of leather in a covered iron box. Place on the charcoal a layer of instruments, cover with char- coal, and repeat this process until the box is filled. Heat the box to a dark cherry-red and keep at this temperature for an hour; remove from the fire and at once drop the contents of the box into cold water. Dry the instruments, immerse in coal oil, and place on an iron plate. Heat the plate until the oil starts to burn, remove from the flame, and allow to cool. The instruments will be found to be of a perfectly even temper. TO TEMPER BROACHES, BURS, ETC. 1. Tartaric acid 1 part Cod-liver oil 5 parts TEMPERING FLUIDS FOR STEEL. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 97 2. Tartaric acid 47 parts Rosin 41 “ Mutton tallow 78 “ Charcoal . 63 “ Potassium ferrocyanide 39 “ Ammonium carbonate 31 “ Cod-liver oil 234 “ 3. Potassium ferrocyanide 150 parts Burgundy pitch 250 “ Beeswax 250 “ Mutton tallow 1000 “ 4. Sodium chloride 25 parts Zinc sulphate 1 part Ammonium chloride “ Borax \ “ Potassium nitrate § “ Water 250 parts 1. Hydrochloric acid, concentrated ... 5 parts Ammonium chloride 10 “ Sodium chloride 50 “ Glycerin 800 “ Water 1000 “ TEMPERING OF COPPER 2. Copper may be rendered hard enough for a cutting edge by treatment with potassium ferrocyanide. The copper is melted in a graphite crucible and about 2 per cent of the potassium salt is then added. After standing until the moisture has been driven off, the powder is stirred into the N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 98 DENTAL FORMULARY melt, which is allowed to stand a few minutes and again stirred. In five or ten minutes it is ready for pouring. The color of the copper is not affected by the flux. The reason for the change is supposed to be the introduction of iron and possible carbon. TO APPROXIMATELY DETERMINE THE CHARACTER OF A METAL PLATE. If a drop of concentrated nitric acid is placed upon a metal surface which has been freshly scratched, the resulting color helps to approximately guess the nature of the metal. Pure silver turns gray; brass, light olive-green; German silver, grayish-green; nickel, black. Gold above 18-carat will not show any discoloration; 16-carat gold shows a brownish hue, which deepens with the reduction of the carat. UNITED STATES MINT TESTS FOR GOLD AND SILVER. The following is a test for determining whether a coin is good or bad. Use the liquids as near to the edge of the suspected coin as possible, as that is the part worn. A drop of the respective liquid will have no effect on a genuine coin, while it can be plainly seen on the counterfeit. Coins should be scraped slightly before using. Test for Gold. Strong nitric acid 39 parts Hydrochloric acid 1 part Water 20 parts Test for Silver. Nitrate of silver 24 parts Nitric acid 30 “ Water 580 “ The above tests should be taken in conjunction with diameter, thickness and weight. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 99 THE TOUCHSTONE AND ITS USE. Dr. Henry H. Boom. A method for quickly ascertaining the degree of purity of both silver and gold was so necessary to artificers that at as early a date as 450 b.c. we find the people of Lydia, in Asia Minor, employing the Lydian stone, or touchstone, for this purpose. THE STONE. The stone used by the Lydian goldsmiths was, probably, a hard bituminous quartz, although in more recent times black basalt, jasper, slate, and even black marble have been used. At the present time, jewelers and metal workers use a stone of black basalt, similar in composition to the basaltic columns forming the celebrated Giant’s Causeway, in County Antrim, Ireland. The modern touchstone must be densely black in color and of a quadrangular prismatic shape, measuring 1 inch in thickness and from 2 to 3 inches in length. It should show an entire absence of color, for any lighten- ing of its dense black surface would interfere with a correct appreciation of the color left by metal that has been rubbed upon it. It must not be too hard, or in its use it will acquire too high a luster. It must not be so soft as to be grooved or furrowed by use; nor should it be of such composition as to be affected by the nitric acid with which the streak of metal left upon its surface is to be treated. THE TOUCH NEEDLES. These are needles like masses of pure and of alloyed silver or gold, the exact composition of which is known. The silver needles are prepared from pure silver, alloyed with pure copper in varying proportions. The first mass of silver selected is that which we would now call chemically pure. Of such metal the manufacturer weighs out 1 mark, N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 100 DENTAL FORMULARY or 8 ounces, and, fusing the mass under borax, flows the metal into moulds that give to the finished needle a size of yj inch in breadth, inch in thickness, and 1| inches in length. This needle is stamped I to indicate its degree of absolute purity. The second needle of the series is then made by weighing exactly 15 half ounces of pure silver and | ounce of pure copper, and this mixture, wrapped in paper, is intro- duced into a clean new crucible already heated and containing melted borax. The contents of this crucible, maintained at a temperature sufficiently high to melt the metal, are stirred vigorously with a wooden stick that has been charred at the end; the metal alloy is then poured into a mould, and, when cold, is weighed with care; when, should it be found to be less in weight than a mark, or 16 half ounces, it will have lost, through vaporization, so much of its silver as to unfit it for use in making the touch needles. When a perfect alloy is obtained it is remelted under borax, at a much lower temperature than was required in its making, and is moulded in the appropriate needle shapes. These finished needles are stamped 2. The remaining six needles—in increasing proportions of copper—are made in this same careful manner. GOLD-TOUCH NEEDLES. The needles are made of the same breadth and thickness as the silver needles, but, to lessen the expense, they generally are made but \ or \ inch in length, and these, called points, are soldered to copper bars of corresponding sec- tional area. A number of series of gold-touch needles, or points, are used; thus, gold alloyed solely with silver forms a series known as the “white alloy” series; another series of gold points, called “red gold” points, are composed solely of gold and copper. The most careful gold-touch needles for the dentist’s employment are alloys of gold, silver and N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 101 copper, called the “ mixed alloy.” The touch needles of mixed alloy are made from gold debased with varying proportions of silver and half as much copper. In making the alloys for the needles the manufacturers must employ the greatest care, that there may be no loss of metal (gold and silver) through volatilization or oxidation (copper). When the alloy is obtained it must not vary in weight from the sum of the weights of its constituent metals. For convenience in their use the touch needles are usually strung upon rings. THE USE OF THE TOUCHSTONE. Each metal, when pure, has a specific color. Alloying a metal changes its color. Metals are so opaque that their colors are only determined with accuracy when a thin film of the metal is spread upon a densely black surface. In using the touchstone the operator first cleans a portion of its surface, using for this purpose fine coal dust, tripoli or putty powder. He then rubs the gold (of unknown fineness) upon the stone, stroking the stone several times with the gold. The metal streak of gold left upon the stone should be TV inch in width and at least \ inch in length. Then, selecting a touch needle that appears to be of about the same fineness (color) as the specimen he is testing, he makes a metal streak with the touch needle upon the stone, close to the first streak, and then wets each streak with water and compares their colors when moistened. Should the colors of the two metal streaks fail to correspond, he tries with another touch needle, of lower or greater fineness, to match the color given to the surface of the stone by the metal of unknown composition. In all this examining of color he must not forget to moisten the metal streaks. When the operator, employing a needle, secures a metal streak on the stone that corresponds to the streak given by the metal tested, he then wets each streak N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 102 DENTAL FORMULARY with nitric acid, and the acid, dissolving from the streaks the silver and copper used to debase the gold, causes the latter to present in the streak a broken or interrupted line, indicating by the loss of continuity the relative amount of debasing metal alloying the specimen of gold. By this method of testing it is possible for the dentist to ascertain, like the jeweler, the carat or fineness of gold, in a very few minutes, and so be able to select the solder or plate best suited for each piece of repair work he may undertake. TO RESTORE TARNISHED GOLD PLATES TO THEIR ORIGINAL COLOR. Iron oxide, red (Crocus martis) ... 3 parts Calcined borax 2 “ Ammonium chloride 1 “ Powder and mix slowly with water to form a paste. Paint over the plate, heat on a copper pan until no hissing sound is heard, place aside to cool, and boil in diluted hydro- chloric acid and dry in sawdust. POLISHING POWDERS Chalk 10 parts White bole 4 “ Magnesium carbonate 1 part Iron oxide 1 “ For Brass. Chalk 54 parts Magnesium carbonate 5 “ Alumina 14 “ Silica 8 “ Iron oxide 5 “ For Gold or Silver. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 103 GOLD POLISHING FLUID. Chlorinated lime 1 part Sodium bicarbonate 20 parts Sodium chloride 1 part Water, enough to make a paste. Apply with a soft brush, and, when dry, polish. SILVER POLISHING FLUID. Sodium hyposulphite 16 parts Ammonium chloride 8 “ Ammonia water 4 “ Potassium cyanide 4 “ Water 120 “ CLEANING OF SILVER BY ELECTROLYSIS. A few strips of zinc are shaped so as to form a grid. The ribs of the grid are heavily coated with tin and placed on the bottom of a tin pan of convenient size. The pan is filled with 2 quarts of water, in which 1 ounce of sodium chloride and 1 ounce of sodium bicarbonate are dissolved. The tarnished silverware is placed on the grid, and imme- diately the evolution of hydrogen takes place, which will remove the tarnish in a few minutes. The silverware must be completely covered by the solution. The silver itself will not be affected by this process, only its oxides are removed. LIQUID METAL POLISHES. 1. Kieselguhr 56 parts Kerosene 30 “ Alcohol 15 “ Oil of turpentine 5 “ Ammonia water 5 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 104 DENTAL FORMULARY 2. Tripoli 10 parts Kieselguhr 10 “ Olein 15 “ Carbon tetrachloride 90 “ 3. Prepared chalk 100 parts Olein . 65 “ Ammonia water 40 “ Alcohol 50 “ Carbon tetrachloride 50 “ 4. Olein 10 parts Stearic acid 5 “ Infusorial earth 20 “ Oil of turpentine 20 “ Kerosene oil 25 “ Wood alcohol 5 “ Ammonia water 6 “ Water 6 “ 5. Putty powder C parts Kieselguhr 20 “ Bath brick 2 “ Emery 1 part Rottenstone 1| parts Mix well together and gradually add the following: Wood alcohol 30 parts Oil of turpentine 15 “ Petrolatum 80 “ Ammonia water 15 “ Oil of citronella \ part N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities hv weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 105 Note.—The difficulty experienced with most liquid metal polishes is to keep the polishing ingredients in suspension. If the vehicle is made too heavy, as with a crude ammonium oleate compound, a wide-mouthed bottle is necessary, while the problem with a thinner preparation is to prevent the kiesel- guhr from caking at the bottom of the bottle. A mixture of ordinary kerosene oil and crude oleic acid makes a good vehicle for liquid metal polish or “Putz”. One part of kerosene to 5 parts of crude oleic acid is about the right proportion to use, and to 8 parts of such a mixture there may be added 1 part of kieselguhr and 10 or 12 drops of oil of mirbane. METAL POLISH IN POWDER FORM Ferric oxide 2 parts Sodium hyposulphite 3 “ Pipeclay 10 “ Kieselguhr 28 “ 1. Pumice stone (in fine powTder) ... 20 parts Oleic acid, crude 20 “ Tallow •. 2 “ Paraffin 4 “ Melt the oleic acid, tallow, and paraffin together and gradually stir in the pumice stone, stirring continuously until cold. POLISHING PASTES. 2. Carnauba wax 100 parts Oleic acid, crude 550 “ Tripoli 350 “ Oil of mirbane 3 “ TO CLEAN NICKEL INSTRUMENTS 1. Place the instruments in a mixture of Sulphuric acid 1 part Alcohol 50 parts N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 106 DENTAL FORMULARY Let remain for ten minutes, remove, wash in hot water, and dry in sawdust. 2. Prepared chalk 2 parts Ammonia water 2 “ Alcohol 2 “ Water 4 “ Rub the instruments with a cloth saturated with the mixture, then wipe them with a dry cloth. 3. Ammonium carbonate 30 parts Water 120 “ Dissolve and add Precipitated chalk 480 parts Spread this paste over the surface of the object to be polished and rub with a soft flannel first, then with a piece of chamois skin. If the metal surface has any pits or fissures, a brush may be employed. 4. Cover the rust spots with engine oil and in a few days rub and polish with a paste made of chalk and ammonia water. If the spots are very resistant they may be treated with diluted hydrochloric acid, followed immediately by the above paste. 5. One of the best methods known for keeping bright the nickel work about the office is to wet a rag with a solution of hyposulphite of soda and wipe the article with it, drying with a soft towel and then rubbing it with a piece of chamois. TO REMOVE RUST FROM POLISHED STEEL. 1. To remove rust from polished steel, potassium cyanide is excellent. Soak, if possible, the instrument to be cleaned N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 107 in a solution of potassium cyanide in the proportion of 1 part of cyanide to 4 parts of water. Allow this to act until all loose rust is removed, and then polish with cyanide soap. The latter is made of potassium cyanide, precipitated chalk, and white castile soap. Make a saturated solution of the cyanide and add chalk sufficient to make a creamy paste. Add.the soap, cut in fine shavings, and thoroughly incorpo- rate in a mortar. When the mixture is stiff, cease to add the soap. It should be remembered that potassium cyanide is a violent poison. 2. Rusted surgical instruments, etc., are placed over night in a saturated solution of stannous chloride, which causes the spots to disappear by reduction. The articles are then rinsed in water, laid in a hot solution of soda soap, and dried. It is well to rub them with absolute alcohol and prepared chalk. Another convenient method for removing rust is to lay the instruments in kerosene. Paraffin oil is the best preservative against rust, and the most convenient way of applying it without getting an unnecessarily thick coating is as follows: One part of oil is dissolved in 200 parts of benzine, and the objects, after being thoroughly dried and warmed, are plunged into the solution. Instru- ments with joints, as scissors or needle holders, are washed in the fluid, in order to cause it to penetrate into all crevices, and the benzine is then allowed to evaporate in a dry-room. TO CLEAN ENGRAVED COPPER. Wash thoroughly with soap and water, and dry thoroughly. Then rub the surface wdth a fresh lemon cut in half, rinse with tepid water, dry, and polish with chamois leather. Powders and polishing pastes should never be used on worked copper, for the particles get lodged in the chasings and are very difficult to remove. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 108 DENTAL FORMULARY LINING OF RUBBER DENTURES WITH ALUMINUM. For the solvent use chloroform 1 part, carbon disulphide 1 part, and naphtha 1 part; for powder, the aluminum used by plumbers in bronzing metal work. Pack the case as usual, using the flask press and the wet cloth to test the pack. An excess of rubber is fatal to the best results. The flask should be made to come together under gentle pressure. The palatal surface of the denture should be made of as large pieces as possible. This gives a smooth surface and prevents penetration of the mass by the lining—an event certain to mar the appearance of the palatal surface of the denture. After packing, a swab of cotton wound on a wood toothpick is dipped into the solvent and applied to the palatal surface of the pack, and a small quantity of the powder dusted on to this moistened surface and rubbed in with the swab, again saturated with the solvent. This procedure is continued until the surface refuses to hold more. A new swab is then made and used dry, and with it dry aluminum is applied to the model. The flask is then closed and bolted, and the case vulcanized. With the vulcanization completed, the flask is allowed to become “stone cold” before opening. Without this precaution the lining would adhere in part to the model. La Salle. TO MAKE GOLD COHERE UNDER ALL CONDITIONS. Dodel. When it is advisable to repair an old gold filling without removing the gold already in position, it may be accom- plished by following the directions here outlined: (1) Apply the rubber dam. (2) Clean the tooth carefully with lukewarm water. (3) Wash it with sulphuric ether, to dissolve any fatty or oily substances. (4) Go over the’filling with alcohol. (5) Dry with warm air. (6) Take a gold cylinder and unroll it, until you have but one thickness, or take gold foil No. 4; carefully anneal this, as it readily melts. (7) With a very fine pointed plugger go over the entire surface of the gold put on, first with hand pressure, N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 109 then mallet it well. (8) After that, go over it with a convex plugger. (9) The direction of the force should be at right angles to the surface worked upon. (10) If you have fol- lowed these directions in applying two layers, you can go ahead in the usual manner and use either pellets or leaf gold. Having tested it in various positions, I find it entirely satis- factory except where the filling is subject to great stress; when it is ill-advised. Pure powdered gold 100 parts Mercury oxide, yellow 150 “ Bismuth trinitrate “ Mix with thick oil of turpentine, paint upon tooth, and carefully heat in oven or flame. Polish with burnisher. TO IMITATE GOLD FILLING IN PORCELAIN TEETH. TO REPAIR A GOLD PLATE WITHOUT REMOVING THE RUBBER-MOUNTED TEETH. Attach to the plate the negative wire of the lighting circuit, and to the positive wire a small carbon, cutting in, in series, a bowl of salt water as a rheostat. The hole in the plate is cleansed and prepared in the usual way, then covered with a piece of gold foil and 18-carat solder upon it, with borax as a flux. The carbon point is brought in contact with the solder and then gradually removed, forming the arc, which is held sufficiently long to melt the solder. Immerse the plate immediately in water. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. CHAPTER V. ELECTRO-PLATING, COLORING, LACQUERING, AND ETCHING OF METALS. ELECTROPLATING OF METALS. When an electrified body is discharged through a con- ductor, an electric current is produced, known as the circuit. The circuit represents the entire path travelled by the current, including both that within the cell and that without. The current passes from the negative pole, i. e., the positive plate of the cell, to the positive pole, i. e., the negative plate of the cell. When the poles of a cell are connected by wire immersed in a salt solution in which a piece of metal of the same nature as the salt present in the solution and a piece of metal of a different character are suspended, the piece of metal attached to the negative pole will be covered with a coat of metal as represented in the solution. The process is referred to as electroplating. The negative pole, carrying the article to be plated, is spoken of as the cathode, and the positive pole, carrying the metal to be plated, is spoken of as the anode. PRACTICAL HINTS TO BE OBSERVED IN ELECTROPLATING. Ordinary dry cells (Columbia type), or wet cells (Leclanche type), furnish the best current for small plating outfits. A Leclanche cell furnishes, in average, 1| volts; the dry cells, from 1T to ly volts. Ordinarily, two cells are necessary for dental work. The current must never be so strong as to produce small bubbles upon the cathode; too weak a current produces a milk-colored deposit. Use the purest chemicals obtainable. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 110 DENTAL FORMULARY 111 Heating the solution to about 100° F. facilitates ready plating. In making the solution, all the salts, with the exception of the metal salts proper, should be dissolved first, the metal salts are added last. Meta! Rods supporting the Anode and the Cathode CARBON (Positive Pole! ZINC (Negative Polo) ANODE CATHODE DRY OR WET CELL Scheme for arranging a simple electroplating outfit. Gold or platinum wire soldered to the anode and attached to the article to be plated, the cathode, should be used only. Base metal wire produces poor results. Between the anode and the cathode, as suspended in the solution, there should be from 1 to 2 inches of space; the articles must never touch each other during the plating N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 112 DENTAL FORMULARY process. The size of the anode must be equally as large as the cathode. Articles made of German silver, bronze, or other alloys must be copper-plated before the final gold, silver or nickel plating is made. The vessels used in plating should be of glass, stone- ware or porcelain and must be kept scrupulously clean. Before immersing the articles in the plating solution it must be boiled in a solution of caustic potash (1 ounce to a pint of water) to remove fat, oil, finger grease, etc. Remove with wire hook and wash in water. Do not again touch with fingers. If articles are oxidized, they must be boiled for a short time in a weak solution (1 : 10) of sulphuric or hydrochloric acid. Places which should not be covered by the plating solution must be carefully varnished with asphalt varnish. The varnish must be perfectly dry before the goods are immersed in the plating solution. The time necessary to accomplish a good plating varies with the size of the article, from one-haJf to five hours may be required; the color of the plated article is usually the best indicator. After the plating is accomplished, the article is removed from the solution and boiled in water for a few minutes and the still hot article is thrown in jeweler’s sawdust and dried. Polish in the usual manner. AN INEXPENSIVE GOLD PLATING OUTFIT FOR SMALL WORK. Dissolve | ounce of potassium cyanide in 2\ ounces of pure, warm water. Also 15 grains of gold chloride in 2\ ounces of cold water. Mix the two solutions and pour into a glass or porcelain dish. Procure three pieces of insulated copper wire, each 16 inches in length and about 22 gauge. Remove 2 inches of the insulation on each end of the wires. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 113 Use two of these for connections with a dry cell battery, such as are used for hall bells or alarms. To the anode attach a piece of pure gold, and to the cathode the appliance to be plated. Immerse in the plating solution after previously cleansing in a heated solution of caustic potash, followed by a wash of clear water. For this cleansing use the third wire and do not handle the appliance with the fingers. Stir the plating solution occasionally. The outfit complete can be procured for about one dollar. PLATING SOLUTIONS. 1. Silver cyanide 2 parts Potassium cyanide 5 “ Distilled water 35 “ Use pure silver plate as the anode. Silver Plating Solutions. 2. Silver chloride 3 parts Sodium phosphate 40 “ Potassium cyanide 25 “ Potassium hydrate . . . . . 15 “ Distilled water 1000 “ 3. Silver nitrate 68 parts Distilled water 1000 “ 1 fissolve, and mix with Potassium cyanide 104 parts Distilled water 1000 “ This solution produces a heavy deposit. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 114 DENTAL FORMULARY Gold Plating Solutions. 1. Sodium phosphate 25 parts Sodium sulphate 5 “ Gold chloride 3 “ Potassium cyanide 10 “ Distilled water 560 “ The anode must be attached to a piece of pure gold plate of nearly the same size as the article to be plated. 2. Gold chloride 10 parts Potassium cyanide 20 “ Distilled water . . . . . . . 1000 “ For Plating Iron and Steel Goods. 3. Sodium phosphate, crystals .... 50 parts Sodium sulphate 12 “ Potassium cyanide | part Gold chloride, crystals 1 “ Distilled water 1000 parts Copper Plating Solutions. 1. Copper acetate 20 parts Sodium carbonate, crystals .... 17 “ Sodium sulphite, crystals 25 “ Potassium cyanide 20 “ Distilled water 1000 “ Use pure copper plate as the anode. 2. Copper acetate 20 parts Sodium carbonate 25 “ Acid sodium phosphate 20 “ Potassium cyanide 23 “ Distilled water 1000 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 115 1. Nickel sulphate 10 parts Sodium citrate 9 “ Distilled water 280 “ Nickel Plating Solutions. 2. Nickel and ammonium sulphate ... 70 parts Ammonium sulphate 25 “ Citric acid 25 “ Distilled water 1000 “ Platinum Plating Solution. Solution 1. Platinum chloride 4 parts Ammonium phosphate 20 “ Sodium phosphate 100 “ Distilled water 1000 “ Solution 2. Platinum chloride 4 parts Distilled water 1000 “ Both solutions are mixed with constant stirring. A yellow precipitate of platinic ammonium chloride is formed. To dissolve this precipitate add a solution of Sodium phosphate 100 parts Distilled water 700 “ and boil the whole mixture until the precipitate is dissolved. After complete solution, the solution is reduced by evapora- tion to about 1500 parts. Iron, copper or zinc articles may be readily brass plated with the following solution: Copper sulphate 1 r67 parts Zinc sulphate 10 “ Potassium cyanide 16 “ Distilled water 1000 “ Brass Plating Solution. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 116 DENTAL FORMULARY TO PLATINIZE GOLD. W. A. Price. Pour over any form of pure gold fiber, wool, moss, pellets or foil, (a shredded pure gold is preferable), a 10 per cent solution of platinum chloride sufficient to dampen or wet all surfaces and pour or squeeze off the excess. Next pour over it a solution of ammonium chloride and flow it through the mass a time or two to precipitate the platinum chloride as platinum ammonium chloride which forms a yellow precipitate over the surfaces of the gold. Take the water out of the mass by slowly heating or preferably by washing with alcohol. Then heat to a dull red which changes the yellow platinum ammonium chloride on the surfaces of the gold to amorphous spongy pure platinum which combines with the gold when heated to a red heat forming a gold and platinum compound. The advantages of a shredded gold over a foil or pellets is that the former will not curl and warp away from the margins by the gold flowing on its surfaces which the foil and pellets when used in this way will do. The platinized, shredded gold draws the pure gold into its mass around all sides of each fiber, thus preventing the curling. GOLD PLATING WITH ALUMINUM CONTACT. 1. Gold chloride 1| parts Potassium cyanide 16 “ Distilled water 1000 “ Dissolve the gold chloride in 500 parts of warm distilled water and the potassium cyanide is 500 parts of warm distilled water. Mix the two solutions. The article to be plated is wound with an aluminum wire and placed in a hot 5 per cent solution of potassium or sodium hydrate; it is now rinsed in water and placed in the heated gold solu- tion. Depending on the size of the article, it may remain in N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 117 the gold-bath from fifteen seconds to two minutes or until a sufficiently heavy deposit is obtained. It is then removed, washed in water and polished in the ordinary way. 2. Gold chloride 1 part (or silver chloride for silver plating) Potassium cyanide 25 parts Sodium phosphate 16 “ Potassium hydrate 10 “ Distilled water 500 “ Boil the solution. The perfectly clean and highly polished article is held by an aluminum wire and moved about in the boiling liquid for one-half to two minutes; it is then removed, washed in alcohol, and dried in sawdust. GOLD SOLUTION FOR PLATING WITHOUT A BATTERY. Sodium pyro-phosphate, crystals ... 80 parts Hydrocyanic acid, 12 per cent ... 8 “ Gold chloride, crystals 2 “ GOLD PLATING OF ALUMINUM BASE PLATES. After the aluminum base plate is swaged, it is placed in a 10 per cent potassium hydrate solution for a few minutes, removed, washed in water and placed in diluted hydrochloric acid and left there until small gas bubbles are visible upon its surface. It is now immediately transferred to a 25 per cent solution of mercuric chloride, left there a few moments and transferred to the acid bath in which it remains until the gas bubbles again start to form. It is now placed in a 10 per cent gold chloride solution. Immediately it is covered with a tense film of gold, which may be readily polished. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 118 DENTAL FORMULARY FIRE GILDING Gold-amalgam for fire gilding is prepared by alloying Pure gold 1 part Mercury 8 parts A Dixon black lead or English clay crucible is coated with prepared chalk, the gold is cut into small pieces and heated in the crucible to a dull redness and the mercury added and stirred. Pour in water. “Quickening” solution is prepared by dissolving (in the open air): Mercury 10 parts in Nitric acid 11 parts and adding Distilled water 275 parts Clean the article thoroughly and apply the “quickening” solution; with a copper spatula rub the gold amalgam over the “quickened” surface and remove the surplus of the amalgam with a soft brush. The article is now slightly heated to evaporate the mercury, leaving a pure layer of gold. With prepared chalk and borax solution the article is finally polished. Caution: Mercury fumes are very poisonous; they must not be inhaled. 1. Silver nitrate 1 part Sodium chloride 1 “ Potassium cyanide 2 parts Chalk, a sufficient quantity. Dissolve the silver nitrate in 16 parts of water and add the sodium chloride, dissolved in an equal amount of water. Mix thoroughly and collect the precipitate on a piece of SILVER PLATING PASTE. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities hv weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 119 damp cotton cloth. Transfer the moist precipitate to a mortar containing the potassium cyanide in powder and dissolve by adding more water if necessary. Now add sufficient chalk to make a spreadable paste. To resilver the tarnished article spread the paste upon the spot which must be free from grease, dirt, etc., and let remain two hours, then brush off. Repeat if necessary. 2. Silver nitrate 36 parts Potassium cyanide 60 “ Precipitated chalk 100 “ Potassium bitartrate 5 “ Water, enough to make a paste. Dissolve the silver nitrate and potassium cyanide sepa- rately in a minimum of water; mix them and add the chalk and potassium bitartrate and sufficient water to make a paste. SILVERING SOLUTION. A solution that is considerably used for covering the worn parts of plated goods has the following composition: Silver nitrate 35 parts Sodium chloride 60 “ Alum 30 “ Potassium bitartrate 180 “ Water 1000 “ The solution is applied by friction with a sponge or rag to the previously well-cleaned article. SILVER PLATING OF ORGANIC SUBSTANCES. Ivory, horns, bone, vulcanized rubber, leather and simi- lar materials may be coated with a layer of silver as follows: The material is heated to about 150° F. and painted over with a hot solution of 2 parts of gallic acid in 100 parts of water. After drying, a 1 per cent solution of silver nitrate N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 120 DENTAL FORMULARY in distilled water is painted over the parts and this process is alternately repeated until the desired silver color is obtained. It is not so easy to deposit nickel on the surface of brass as silver, but the following processes represent perhaps, the most practicable methods in use. The first method is known as the Mitressey process, by which any desired thickness of plating may be deposited, yielding a surface which is said to be more solid than electroplated nickel: NICKEL PLATING WITHOUT A BATTERY. 1. First Bath.—Clean the objects and take 5 parts by weight of potassium carbonate for 25 parts by weight of water. If the pieces are quite rusted, take 2 parts by weight of hydrochloric acid for 1 part by weight of water. The bath is employed cold. Second Bath.—Put 25 parts by weight of copper sulphate in 2500 parts by weight of water. After dissolution add a few drops of sulphuric acid, drop by drop, stirring the liquid with a wooden stick until it becomes as clear as spring water. Take the cleaned pieces and place them in what is called the copper bath, attaching to them leaves of zinc; they will assume a red tint. Then pass them into the nickel- ing bath, which is composed of: Platinum bitartrate 20 parts Ammonium chloride 10 “ Sodium chloride 5 “ Stannic chloride 20 “ Nickel sulphate, single 30 “ Nickel sulphate, double 50 “ Remove the pieces from the bath after a few minutes’ exposure, and rub with fine sand on a moist rag. Brilliancy will thus be obtained. To improve the appearance apply a brass wire brush. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 121 2. Prepare a bath of neutral zinc chloride and a neutral solution of a nickel salt. The objects are immersed in the bath with small pieces of zinc and kept boiling for some time. This process has given satisfactory results. It is easy to prepare the zinc chloride by dissolving zinc in hydro- chloric acid, as well as a saturated solution of ammoniacal nickel sulphate, in the proportion of 2 parts of the latter to 1 of the zinc chloride. The objects should be boiled for fifteen minutes in the bath. Nickel chloride may also be employed. PLATINUM PLATING OF DENTAL INSTRUMENTS. Platinum chloride 1 part Water 1 “ Hydrochloric acid 3| parts Alcohol 20 “ Dissolve and evaporate to . . . . 15 “ And add Ether 75 parts With a woollen cloth rub this liquid upon the clean instru- ment, heat to about 100° F. and polish. COPPER PLATING ALUMINUM Copper sulphate 30 parts Potassium and sodium tartrate 30 “ Sodium carbonate 25 “ Water 1000 “ The aluminum article is thoroughly cleansed in a weak potassium hydrate solution and placed in the heated bath. COPPER PLATING WOOD. First, the wood is rendered impervious by saturating with a wax varnish, which is then coated with a thick linseed-oil varnish. Then a shellac varnish is applied and allowed to N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 122 DENTAL FORMULARY dry. A thin deposit of silver sulphide is produced by treat- ment with a silver-nitrate solution made with alcohol and water, the surface being then exposed to sulphuretted- hydrogen gas. Finally, copper is electrolytically deposited on this film. COLORING OF METALS. Copper. Black.—To color copper black immerse the object, pre- viously well cleansed, in the following solution, let remain for from thirty to forty-five minutes, and afterward wash well : 1. Antimony chloride 15 parts Alcohol 125 “ Hydrochloric acid, sufficient to dissolve. The less of the acid that is used, the better the result. This process deposits a coating of antimony. 2. Plunge the well cleansed object in nitric acid, remove and heat to a dull red. It deposits a coating of copper oxide. 3. Plunge the copper, previously well cleansed, into the following: Arsenous acid 2 parts Hydrochloric acid 4 “ Sulphuric acid 1 part Water 24 parts It causes a deposit of arsenic. Bluish-gray.—Suspend the object in the following solution at an almost boiling heat: Sodium sulphide 1 part Antimony sulphide 1 “ Water .12 parts N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 123 Let remain until the desired tint is obtained, wash rapidly with water and dry. Brown.—-Immerse in nitric acid sufficiently long to give a bright surface, rinse in clear water and plunge into a solu- tion of iron chloride. Olive-green.—Cover with a solution of iron and arsenic in hydrochloric acid. Polish with lead-minimum, warm, and cover with the following varnish: Gamboge 1 part Yellow ochre . 1 “ Alcoholic varnish 1 “ To make iridescent: Lead acetate 2 parts Sodium hypophosphite 6 “ Water 100 “ Mix, and heat to boiling. When in active ebullition, plunge the object in it and keep until the desired tints are obtained. Dry and varnish. The copper takes on, suc- cessively, gray, violet, chestnut, red and finally blue. Bronze.—First tin the copper by boiling in a weak solution of acid potassium tartrate, in which granulated tin has been placed. Wash, dry, and warm until the desired tint is obtained. Zinc. Black.—Clean the zinc by dipping in diluted sulphuric acid, rinse and plunge into the following: 1. Nickel-ammonium sulphide .... 4 parts Sulphuric acid 1 part Water 40 parts Wash the article and dry carefully. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 124 DENTAL FORMULARY 2. Hydrochloric acid 6 parts Antimony chloride 10 “ Alcohol 100 “ When the desired shade is attained, dry and rub with some good drying oil. Give two or three coats. G reen-platina.— Sodium hyposulphite 2 parts Sulphuric acid 1 part Water 20 parts Filter off the precipitated sulphur and heat the filtrate. Plunge the object into the hot solution. Watch the colora- tion as it progresses and when the desired tint is secured, remove, let dry and varnish with copal varnish. To Bronze.—First cover with copper by galvanism, then wash with the following solution: Potassium oxalafe 8 parts Ammonium chloride 30 “ Vinegar 1000 “ Rinse and let dry. Silver. To Blacken.—Plunge into a solution of an alkaline sulphite (sulphuretted potassa). Remove and rub with a brush dipped in powdered cream of tartar. Baths for Oxidizing Silver. The peculiar appearance on the surface of silver articles that has been termed “oxidized silver” can be produced in a variety of ways, the particular tone depending upon the treatment to which the metal is submitted. A mixture of 6 parts of graphite and 1 part of powdered hematite (or rouge) is prepared, and moistened with oil of N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 125 turpentine. The surface of the object to be oxidized is covered with this paste, which is allowed to dry, and then dusted off with a soft brush. The object is now immersed in a solution, heated to about 175° F., consisting of 5 parts potassium sulphide, 10 parts ammonium carbonate, and 1000 parts of water. If the following solution be employed a rich brown tone is produced: 20 parts copper sulphate, 10 parts saltpetre, 20 parts ammonium chloride and 1000 parts of water. Bromide vapor blackens silver and its alloys, and by its use extraordinarily artistic effects can be produced, especially upon engraved surfaces. The silver objects may also be covered with ammonium sulphide in a porcelain vessel and gradually warmed. As soon as a bluish-black color appears they are taken out of the bath, placed in soap water, and gently rubbed with a soft brush, while immersed. A bath which produces the same effect as potassium sulphide, can be prepared as follows, and has the advantage of being very cheap: 1000 parts of water are poured over a mixture consisting of 370 parts of quicklime, and 640 parts flowers of sulphur. Considerable heat is evolved, and a pasty mass forms; the latter is diluted with 1000 parts of hot water, and boiled for an hour. The resulting liquid is ready for use, and is best employed after slightly warming. It produces a bluish-gray surface on the silver, while, if 50 parts of gray antimony sulphide or cinnabar be added during the boiling, the color will be a beautiful grayish-brown. Brownish Color.—To give silver a deep brown, treat it with a solution of ammonium chloride and copper sulphate, equal parts, in vinegar. To Oxidize Silver. 1. Light Color.— Sulphuretted potassa (liver of sulphur) . 5 parts Ammonia water 10 “ Water 60 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 126 DENTAL FORM ULAItY 2. Dark Color.— Chlorinated lime 10 parts Sodium chloride 8 “ Sodium carbonate 20 “ Water 30 “ Boil the article in this solution under a good ventilator as intensely ill-smelling gases are produced. To Oxidize Silver With Platinum. Platinum chloride 2.3 parts Water 1000 “ Dissolve and add Alcohol 500 “ The silverware, previously cleaned in a caustic soda solution, is immersed in the warmed platinum solution, removed and lightly heated over a Bunsen flame. Care should be taken so as not to burn the alcohol. If the black color is not deep enough, the process is to be repeated. Rose Color.—Immerse for a few seconds in a concentrated hot solution of copper chloride, rinse, dry and immerse in alcohol. Finally, dry off by holding near the fire. Iron and Steel. Bronzing.-—Lay the object for a moment in a solution of iron perchloride and copper sulphate with a little added nitric acid. Remove and dry at a temperature of about 85° F. Finally suspend in a closed box containing a vessel of boiling alcohol, and leave for twenty minutes, keeping the alcohol boiling all the time. Scratch off with a scratch brush. Repeat operation several times or until the desired tint is obtained. Blue-black.—Clean the object thoroughly, removing every trace of grease, then cover with the following: N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 127 Copper sulphate 8 parts Nitric acid 15 “ Alcohol 30 “ Water 125 “ Mix, and dissolve. Let dry on, and when quite dry rub with a woolen cloth. Brilliant Black.—Boil the following together: Sulphur 1 part Oil of turpentine 10 parts While boiling spread in a very light coating, by means of a brush over the surface and heat in the flame of an alcohol lamp until black. Brown.—Make the following solution: Iron sulphate 20 parts Copper sulphate 2 “ Sweet spirit of nitre 4 “ Water 200 “ Place the iron in the solution, dry and polish with boiled linseed oil. Bronzing Gun-barrels.— Solution of ferric chloride ..... 4 parts Mercuric chloride 3 “ Fuming nitric acid 3 “ Copper sulphate 3 “ Water 80 “ With a brush or pencil go over the barrel with this liquid. Repeat this two or three times. Finally plunge the barrel into a 1 per cent solution of potassium sulphide and let remain for ten days. At the end of the time wash in hot suds, dry off and cover with linseed oil, which let dry on. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 128 DENTAL FORMULARY Black, Rust-proof Finish for Iron. A solution is made up of water, 1000 parts, manganese dioxide, 3 parts and phosphoric acid, concentrated, | part. This is placed in a suitable receptacle and heated to the boil- ing point. The iron or steel article, previously cleaned, is immersed in it for from thirty to ninety minutes, when it is removed, wiped and polished with linseed oil. Brass. Silver Color.— Cream of tartar 46 parts Tartar emetic 4 “ Dissolve in boiling water .... 1000 “ and add Hydrochloric acid 50 parts Tin, granulated 125 “ Antimony 30 “ Bring the solution to a boil, immerse the brass article and dry in sawdust. Platina.—The green coating—“Platina”—found upon bronze objects, especially such as have laid buried for some time, is not only pleasing to the eye but also serves a practical purpose, in that the metal beneath is protected from further corrosion. Brass objects can be coated as well as bronzed, by the following solution: Copper 30 parts Nitric acid, concentrated 60 “ Acetic acid, 6 per cent 600 “ Ammonium chloride 11 “ Ammonia water 20 “ The copper is dissolved in the nitric acid, and, as soon as solution is effected, the other ingredients are added. The solution must be allowed to stand several days before using. N. 13 —Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 129 The objects to be coated are either dipped into the solution for a moment, or the solution is applied to the surface by means of a brush. They are then allowed to dry, and are finally covered with a thin coat of linseed oil. Steel Blue.—To obtain a beautiful steel blue color, the cleaned brass is dipped in a heated mixture of the following solution: Solution 1. Antimony sulphate 12 parts Sodium carbonate, calcined .... 120 “ Water 750 “ Dissolve and add Sulphurated antimony 22 parts Filter. Solution 2. Cream of tartar 22 parts Sodium hyposulphite 45 “ Water 750 “ Equal parts of solutions 1 and 2 are freshly mixed when needed. Black—Mix equal parts of the following solutions when needed. Solution 1. Silver nitrate 25 parts Water 100 “ Solution 2. Copper nitrate 25 parts Water 100 “ The cleansed brass is plunged into this freshly mixed solution, removed and heated evenly until the desired degree of dead blackness is obtained. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 130 DENTAL FORMULARY BLACKENING OF METALS. Solution 1. Silver nitrate 192 parts Distilled water 480 “ Solution 2. Copper nitrate 192 parts Distilled water 480 “ Thoroughly clean the article, especially from grease, and dip into a mixture of equal parts of above solutions. Allow it to remain in this about ten minutes, then remove, and dry naturally. When dry, heat it on a sand-bath until a good deep black color is obtained. METAL LACQUERS. For Optical Goods, Microscopes, Etc. Seed lac 32 parts Dragon’s blood | part Extra red sanders § “ Oriental saffron | “ Amber 16 parts Copal 16 “ Coarsely powdered glass 30 “ Absolute alcohol 320 “ Mix. Iveep in a warm place, shake occasionally until dissolved, let settle and pour off the clear liquid. 1. Gum shellac 50 parts Turpentine varnish 100 “ Turmeric 125 “ Gamboge 16 “ Gum sandarac 25 “ Alcohol, enough to make .... 1000 “ For Ordinary Brass Goods. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 131 2. Gum shellac 75 parts Gum sandarac 75 parts Venice turpentine 10 “ Alcohol, enough to make .... 1000 “ 3. Gamboge 1 part Aloes, Cape 3 parts Gum shellac, orange 8 “ Alcohol 125 “ 4.—Zapon Lacquer. Celluloid, colorless 2 parts Acetone 20 “ Amyl acetate 78 “ Lacquer for Silver Articles. 1. Pyroxylin 25 parts Gum shellac, orange 3 “ Methyl alcohol 56 “ Amyl alcohol 240 “ Amyl acetate 480 “ 2. Pyroxylin 4 parts Benzol 50 “ Amyl acetate 70 “ Alcoholic lacquers are best colored with “Aniline dyes for spirit varnishes.” They are obtained from dealers in dye stuffs. Graphite Lacquer for Iron. Lead sulphate 20 parts Tin sulphate 20 “ Ceylon graphite, in fine powder ... 5 “ Boiled linseed oil 80 “ Mix thoroughly and boil for fifteen minutes. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 132 DENTAL FORMULARY Blue Lacquer for Steel. White gum shellac 5 parts Borax 1 part Alcohol 5 parts Water 4 “ Methylene blue, enough to give the desired shade. Dissolve the borax in the water; the shellac in the alcohol. Bring the borax solution nearly to a boil, add the shellac solution under constant stirring and add the methylene blue. Metal goods to be lacquered must be perfectly clean, especially free from grease; they must be warmed and handled with a cloth to avoid finger touches. Apply the lacquer with a soft camel’s hair brush, using the tip only. Apply two to three coats, letting each coat dry perfectly. Warm the articles between the varnishing. Gold Lacquer for Tin. Gum lac 16 parts Dragon’s blood 4 “ Turmeric 1 part Alcohol, wood, 95 per cent .... 300 parts Mix and heat moderately on the water-bath to a solution. Gum shellac 5 parts Gamboge 5 “ Acetone 30 “ Alcohol ' . 50 “ The lacquering must be done in a warm room, free from moisture. Two or more days should be allowed for perfect drying. Metal Lacquer; to Be Used Without Heat. 1. Ammonium chloride 1 part Copper sulphate 2 parts Acetic acid, dilute 4 “ ETCHING. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 133 2. Steel.— Copper sulphate 24 parts Alum 12 “ Sodium chloride 3 “ Acetic acid 12 “ . Nitric acid 1 part Water, enough to make 120 parts Mix the acids and the water, and dissolve the solid ingredi- ents in the mixture. Dip the article in boiling water, wipe dry, and either dip into melted beeswax or rub wax on the article, while it is still hot enough to melt it. The design is produced by scratching with a fine pointed instrument through this film of wax. Apply the mixture with a piece of wood, wash off in a few minutes and repeat the process until the etching is of sufficient depth. The same procedure holds good for the etching of the other substitutes given below: Brass and Copper.—Mix equal parts of the following solutions when needed: Solution 1. Nitric acid 16 parts Water 100 “ Solution 2. Potassium chlorate 6 parts Water 100 “ Zinc.—Mix equal parts of the following solutions when needed: Solution 1. Gallic acid 5 parts Gum arabic 40 “ Water 500 “ Warm the mixture until solution takes place. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 134 DENTAL FORMULARY Solution 2. Nitric acid part Copper sulphate 2 parts Water 500 “ Glass.-—Hydrofluoric acid, a sufficient quantity. Apply with a glass rod. Hydrofluoric acid is intensely caustic and requires great care in handling. Wood.—First cover the surface to be etched with good varnish, and let dry. With a needle point or any similar sharp instrument, draw the lines to be etched, through the layer of varnish, and apply to the design the following fluid: Potassium bichromate 1 part Distilled water 6 parts Sulphuric acid 1 part Dissolve the bichromate in the water, and add the acid. Let remain in contact until the etching is deep enough to suit, then wash off. The varnish can be removed with any suitable solvent—benzol, alcohol, etc. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. CHAPTER VI. PREPARATIONS FOR THE MOUTH AND TEETH. Oral Hygiene.—The science of oral health treats of the preservation of the normal equilibrium of the oral cavity and its contents. The remedies intended for the maintenance of the health of the soft structures of the mouth and the teeth may be conveniently divided into those prescribed for specific diseased conditions and those employed as hygienic measures for daily use. Only those employed for hygienic purposes are claiming our interest at present. The mechanical cleansing of the mouth and teeth by means of the brush, powder, paste, toothpick, floss silk, etc., constitutes the absolute fundamental principle of artificial oral hygiene. Food remnants and slimy adhesions between and upon the teeth, together with a large number of the adherent bacteria, are principally removed by mechanical cleansing. The mechanical cleansing of the oral cavity by these enumerated means may, however, be materially assisted by the judicious use of suitable mild astringent and indifferent antiseptic solutions. Powders, pastes, and washes containing soluble drugs or drugs in solution are employed for the avowed purposes of assisting Nature in accomplishing the desired means to an end, i. e., they must favor the recovery of an inflamed mucous membrane and they must mechanically remove accumulated food debris. A good oral preparation should possess the following properties: 1. It must be absolutely indifferent in regard to: (а) The mucous membrane—non-caustic. (б) The teeth—non-decalcifying (mechanical or chem- ical). (c) The organism as a whole—non-poisonous. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 135 136 DENTAL FORMULARY 2. It must not interfere with the normal physiological cleansing of the oral cavity, i. e.: (a) It must not inhibit the secretion of saliva. (b) It must not perceptibly alter the reaction of saliva. (c) It must not destroy the ferments of saliva. 3. It must possess sufficient cleansing action, combined with: 4. Good taste and odor. These various enumerated properties are naturally rarely found in combination in a single oral preparation and yet each one is of the utmost importance. Hygienic measures as applied to the oral cavity are practised in proportion to the pleasant sensation which they call forth, hence, a mouth preparation which has a disgusting taste is ineffective because it will not be employed for any length of time by the laity. The great mass of the public will never be induced to practice oral hygiene that involves ill-tasting preparations. As stated above, mouth prepara- tions must be absolutely free from danger as far as the mucous membrane, the teeth, and the organism as a whole is concerned. Hence Roese’s dictum should be indelibly fixed in the mind of every dental and medical practitioner: The importance of oral antisepsis is not so great that we are justified in assuming the slightest risk. This statement cannot be emphasized too strongly in view of the fact that numberless mouth washes and tooth preparations of ques- tionable character are continuously forced on the market. Unless the correct composition of a ready-made mouth or tooth preparation is known, it should not be recommended. Preparations which are intended to exercise definite functions on the teeth and gums, the oral mucous membrane, the tongue, the salivary glands, and the tonsils, and to some extent on the breath, are known as oralia. This term has, however, never been universally recognized; the physical nature of the preparation has created specific names for definite classes—solid or semi-solid tooth preparations are known as dentifrices, liquid tooth preparations are spoken N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 137 of as collwtoria, while liquids intended for the pharyngeal regions are referred to as gargles. Oral remedies are employed for the purpose of preserving and restoring the normal equilibrium of the oral tissues, and consequently no specific pharmacologic action is represented by each class of these preparations—they represent merely a combination of medicinal agents indicated for a clinical entity. According to their therapeutic indications, the drugs used in the mouth are grouped under abrasives, antacids, antiseptics, astrin- gents, stimulants, and correctives. The preparations used for the mouth and teeth are con- veniently divided into mouth washes, tooth powders, tooth pastes, and tooth soaps. Mouth pastils, cachous, and chewing gums are also used by the laity; they are intended to flavor the breath, and possess no medicinal value. DRUGS USED IN PREPARATIONS FOR THE MOUTH AND TEETH. In constructing a formula for a mouth or tooth preparation the following substances must be avoided: 1. Strong precipitants of albumen (concentrated alcohol, mineral acids, with the exception of boric acid, metallic salts, phenol and salicylic acid and most of their derivatives, etc.). 2. Caustics (potassium and sodium hydroxide and many of the potassium salts). 3. Strong astringents (formaldehyde solution, etc.). 4. Gritty substances (pumice stone, charcoal, crude chalk, etc.). 5. Fermentable substances (sugars, starches, vegetable powders). 6. Staining substances (organic and inorganic dyestuffs, chinosol, iron salts, manganese salts, etc.). The following is a list of drugs which may be employed in mouth and tooth preparations, and their relative highest percentages in 100 parts of the finished product. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 138 DENTAL FORMULARY ABRASIVES. Cuttlefish bone 3 to 5 per cent Soap 2 to 3 Cinchona bark 5 “ Orris root 10 “ Calamus root 10 “ Calcium carbonate, precipitated, up to 100 “ ANTACIDS. Sodium bicarbonate 5 per cent Magnesium carbonate .... 10 “ Magnesium oxide 10 “ Calcium carbonate, precipitated, up to 100 “ ANTISEPTICS. Mercuric bichloride . . . 0.05 to 0.1 per cent Benzoic acid 1 to 3 “ Sodium fluoride .... 1 to 3 Hydronaphtol .... 1 to 5 Resorcinol 1 to 5 “ Salol 3 to 5 “ Phenol 3 to 5 Potassium chlorate . . . 1 to 5 Salicylic acid .... 3 to 5 Magnesium dioxide ... 5 to 10 Sodium perborate . . . 5 to 10 Strontium dioxide . . . 5 to 10 Boric acid . . . . . 10 to 20 “ Sodium borate . 10 to 20 Hydrogen dioxide solution . 10 to 20 ASTRINGENTS. Zinc chloride . . . . 0.05 to 0.1 per cent. Tannic acid 1 to 2 Benzoin 5 Catechu 5 Kino 5 Myrrh 5 Uhatany root . . . . 2 to 10 X. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by- weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 139 STIMULANTS. Oil of rose 0.1 to 0.5 per cent Oil of ylang-ylang . . . 0.1 to 0.5 Menthol 0.5 “ Thymol 0.5 “ Eucalyptol 1 “ Oil of geranium . . . . 0.5 to 1 “ Oil of cinnamon ... 1 “ Oil of peppermint ... 1 “ Oil of clove 1 to 2 “ Oil of eucalyptus ... 1 to 2 “ Oil of mountain pine . . 1 to 3 “ Camphor 1 to 3 “ Oil of wintergreen ... 1 to 4 “ Methyl salicylate ... 1 to 5 Alcohol 10 to 100 Saccharin 0.0008 per cent Cumarin 0.5 to 1 “ Vanilla 0.5 to 1 “ Glycerin 5 to 10 “ CORRECTIVES. FLAVORING AGENTS. Flavoring agents are represented principally by mixtures of essential oils. These oils should not haphazardly be com- pounded but selected according to their odoriferous relation- ship. A few agents, like tincture of vanilla, or of ambergris, are often employed in very small quantities as so-called fixatives of the respective odors. About 1 part of the oil mixture should be added to 100 parts of the finished product. Suitable flavoring solutions may be made from the follow- ing groups; it is desirable to restrict the oil mixture to components of a single group. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 140 DENTAL FORMULARY Group I. Oil of peppermint Oil of spearmint Oil of wintergreen Oil of sweet birch Oil of mountain pine Oil of lemon Gum camphor Group II. Oil of cinnamon Oil of cassia Oil of clove Oil of anise Oil of orange Oil of orris root Group III. Oil of rose Oil of rose-geranium Oil of ylang-ylang Oil of cananga Fixatives. Tincture of vanilla Tincture of ambergris Tincture of musk The following oil mixture produces a serviceable flavoring combination: Oil of peppermint 56 parts Oil of eucalyptus 16 “ Methyl salicylate 12 “ Oil of lemon 10 “ Oil of anise 5 “ ACTION OF ANTISEPTICS IN THE MOUTH. According to W. D. Miller. DRUGS. Dilution in which Time in which they can be em- the mouth be- ployed in mouth. comes sterilized. Acid benzoic .... . 1: 100.... | minute Acid boric . 1: 50.... above 11 minutes Acid salicylic .... . 1: 300.... f to 1 minute Eugenol . 1: 750.... above 10 minutes Hydronaphthol . 1:1500.... above 15 minutes Iodine trichloride . . 1:2000.... above 1 \ minutes Lysol . 1: 200.... above 5 minutes Mercuric chloride . . 2:2500.... | to f minute Oil of cinnamon . 1: 400.... about 8 minutes N. B.—-Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 141 Oil of clove 1: 550.... above 11 minutes Oil of eucalyptus. 1: 625.... above 8 minutes Oil of mountain pine 1: 360.... above 19 minutes Oil of peppermint 1: 600.... above 11 minutes Oil of wintergreen 1: 350.... above 12 minutes Phenol 1: 100.... above 5 minutes Potassium chlorate . 1: 40 Potassium permanganate 1:4000.... about 15 minutes Saccharin 1: 400.... f minute Solution aluminum acetate 1: 20. .. above 5 minutes Solution hydrogen dioxide 2: 100.... above 6 minutes Thymol 1:2000.... above minutes MOUTH WASHES. A mouth wash is usually prescribed as a gargle, to be used in conjunction with the toothbrush. The components of the wash should be so adjusted that one teaspoonful, mixed with a half tumblerful of warm water (approximately 1 to 30), furnishes the correct proportions of its active ingredients intended for daily use. The gargling motion is produced by forcing air from the lungs through the fluid held pos- teriorly in the open mouth. Powerful exercise of the muscles of the pharynx, the cheeks, and the lips are material adjuncts in forcing the fluid back and forth through the teeth. About one-half to one minute’s gargling is the average time required for each mouthful, corresponding approximately to \ to 1 fluid ounce (15 to 30 cc) of liquid. Correct gargling is quite a difficult procedure; it cannot be accomplished by children and those afflicted with pharyngeal disturbances. Through incorrect gargling a quantity of the fluid is often swallowed, or it merely turns about in the anterior part of the mouth. If the fluids contain alcoholic or volatile liquids, more or less of it is always absorbed. Tooth and mouth washes are usually dispensed in flint glass bottles stoppered with corks or metallic sprinkler tops. If the latter are used the contents of the bottle must not corrode the metallic top. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 142 DENTAL FORMULARY Colors for Mouth Washes. Bright red Tincture of cochineal Reddish-brown .... Tincture of cudbear Brown Caramel solution Golden yellow .... Tincture of saffron Green Chlorophyl solution Sodium bicarbonate 30 parts Sodium benzoate 20 “ Sodium borate 50 “ Menthol 6 “ Thymol 3 “ Eucalyptol 3 “ Alcohol 100 “ Glycerin 200 “ Water, enough to make .... 1000 “ Alkaline Mouth Wash. General Directions for Preparing a Mouth Wash: Dissolve the essential oils, eucalyptol, thymol, menthol or other alcohol-soluble substances in the alcohol; mix the glycerin and the water and add the water-soluble substances. Mix the two solutions, and, if turbid, add 20 parts of purified talc for each 1000 parts of the finished product. Shake occasionally, and let stand for a week. Filter through paper, returning the first portions of the filtrate until it passes through clear. Anatherin Dentrifice. Red sandalwood 20 parts Guaiac wood 10 “ Myrrh 25 “ Cloves 15 “ Cinnamon 5 “ Oil of clove 1 part Oil of cinnamon 1 “ Alcohol 1500 parts Water 750 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 143 Boric acid 25 parts Benzoic acid 1 part Thymol 3 parts Eucalyptol 5 “ Oil of wintergreen 5 “ Menthol 6 “ Glycerin 100 “ Alcohol 250 “ Water, enough to make .... 1000 “ Antiseptic Mouth Wash. Chinosol Mouth Wash. Chinosol 1 part Oil of peppermint 1 “ Water 40 parts Alcohol 60 “ Star anise seed 25 parts Cinnamon, Ceylon 25 “ Cloves 25 “ Cochineal 10 “ Potassium bitartrate 5 “ Tannic acid 5 “ Balsam of Peru 5 “ Oil of peppermint 10 parts Alcohol, diluted 1000 “ Eau de Botot. 1. Resorcinol 50 parts Zinc chloride | part Menthol 5 parts Thymol 2 “ Eucalyptol \ part Camphor | part Oil of wintergreen \ “ Hydrogen dioxide solution 200 “ Alcohol 250 “ Water, enough to make .... 1000 “ Hydrogen Dioxide Mouth Washes. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 144 DENTAL FORMULARY 2. Thymol . \ part Menthol \ “ Saccharin \ “ Alcohol 70 parts Hydrogen dioxide solution .... 120 “ 1. Thymol 1 part Benzoic acid 12 parts Tincture of eucalyptus .... 60 “ Alcohol 400 “ Oil of peppermint 3 “ Miller’s Mouth Washes. 2. Benzoic acid GO parts Tincture of rhatany 260 “ Oil of peppermint 15 “ Alcohol, enough to make .... 2000 “ Pickerill’s Acid Mouth Wash. Potassium bitartrate 2 parts Tartaric acid 2 “ Oil of lemon 3 “ Saccharin \ “ Water 480 “ Pruyn’s Mouth Wash. Phenol 2 parts Boric acid 6 “ Oil of cassia 2 “ Oil of peppermint \ part Chloroform . 2 parts Alcohol 50 “ Glycerin, enough to make .... 120 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 145 Boric acid 5 parts Sodium borate 13 “ Resorcinol 18 “ Eau de cologne 100 “ Water, enough to make 500 . “ Resorcinol Mouth Wash. Saccharin Mouth Wash. Saccharin part Sodium borate 4 parts Alcohol 50 “ Water 50 “ Tincture of cochineal \ part Oil of peppermint 1 “ Saponaceous Mouth Wash. White Castile soap 25 parts Oil of clove 10 “ Oil of peppermint 15 “ Oil of wintergreen 25 “ Oil of cassia 10 “ Glycerin 100 “ Water 600 “ Alcohol 400 “ Color with tincture of cochineal. Thymol 15 parts Benzoic acid 10 “ Eucalyptol 30 “ Oil of peppermint 5 “ Oil of clove 1 part Oil of sage 1 “ Cumarin § “ Alcohol, enough to make .... 1000 parts Color with tincture of saffron. Thymol Mouth Wash. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 146 DENTAL FORMULARY Powder for Making a Mouth Wash. Saccharin 12 parts Menthol 15 “ Lime (calcium oxide) 150 “ Shaker salt 5760 “ The first two ingredients must be thoroughly triturated in a mortar, so as to obtain a fine powder. The lime is added, thoroughly mixed with it and finally the salt is added. The mixed powder should be passed through a coarse sieve so as to form a uniform mixture. If a color is desired, parts of phenolphthalein may be added. Fifteen grains of this mixture added to 4 ounces of warm water makes a most suitable mouth wash for daily use. TOOTH POWDERS. Tooth powders, pastes and soaps are principally employed for the purpose of mechanically cleansing the accessible surface of the teeth. Their antiseptic effect on oral bacteria is of questionable value, as they remain hardly long enough in the mouth to enter into a complete solution. Tooth powders or pastes should not contain gritty or fermentable substances or corrosive chemicals which act deleteriously on tooth structure. The wasting away of tooth tissues, usually referred to as erosion or abrasion is largely the result of the continuous use of powders, pastes, etc., which contain more or less abrasive substances, as the late Miller has shown. The materials which are principally employed in the manufacture of commercial tooth powders, pastes, and soaps are prepared chalk, precipitated calcium carbonate, mag- nesium carbonate, soap, pumice stone, cuttlefish bone, orris root, and many other substances—as vegetable powders of various kinds, borax, boric acid, potassium bitartrate, alum, charcoal, tin oxide, etc. Some of these substances possess a pronounced abrasive character, while others are polishing agents consisting of various degrees of grit. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 147 To insure absolute freedom from grit, all dry substances entering as components into a tooth powder or paste must be sifted through bolting cloth running 200 meshes to the linear inch. The vegetable powders are principally used as adjuvants and diluents; their use in tooth powders is not to be encouraged, as they may lodge between the teeth, and the starch, which is present in most of these powders in variable quantities, may be the cause of acid fermentation. An acquaintance with the physical nature of the ingredients entering into the makeup of tooth preparations in regard to their abrasive qualities is essential for the dental practitioner. A microscopic examination of the more important powdered substances, together with a comparative knowledge of their physical and chemical composition, furnishes excellent in- formation regarding their usefulness as components of dentifrices. Prepared chalk, drop chalk; whiting, a white amorphous pow'der, is crude calcium carbonate, purified by mechanical means. Prepared chalk is not precipitated chalk (calcium carbonate, precipitated). Prepared chalk contains in addi- tion silica, alumina, and other impurities, and consists principally of the microscopic shells of many forms of infusoria. The minute particles of prepared chalk are sufficiently hard and sharp to remove tooth substance when used in a dentifrice, and should therefore never be employed for such purposes. Precipitated chalk, precipitated calcium carbonate, is a fine white amorphous powder, prepared by chemical means. Depending upon the process of manufacture, various grades of fineness, weight, and color are obtained. For the purpose of preparing tooth powders, pastes, etc., only the very finest bolted precipitated calcium carbonate is permissible. Prepared oyster shells are prepared from the boiled, cleansed, and powdered shells of the oyster. They consist principally of an impure calcium carbonate, with variable quantities of calcium phosphate, and small amounts of N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 148 DENTAL FORMULARY iodine, bromine, organic matter, etc. The powder usually emits a peculiar sea odor. The abrasive power of powdered oyster shells is about equal to that of prepared chalk, and the same objection is raised to their use as a tooth powder base. Pumice stone is a light, porous stone of volcanic origin, consisting chiefly of silica, with potash and soda. As may be expected from its composition, it is a powerful abrasive, and it should never enter into a tooth preparation intended for daily use. Even its temporary use in conjunction with precipitated chalk acts deleteriously on tooth structure. Magnesium carbonate. Two forms of magnesium car- bonate are known—the light and the heavy. The light preparation is usually employed for tooth powder purposes. It has no abrasive or polishing action on tooth structure. As it is a voluminous powder, it is principally used to give bulk to tooth powders. Burnt magnesia is prepared from magnesium carbonate by calcination. It possesses no advantage over magnesium carbonate, and is rarely used at present as a component of dentifrices. Tin oxide, also known as flowers of tin or as putty powder, a white, amorphous practically insoluble powder is used by many manufacturers as a component of tooth powders to produce a high luster to the teeth. Cuttlefish bone is a calcareous substance found under the skin of the back of the cuttlefish. It is composed of calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, gluten, and other substances which are readily recognized by their peculiar putrid odor. The external hard skin and the internal soft deposits of the cuttlefish bone are ground together, forming a powder, which is used as an abrasive. Charcoal is a very fine black powder prepared from soft wood (linden wood). It is odorless and tasteless, and, when freshly prepared, readily absorbs offensive odors. Even the finest charcoal powder presents a mass of sharp crystalline cylinders under the microscope, which possess marked abra- sive power. When used as a component in a tooth powder, the sharp particles imbed themselves in due time in the gum N. B.—-Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 149 tissue, producing a distinct bluish line near the margin. The gum tissue becomes tatooed by the charcoal, and nothing can remove this pigmentation but a surgical operation. Charcoal should not be used in a tooth preparation; it is often found in the so-called Chinese and Japanese tooth powders. Soaps.—Soaps must be used very sparingly in oral cos- metics. A good tooth preparation should not contain more than 2 to 3 per cent of the best quality of Castile soap. Many of the commercial preparations, especially tooth pastes and, naturally, tooth soaps, contain by far too large quantities of soap. Soaps are either potassium or sodium oleates; they are strong astringents and, in concentrated solutions, caustics. If used in concentrated form, they have a tendency of lower- ing the resistance of mucous linings of the oral cavity by maceration. Even the so-called neutral soaps (which do not exist, however), when employed in concentration above 4 per cent, invariably destroy the important salivary ferments. Soaps are employed in tooth preparations for the purpose of emulsifying food debris, precipitated mucin, freshly deposited tartar, etc., adhering to the tooth surfaces. The churning up of the abrasive, usually precipitated chalk, present as a base in most of the tooth powders and pastes, plus the foam pro- duced by the soap, brush and water, mechanically remove these adhesions. If a strong emulsifying agent is desired in combination with a tooth preparation, the official tincture of quillaja may be employed. When used in conjunction with warm water, soap acts as a mild antiseptic. Powdered vegetable drugs—as the roots of calamus, rhatany, licorice, and orris, cinchona bark, sandalwood, myrrh, benzoin, etc.—have no place in tooth powders. As stated above, they are added to give flavor to the powder or to increase its bulk. The odor and taste of these vegetable substances is readily substituted by their respective essential oils or alcoholic extracts. The short time in which a tooth powder remains in the mouth is not long enough to allow’ the active constituents of these substances to enter into N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 150 DENTAL FORMULARY solution. Their abrasive action is of no value, but, as these vegetable powders may be forced between the teeth and remain there for some time, their starch constituent may give rise to acid fermentation. Tooth powders are preferably dispensed in glass bottles or tin cans with suitable sprinkler tops. Red. Carmin No. 40 20 parts Ammonia wrater 50 “ Water 20 “ Alcohol 30 “ Calcium carbonate, precipitated . . 1000 “ Dissolve the carmin in the ammonia water, add the water and alcohol, and mix thoroughly with the calcium carbonate. Spread on paper and dry at room temperature; rub through a No. 100 brass wire sieve. Pink. Prepare same as red body, using only one-half of the carmin, 10 parts. Violet. Alkanet extract 2\ parts Ether 100 “ Calcium carbonate, precipitated . . 1000 “ Prepare same as red body. BODIES FOR COLORED TOOTH POWDERS. Camphor or English Tooth Powder. Calcium carbonate, precipitated . . . 750 parts Magnesium carbonate 120 “ Sugar of milk 130 “ Camphor 20 “ Ether 30 “ Dissolve the camphor in the ether, mix with the calcium carbonate, dry in the air, and mix with the other ingredients. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 151 Fitzgerald’s Tooth Powder. Calcium carbonate, precipitated . . . 360 parts Magnesium carbonate 300 “ Castile soap 150 “ Salol 60 “ Boric acid 30 “ Thymol 2 “ Saccharin § part Oil of peppermint 5 parts Harlan’s Tooth Powder. Calcium carbonate, precipitated . . .100 parts Orris root . . . • 100 “ Castile soap 25 “ Sodium bicarbonate 25 “ Myrrh 100 “ Oil of wintergreen 10 “ Head’s Tooth Powder. Magnesium peroxide 60 parts Sodium perborate 30 “ Castile soap 10 “ Flavoring to suit. Calcium carbonate, precipitated . . .100 parts Sodium chloride “ Pumice stone 2| “ Castile soap 3 “ Oil of peppermint 1 part Lassar’s Tooth Powder. Oxidizing Tooth Powder. 1. Calcium carbonate, precipitated ... 75 parts Magnesium carbonate 10 “ Sodium perborate 10 “ Castile soap 3 “ Oil of peppermint 1 part N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 152 DENTAL FORMULARY 2. Calcium carbonate, precipitated ... 90 parts Strontium dioxide 8 “ Castile soap 3 “ Oil of wintergreen 1 part Oil of peppermint £ “ Calcium carbonate, precipitated ... 30 parts Magnesium carbonate 10 “ Orris root 15 “ Oil of peppermint f part Miller’s Tooth Powder. Philadelphia Dental Dispensary Tooth Powder. Calcium carbonate, precipitated ... 95 parts Castile soap 3 “ Saccharin £ part Oil of birch 1 “ Oil of peppermint £ “ Rhein’s Tooth Powder. Calcium carbonate 32800 parts Oil of peppermint 410 “ Oil of gaultheria 820 “ Sodium bicarbonate 2800 “ Sodium oleate 2800 “ Potassium bitartrate 5600 “ Saccharin 1 part A perfect tooth paste cannot be produced satisfactorily without the use of some “binding” agent. The most serviceable excipient is powdered tragacanth. Pastes which are massed with pure glycerin only are disappointing; the latter oozes from the tube, discoloring the label and forming TOOTH PASTES. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 153 an unsightly package. Glycerin is necessary, but it should not be employed alone. Glucose should never be used as a massing fluid, as it will easily ferment. The consistency of the excipient or massing fluid determines the character of the paste. Powdered gum tragacanth 2 parts Glycerin 50 “ Water 50 “ Dissolve the gum tragacanth in the water-glycerin mixture. Anothei massing fluid is made by mixing: Glycerin 2 parts Mucilage of acacia 2 “ Mucilage of acacia is made by dissolving: Gum arabic 2 parts Water 3 “ Dissolve the gum arabic in the water, and strain through a fine cotton cloth. Tooth pastes may be prepared according to this general formula: Tooth powder body 10 parts Massing fluid 7 to 10 “ Tooth pastes are best dispensed in collapsible tubes of pure tin. Massing Fluids. Albodon Dental Cream. Calcium carbonate 29.41 parts Castile soap 26.05 “ Water 7.00 “ Essential oils 3.74“ Glycerin 16.99 “ Alcohol 16.05 “ Benzoic acid] Saccharin j 0.76 part N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 154 DENTAL FORMULARY “Common Sense” Tooth Paste. Gum tragacanth, powder \ part Castile soap, powder 5 parts Distilled water 20 “ Glycerin 20 “ Flavoring oils 1 part Calcium carbonate, precipitated ... 54 parts English Cherry Tooth Paste. Pumice, powder 750 parts Orris root, powder 1000 “ Calcium carbonate, precipitated . 2500 “ Gum tragacanth, powder .... 15 “ Oil of clove 60 “ Mix intimately and add Morelia cherry juice 1250 parts Glycerin 1000 “ Solution of cochineal 240 “ Mucilage of gum arabic .... 240 “ English Odontine. Calcium carbonate, precipitated . . . 500 parts Orris root 100 “ Pumice stone 50 “ Oil of peppermint 10 “ Oil of sage 5 “ Oil of clove 2 “ Carmin, enough to color. Massing fluid, enough to make a paste. Kaladont. Calcium carbonate, precipitated . . . 250 parts Magnesium carbonate 80 “ Castile soap 100 “ Oil of peppermint 10 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 155 Oil of clove 2 parts Oil of cinnamon 1 part Oil of wintergreen 1 “ Carmin, enough to color. Massing fluid, enough to make a paste. Kolynos Dental Cream. Calcium carbonate 21.00 parts Castile soap 25.50 “ Thymol 25 part Benzoic acid 30 “ Saccharin 50 “ Oil of eucalyptus 1.75 parts Oil of peppermint 1.90 “ Glycerin 27.00 “ Alcohol 21.80 “ Miller’s Tooth Paste. Calcium carbonate, precipitated . . . 100 parts Magnesium carbonate 5 “ Cuttlefish bone 4 “ Sugar 2 “ Myrrh 2 “ Massing fluid, enough to make a paste Pepsodent. Pepsin 0.621 parts Acid calcium phosphate . . . . 0.512 “ Calcium chloride 0.237 “ Mitigated calcium phosphate . . . 57.834 “ (Tricalcium phosphate.) (Anhydrous calcium sulphate.) Glycerin Alcohol Water Flavoring 40.796 parts N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 156 DENTAL FORMULARY Potassium Chlorate Tooth Paste. Calcium carbonate, precipitated . . . 350 parts Orris root 100 “ Potassium chlorate 250 “ Oil of peppermint 5 “ Oil of clove . 2 “ Oil of wintergreen 1 part Massing fluid, enough to make a paste. Saline Tooth Paste. Artificial Carlsbad salt 1 part Powdered Castile soap 1 “ Calcium carbonate, precipitated ... 3 parts Massing fluid, enough to make a paste. Precipitated calcium carbonate, heavy . 350 parts Powdered orris root 150 “ Sugar of milk 100 “ Powdered Castile soap 50 “ Salol 20 “ Oil of peppermint 5 “ Oil of clove 3 “ Massing fluid, enough to make a paste. Salol Tooth Paste. HARD TOOTH PASTES OR TOOTH SOAPS. Tooth soaps are usually prepared by incorporating about 20 per cent of Castile soap in an alcoholic solution into the powder base and pressing the mass into suitable moulds; their hardness increases with age. Tooth soaps are usually dispensed in flat tin boxes, china jars, or wrapped in tin foil. Austrian Tooth Soap. Castile soap 200 parts Calcium carbonate, precipitated . . . 80 “ Carmin 2 “ Oil of peppermint 5 “ Alcohol 30 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 157 Bergmann’s Tooth Soap. Transparent glycerin soap .... 50 parts Sugar 25 “ Alcohol 20 “ Water 10 “ Oil of peppermint 1 part Magnesium carbonate ...... 50 parts Orris root 50 “ Talcum 50 “ Castile soap 50 “ Oil of wintergreen 3 “ Kobert’s Tooth Soap. Thymol Tooth Soap. Pink tooth powder body 750 parts Castile soap . 200 “ Glycerin . 50 “ Alcohol 100 “ Thymol 10 “ Cumarin \ part Menthol 10 parts Oil of clove 5 “ Dissolve the thymol, cumarin, menthol and oil of clove in the alcohol, add the glycerin and soap, and, after complete solution, incorporate the tooth powder body. Press in suitable moulds, expose to the air for twenty-four hours and paint the pieces with tincture of benzoin to give a gloss to the finished product. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. CHAPTER VII. PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOUNDS LOCAL ANESTHETIC SOLUTIONS. 1.—Fischer. Novocaine 2 parts Sodium chloride 0.92 part Thymol 0.02 “ Distilled water, enough to make . .100 parts Boil and filter. To each 16 drops of this solution add 1 drop of adrenalin chloride solution when needed. 2.—Normal. Novocaine 1.5 parts Potassium sulphate, C. P. . . . 0.4 part Sodium chloride, C. P 0.7 “ Distilled water, enough to make . . 100 parts Boil and filter. To each 16 drops of this solution add 1 drop of adrenalin chloride solution when needed. 3.—Schleich (Strong). Cocaine hydrochloride 0.2 part Sodium chloride 0.2 “ Morphine hydrochloride . . . . 0.02 “ Distilled water, enough to make . . 100 parts 4.—Schleich (Medium). Cocaine hydrochloride 0.1 part Sodium chloride 0.2 “ Morphine hydrochloride . . . . 0.02 “ Distilled water 100 parts N. B.—Parts as used in this Denial Formulary mean quantities by \veight. 158 DENTAL FORMULARY 159 5.—Schleich (Weak). Cocaine hydrochloride 0.01 part Sodium chloride 0.2 “ Morphine hydrochloride .... 0.005 “ Distilled water 100 parts 6. Cocaine hydrochloride 5 parts Sodium chloride 4 “ Sterile water 480 “ To each 16 drops of this solution add 1 drop of adrenalin chloride solution, when used. 7.—Peeso. Phenol, liquid 10 parts Cocaine hydrochloride 10 “ Atropine sulphate, 2 per cent solution 10 “ Nitroglycerin, 1 per cent solution. . 10 “ Adrenalin chloride solution . . . 10 “ Distilled water, enough to make . . 1000 “ 8.—Wyckoff. Cocaine hydrochloride 4 parts Solution trinitrin (1 per cent) . . 10 “ Spirit thymol comp 120 “ Distilled water, enough to make . . 480 “ P. S'.—Spirit thymol comp, is composed of benzo-borie acid, thymol, eucalyptol, oil of wintergreen, oil of pepper- mint, with extract of witch-hazel, alcohol, and distilled water. TROPACOCAINE ANESTHETIC SOLUTION. Tropacocaine hydrochloride ... 20 parts Sodium chloride 5 “ Distilled water 480 “ Boil and filter. Do not add adrenalin chloride to a tropacocaine solution. N. 13.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 160 DENTAL FORMULARY MODIFIED RINGER SOLUTION. Sodium chloride 0.5 part Calcium chloride 0.04 “ Potassium chloride 0.02“ Distilled water 100 parts Boil and filter. Fischer. PHYSIOLOGICAL SALINE SOLUTION. Tablet sodium chloride (16f- grs.). . 1 tablet Distilled water 4 fl. ounces Boil and filter. QUANTITIES OF ADRENALIN SOLUTION TO BE ADDED TO A ll/2 TO 2 PER CENT NOVOCAINE SOLUTION. Add 1 drop of adrenalin solution to 1 cc of the novocaine solution. Add 2 drops of adrenalin solution to 3 cc of the novocaine solution. Add 3 drops of adrenalin solution to 5 cc of the novocaine solution. Add 4 drops of adrenalin solution to 8 cc of the novocaine solution. Add 5 drops of adrenalin solution to 10 or more cc of the novocaine solution. NOVOCAINE COMPOUND TABLETS. Novocaine | grain Suprarenin hydrochloride 1200 “ One tablet dissolved in 16 drops of sterile physiological saline solution by boiling makes a 2 per cent solution of novocaine ready for immediate use. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by yveight. DENTAL FORMULARY 161 HEMOSTATIC LOCAL ANESTHETIC SOLUTION. Gelatin 2 parts Sodium chloride 0.7 part Phenol crystals 0.1 “ Eucaine B 0.7 “ Cocaine hydrochloride 0.3 “ Distilled water, enough to make . .100 parts Le Grand. TO RELIEVE PAIN AFTER EXTRACTION 1. Menthol 2 parts Phenol, liquid 2 “ Tincture of iodine 2 “ Ether 30 “ Chloroform 30 “ Apply on cotton to the painful alveolar socket. 2. Orthoform powder 1 part Roll absorbent cotton into a cone, dip in carbolated water, and cover with orthoform powder; insert the cone into the painful alveolar socket. LOCAL ANESTHETIC FOR SCALING OF THE TEETH. 1. Phenol, liquid 10 parts Cocaine hydrochloride 10 “ Menthol 25 “ White vaseline 480 “ Before scaling the teeth, rub the paste into the spaces between the teeth and on the gum. 2. Cocaine hydrochloride 20 parts Oil of clove 8 “ Oil of cassia 8 “ Menthol 8 “ Chloroform 480 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 162 DENTAL FORMULARY Before removing deposits from roots, saturate a pellet of cotton with the solution, crowd gently into pockets, and allow to remain for a few moments. EUROFORM PASTE. Buckley. Orthoform 60 parts Europhen 90 “ Petronol 135 “ Petrolatum 125 “ LOCAL ANESTHETIC COMPOUNDS FOR EXPOSED DENTAL PULPS. 1.—Gertzen. Sodium bicarbonate 10 parts Phenol, liquid, enough to make a creamy paste. 2.—Pincemaille. Cocaine hydrochloride 1 part Chloroform 5 parts Phenosalyl 25 “ Oil of lavender 10 “ Oil of clove 20 “ Oil of cinnamon 25 “ 3. Chloretone 150 parts Oil of clove 450 “ COMPOUNDS FOR DEVITALIZING THE DENTAL PULP. Arsenical Pastes. 1. Arsenic trioxide 20 parts Cocaine hydrochloride 10 “ Glycerin, enough to make a paste. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 163 2. Arsenic trioxide 1 part Orthoform ] “ Lanolin, enough to make a paste. 3. Arsenic trioxide 20 parts Cocaine hydrochloride 20 “ Menthol 5 “ Glycerin, enough to make a paste. 4. Arsenic trioxide 20 parts Thymol 20 “ Oil of clove, enough to make a paste. 5. Arsenic trioxide 90 parts Cocaine hydrochloride 40 “ Phenol crystals 10 “ Lanolin, enough to make a paste. 6. Arsenic trioxide 5 parts Tannic acid 2 “ Morphine acetate 10 “ Oil of clove, enough to make a paste. 7. Crude cobalt 80 parts Cocaine hydrochloride 20 “ Phenol, liquid, enough to make a paste. 8.—Arsenical Fiber. Arsenic trioxide 5 parts Tannic acid 2 “ Morphine acetate 10 “ Phenol, liquid, enough to make a thin paste. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 164 DENTAL FORMULARY Mix with sufficient fine cross-cut absorbent cotton fibers until the paste is completely absorbed; dry, and keep in a well-covered glass jar. Arsenic trioxide 10 parts Cocaine hydrochloride 10 “ Oil of clove, enough to make a soft paste. Cut small squares (1 to 1| millimeters) of hard white blotting paper, saturate with the paste, let dry, and then put into a glass-stoppered bottle. 9.—Arsenical Disks. DENTAL PULP DIGESTANT. Harlan. Papain 1 part Glycerin 1 “ Solution hydrochloric acid (1:100) . 1 “ Make a paste, apply to the dead pulp, and seal into the cavity for two weeks, at the end of which time the pulp will be digested. The pulp must be first destroyed by arsenic left in the tooth for two or three days. Remove the arsenic, cut away the bulbous portion of the pulp, and introduce the paste as above. The pulp is reduced to a jelly-like mass, and is now easily removed. STYPTICS. Styptic Cotton. 1. Solution of iron chloride 80 parts Glycerin 16 “ Water 225 “ Purified cotton 100 “ Mix the solution of ferric chloride, glycerin and water, immerse the purified cotton in this solution, and allow it to remain one hour. Then remove it, press it and spread it out in thin layers, in a warm place protected from dust and light. When dry transfer it to well-closed glass containers. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 165 2. Solution of iron chloride 60 parts Alcohol 60 “ Mix and saturate Absorbent cotton 40 parts Dry in a dark closet and preserve in dark colored glass jars. Styptic Mixture. Phenol-sulphonic acid 12 parts Alcohol 4 “ Benzoic acid 1 part Tannic acid 1 “ Glycerin 12 parts Rose water 56 “ For external use. Tannic acid 20 parts Flexible collodion . . . . , . . 80 “ Styptic Collodion. BONE CAVITY PASTES. 1.—Bone Plombe; Mosetig-Mayrhofer. Iodoform 10 parts Oil of sesame 15 “ Spermaceti 30 “ Melt the spermaceti and the oil of sesame in a porcelain capsule over a low flame, and when the mixture starts to congeal, stir in the iodoform. 2.—Bismuth Paste; Beck. (a) Soft Paste. Bismuth subnitrate 33 parts Vaseline (yellow or white) . . . . 67 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 166 DENTAL FORMULARY (b) Hard Paste. Bismuth subnitrate 30 parts Vaseline 60 “ Paraffin (melting point 120° F.) ... 5 “ White wax 5 “ Place the vaseline, paraffin and white wax in an enamelled vessel, bring to a boil, and add the bismuth under constant stirring until the paste becomes solid. 3.—Horsley Bone Putty. Phenol crystals 1 part Olive oil 2 parts Beeswax 7 “ BISMUTH PASTE. Bismuth subnitrate 1 part Iodoform 2 parts Paraffin oil (Nujol) enough to make a thick paste. Morison. BLACK SILVER NITRATE OINTMENT. Williger. Silver nitrate 1 part Balsam of Peru 10 parts Vaseline 90 “ RESORCIN PASTE. Resorcin 10 parts Zinc oxide 25 “ Cornstarch 25 “ Liquid paraffin 40 “ Lassar. ZINC PASTE. Salicylic acid 2 parts Zinc oxide 25 “ Cornstarch 25 “ Vaseline 50 “ Lassar. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 167 PLASTIC INJECTION FOR PYORRHEA POCKETS. Menthol 3 parts Hydronaphthol 15 “ White wax 240 “ Vaseline 480 “ 1.—Rhein. Gum lac, purified 135 parts Gum benzoin, purified 5 “ Phenol crystals 50 “ Oil of cinnamon 3 “ Saccharin 3 “ Alcohol, enough to make 500 “ After the removal of all deposits and the application of a stimulating escharotic, covering with this soothing application will keep the pockets sealed for many hours, and will be found beneficial from its therapeutic properties. SEAL FOR PYORRHEA POCKETS. 2.—Steresol. Gum shellac 270 parts Gum benzoin 10 “ Balsam of Tolu 10 “ Phenol crystals 100 “ Oil of cinnamon 6 “ Saccharin 6 “ Alcohol, enough to make .... 1000 “ 3.—Mastisol. Gum mastic 20 parts Chloroform 50 “ Linseed oil 1 part 4.—Whitehead. Balsam of Tolu 1 part Styrax 3 parts Gum benzoin 4 “ Ether 40 “ Iodoform 4 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 168 DENTAL FORMULARY SURGICAL DUSTING POWDERS 1. Bismuth subgallate 20 parts Talc 70 “ Cornstarch 10 “ 2. Salicylic acid . 1 part Boric acid 24 parts Talc 225 “ 3. Borax powder 2 parts Zinc peroxide 3 “ Boric acid 5 “ 4. Alum 1 part Bismuth subgallate 2 parts Zinc phenol-sulphonate ..... 2 “ Sodium perborate 5 “ Zinc oxide 40 “ Boric acid 50 “ 5. Salicylic acid . 7\ parts Phenol crystals H “ Eucalyptol If “ Menthol 1| “ Thymol 1§ “ Zinc sulphate 2 “ Boric acid, impalpable powder . . .18 “ 1.—Iodo-glycerol; Talbot’s. Zinc iodide 15 parts Distilled water 10 “ Iodine 25 “ Glycerin 50 “ COUNTER-IRRITANTS. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 169 Dissolve the zinc iodide in the distilled water, add the iodine, stir with a glass rod until dissolved, and, lastly, add the glycerin. 2.—Compound Iodine Solution; Harlan’s Iodine crystals 24 parts Potassium iodide 24 “ Tincture of aconite root, Fleming’s . . 12 “ Alcohol 48 “ Chloroform 48 “ 3.—Compound Iodine Solution; Younger’s. Solution 1. Zinc sulphate 5 parts Distilled water 5 “ Solution 2. Potassium iodide 2 parts Iodine crystals 2 “ Distilled water 8 “ Mix equal parts of solution 1 and 2, and let stand for two weeks until the freshly formed potassium sulphate is crystal- lized out. Decant the supernatant solution of zinc iodide. 4.—Pyorrhea Astringent; Buckley. Potassium iodide 60 parts Iodine crystals 80 “ Zinc phenosulphonate 60 “ Water 190 “ Glycerin 100 “ 5.—Aromatic Tincture of Iodine and Aconite; Witzel. Eugenol 3 parts Eucaine 5 “ Tincture of aconite 32 “ Tincture of iodine 65 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 170 DENTAL FORMULARY Stronger Tincture of Aconite. (For external use only). Fluid extract aconite root 2 parts Alcohol 2 “ Iodine Paint; Carson. Iodine crystals 1 part Alcohol 8 parts Iodine crystals 35 parts Potassium iodide 70 “ Water 150 “ Iodine Caustic; Churchill. Stable Tincture of Iodine. Iodine crystals 1 part Alcohol 12 parts Sodium borate 2 “ Decolorized Tincture of Iodine. Iodine crystals 20 parts Sodium thiosulphate 20 “ Distilled water 20 “ Put the ingredients in a bottle and place the bottle in a vessel surrounded by cold water. Shake occasionally until solution is completed. Add in small portions: Ammonia water 32 parts Alcohol 150 “ Let stand for eight days and filter. Iodine crystals 5 parts Potassium iodide 1| “ Zinc iodide . 1| “ Distilled water 25 “ Glycerin 25 “ Skinner’s Disclosing Solution. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 171 Modified Disclosing Solution. Potassium iodide 12 parts Iodine crystals 12 “ Distilled water 100 “ Glycerin 100 “ 1. Menthol 10 parts Iodine crystals 10 “ Chloroform 75 “ Tincture of aconite, U. S. P 375 “ Refrigerant Counter-irritant; Buckley. 2. Chloroform 3 parts Tincture of aconite 5 “ Tincture of iodine 10 “ Chloroform Liniment. Gum camphor 6 parts Ether 12 “ Alcohol 48 “ Chloroform 100 “ For external use only. Dental Liniment; Buckley. Menthol 20 parts Chloroform 75 “ Tincture of aconite, U. S. P., enough to make 480 “ For external use only. Dental Liniment; Hoff. Menthol 4 parts Spirit of camphor 4 “ Chloroform 8 “ Ether 8 “ Spirit of rosemary 8 “ Ammonia water 20 “ Tincture of capsicum 20 “ For external use only. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 172 DENTAL FORMULARY Caoutchouc 10 parts Paraffin 1 part Heat carefully until just liquefied, and add under constant stirring. Rosin 10 parts Orris root, powdered 4 “ Capsicum, powdered 4 “ Spread thinly on linen and after trying, cut in small pieces. Dry the gum thoroughly before applying. Capsicum Plaster. Powdered capsicum 2 parts Powdered ginger 2 “ Fill small muslin bags with the mixture and cover one side with rubber dam. The muslin side of the bag is placed against the gum. Capsicum Bags. Menthol 18 parts Methyl salicylate 20 “ Lanolin 55 “ Lard 8 “ Balsam Analgesique; Bengue. ANTISEPTIC COMPOUNDS. Iodine Caustic. Iodine crystals 1 part Creosote 3 parts Phenol Compound; Buckley. Menthol 1 part Thymol 2 parts Liquid phenol 9 “ 1. Phenol crystals 3 parts Camphor 6 “ Alcohol 1 part Camphorated Phenol. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 173 2. Phenol crystals 2 parts Camphor 4 “ Liquid petrolatum 4 “ Iodine crystals 2 parts Phenol, liquid 6 “ Glycerin 2 “ Iodized Phenol. Phenosalyl. Menthol 1 part Eucalyptol 5 parts Salicylic acid 10 “ Lactic acid . 20 “ Phenol crystals 90 “ Phenol crystals 7 parts Sodium hydroxide solution (5 per cent) . 10 “ Water 83 “ Dissolve the sodium hydrate in the water, add the phenol and warm gently. Solution of Sodium Phenolate. Compound Solution of Cresol. Soft soap (U. S. P.) 350 parts Distilled water 150 “ Place on a water-bath and stir until homogeneous and add Cresol (U. S. P.) 500 parts Stir until liquefied. Saponated Tincture of Cresol. Cresol 350 parts Soft soap 450 “ Alcohol, enough to make .... 1000 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 174 DENTAL FORMULARY Eucalyptol Compound. 1. Camphor 1 part Phenol 1 “ Oil of eucalyptus, enough to make . . 10 parts 2.—Buckley. Menthol 64 parts Thymol 96 “ Eucalyptol, enough to make . . . 2000 “ Phenol crystals 2 parts Thymol 2 “ Place the thymol in a dry bottle, melt the phenol and pour it over the thymol. The resultant solution will remain liquid. Thymophene. Thymocamphene. Phenol crystals 2 parts Thymol 1 part Camphor 1 “ Place the thymol and the camphor in a dry bottle, melt the phenol and pour it over the mixture. The resultant solution will remain liquid. Geranium-Formol. Formaldehyde solution 40 parts Oil of geranium 20 “ Alcohol 40 “ Formocresol; Buckley. Tricresol 2 parts Formaldehyde solution 2 “ 1-2-3 Mixture; Black. Oil of cassia 1 part Phenol crystals 2 parts Oil of wintergreen ....... 3 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 175 Dichloramine-T 5 parts Chlorcosane 100 “ Dichloramine-T Solution; 5 Per Cent. Place the dichloramine-T in a clean and dry test-tube; add a few drops of chloroform, shake, and now add the chlorcosane; plug with cotton and place the tube upright in a sand-bath, and apply heat—within a quarter of an hour complete solution usually results—the heat of the sand-bath must never be above 200 ° F. When cool, transfer to a brown office preparation bottle with glass cover. (For the treatment of infected root canals.) Solution of chlorinated soda .... 9 parts Solution of sodium hydroxide ... 1 part Solution of Chlorinated Soda Compound; Lepkowsky. (For the treatment of infected root canals.) Chloral hydrate ....... 50 parts Water 25 “ Dilute hydrochloric acid 25 “ Compound Chloral Solution; Baumgartner. Mono-chlor-phenol Compound. (For the treatment of infected root canals.) Thymol 1 part Mono-chlor-phenol 3 parts Potassium hydroxide 1 part Melt the thymol and the mono-chlor-phenol in a test- tube and add to it the potassium hydroxide. Carefully heat over a low Bunsen flame until a perfect solution is obtained. Immediately transfer to small, perfectly dry bottles and protect with a paraffined stopper. Phenol-sulphonic Acid. Phenol, liquid 45 parts Sulphuric acid, strong 40 “ Heat to about 150° F. for several days and add Distilled water, enough to make . . . 100 parts N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 176 DENTAL FORMULARY Mercuric Bichloride Solution Bernays’ antiseptic tablet 1 tablet Solution of hydrogen dioxide . . . . 4 fl. ounces Sodium borate 240 parts Sodium bicarbonate 240 “ Phenol, liquid 48 “ Glycerin 480 “ Water, enough to make .... 15,000 “ Antiseptic Solution; Dobell. Antiseptic Solution; Thiersch. Salicylic acid 4 parts Boric acid 12 “ Water 1000 “ EXTEMPORANEOUS SOLUTIONS OF HYDROGEN PEROXIDE. Extemporaneous solutions of hydrogen peroxide may be prepared as follows: 2 Per Cent (by volume) Solution. Sodium perborate 25 parts Boiling distilled water, enough to make 1000 “ Filter, if necessary. 5 Per Cent (by volume) Solution. Sodium perborate 65 parts Tartaric, or citric acid, powdered. . 21 “ Boiling distilled water, enough to • make 1000 “ Filter, if necessary. 10-12 Per Cent (by volume) Solution. Sodium perborate 170 parts Tartaric, or citric acid, powdered. 60 “ Boiling distilled water, enough to make 1000 “ Filter, if necessary. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 177 18-20 Per Cent (by volume) Solution. Sodium perborate 210 parts Tartaric, or citric acid, powdered. . 105 “ Boiling distilled water, enough to make 1000 “ Filter, if necessary. These aqueous solutions of sodium perborate produce a hydrogen peroxide solution which always reacts alkaline. To Preserve Hydrogen Peroxide Solution. Solution hydrogen peroxide . . . 1000 parts Acetanilid 1 part Keep in well-stoppered bottles. Black Zinc Chloride Solution; Witzel. Zinc chloride 10 parts Phenol, liquid 5 “ Alcohol 5 “ Chloroform 1 part Oil of peppermint 1 “ Oil of clove 1 “ Iodoform 96 parts Cumarin 4 “ Aromatized Iodoform. Iodoform Emulsion. Iodoform 5 parts Mucilage of gum arabic “ Glycerin 15 “ Water, enough to make 60 (( Iodoform Wax. Iodoform 1 part Hard paraffin I (( N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 178 DENTAL FORMULARY Liquid Iodoform. Potassium hydroxide 35 parts Water 25 “ Oleic acid 50 “ Alcohol, 95 per cent 30 “ Iodine 30 “ Dissolve the potassium hydroxide in the water, then pour the oleic acid and alcohol into this solution of potassa. With continued stirring add the iodine, and, finally, a few drops of potassium hydroxide solution to discharge the reddish color of the liquid. Let the mixture stand for several days in a dark place, when it will separate into well- defined layers. The upper aqueous layer is decanted. The lower layer is a syrupy liquid, having a pronounced yellow color and a strong odor of iodoform. Aristol 1 part Oil of sesame 9 parts Mix and let stand undisturbed for one-half hour. Then repeatedly shake during the next ten hours, set aside for three or four days and pour off the clear solution. Aristol Oil Solution. Neutral Sodium Hypochlorite Solution. Sodium carbonate, crystals .... 40 parts Bleaching powder (24 to 28 per cent chlorine) 20 “ Boric acid 4 “ Water 1000 “ Dakin. Add the sodium carbonate and the bleaching powder to the water; shake well and let stand for one hour. Filter through a cotton plug and add the boric acid. The solution should not be kept longer than one week. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 179 Lead acetate 150 parts Aluminum sulphate 85 “ Water, enough to make .... 1000 “ Dissolve each salt in 500 parts of water and mix the cold solutions by pouring the lead acetate solution in a thin stream, with constant stirring, into the aluminum sulphate solution. Shake occasionally and after twenty-four hours pour off the clear liquid. Burrow’s Solution. Solution of Aluminum Acetate Aluminum sulphate 300 parts Acetic acid 300 “ Precipitated calcium carbonate . . . 138 “ Water, enough to make .... 1000 “ Dissolve the aluminum sulphate in about 900 parts of water, filter the solution and gradually add the calcium carbonate with constant stirring. Slowly add the acetic acid and set the mixture aside for several days, shaking occasionally. Pour off the clear solution only and add enough water to make 1000 parts of the finished product. ROOT CANAL FILLING MATERIALS 1.—Scheurer. Eugenol 1 part Formaldehyde solution 1 “ Cresol 3 parts Zinc sulphate 2 “ Zinc oxide 8 “ Glycerin, enough to make a stiff paste. 2. Zinc sulphate 75 parts Zinc oxide 225 “ Oil of peppermint 1 part Lysoform, enough to make a paste. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 180 DENTAL FORMULARY 3. Iodoform 90 parts Zinc oxide 45 “ Charcoal, powdered 45 “ Oil of clove, enough to make a paste. 4. Cresol 60 parts Formaldehyde solution 15 “ Glycerin 10 “ Zinc oxide 10 “ Boric acid, enough to make a stiff paste. 5. Gutta-percha base plate 60 parts Rosin 60 “ Chloroform 240 “ 6.—Eucapercha Compound; Buckley. Dental base plate gutta-percha ... 5 parts Eucalyptol compound (see page 174) . 5 “ Make solution by aid of heat, avoiding the loss of eucalyptol. 7.—Eucalyptol Gutta-percha. Thymol 1 part Gutta-percha base plate 99 parts Eucalyptol 100 “ Melt together in a porcelain capsule by carefully heating on a water-bath. 8. Powder. Thymol 5 parts Dried alum 10 “ Kaolin 25 “ Liquid. Formaldehyde solution 1 part Cresol 2 parts Alcohol 3 “ Mix to a stiff paste before using. DENTAL FORMULARY 181 9. Powder. Paraform 4 parts Iodoform 1 part Thymol 1 “ Zinc oxide 14 parts Tannic acid 20 “ Liquid Phenol 5 parts Oil of clove 5 “ Oil of cinnamon 5 “ Glycerin 5 “ 10. Powder. Zinc oxide 8 parts Zinc sulphate, exsiccated 2 “ Liquid Cresol 3 parts Formaldehyde solution 1 part Eugenol . 1 “ 11. Powder. Hydronaphthol 1 part Zinc oxide 2 parts Liquid. Hydronaphthol 2 parts Alcohol 36 “ Oil of clove 12 “ 12. Powder. Zinc oxide 20 parts Paraform 5 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 182 DENTAL FORMULARY Liquid. Zinc sulphate 6 parts Water 20 “ Cresol 1 part 13.—Wakefield. Powder. Alum 2 parts Thymol 4 “ Zinc oxide 240 “ Liquid. Formaldehyde solution 2 parts Alcohol 4 “ Creosote 90 “ 14. Powder. Xeroform 5 parts Thymol 1 part Dried alum 3 parts Zinc oxjde 5 “ Liquid. Eugenol 5 parts Cresol 5 “ 15.—Formagen; Abraham. Powder. Fresh slaked lime 10 parts Zinc oxide 20 “ Quartz 20 “ Kaolin 50 “ Liquid. Formaldehyde solution 1 part Oil of clove 2 parts Creosote 3 “ Alcohol 4 “ Mix to a stiff paste before using. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 183 16.—Eucaine-Formol-Phenol Paste; Witzel. Powder. Eucaine 3 parts Phenol, liquid 5 “ Paraform 10 “ Zinc oxide 10 “ Liquid. Eugenol 10 parts Formaldehyde solution 40 “ Glycerin 50 “ Mix to a stiff paste before using. 17.—Oxpara; Jones. Powder. Alum 3 parts Tannic acid 5 “ Thymol 5 “ Zinc oxide 120 “ Liquid. Glycerin . 5 parts Formaldehyde solution 200 “ Tricresol 200 “ 18.—Dodel. Paraffin 48 parts Salol 12 “ Melt the paraffin on a water-bath, remove from the fire and add the salol with constant stirring. 19. Hard paraffin 48 parts Aristol 6 “ Prepare as above. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 184 DENTAL FORMULARY 20. Thymol 1 part Bismuth trioxide 34 parts Hard paraffin (130° F.) 65 “ Prepare as above 21.—Dunning. Paraform 2 parts Bismuth subnitrate 8 “ Paraffin 8 “ Prepare as above. 22.—Rosin Solution for Gutta-percha Root Canal Filling; Callahan. Rosin 1 part Chloroform 5 parts 23.—Gutta-percha-paraffin Oil Paste for Root Canal Filling. Pink base plate gutta-percha . . . .10 parts Paraffin oil (Nujol) 10 “ Heat in a sand-bath until completely dissolved. 24.—Disappearing Root Filling; Ferris. Isinglass 60 parts Tannic acid 1| “ Tricresol 4 “ Distilled water 90 “ When heated to a temperature of 100° F. in an ordinary gluepot or water-bath, it becomes syrupy and can be readily introduced into the root canals writh a piece of sterile catgut. If the canal be large the catgut may be left in the canal. A ball of stiff phosphate of zinc is then pressed into the pulp chamber, forcing the mixture through the canal and fistula. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by- weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 185 PULP MUMMIFYING PASTES 1.—Soederberg. Alum 1 part Thymol 1 “ Glycerin 1 “ Zinc oxide, enough to make a paste. 2. Cresol 10 parts Thymol 10 “ Zinc oxide, enough to make a stiff paste. 3. Cocaine hydrochloride 1 part Thymol 1 “ Formaldehyde solution 1 “ White vaseline 3 parts Zinc oxide 7 “ 4.—Gysi. Cresol 10 parts Creolin 20 “ Glycerin 4 “ Trioxy methylene (paraform) . . . . 20 “ Zinc oxide 66 “ ASTRINGENT TO BE APPLIED TO THE ANESTHETIZED DENTAL PULP. Renstrom. Alum 40 parts Glycerin 100 “ Thymol | part SOLUTION FOR RESTORING THE TRANSLUCENCY OF DENTIN. Renstrom. Chloral hydrate 20 parts Distilled water 5 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 186 DENTAL FORMULARY Apply on cotton. Place into the cavity of the pulpless tooth for about twenty seconds. PULP CAPPING MATERIALS. 1. Aristol, or europhen 1 part Calcium phosphate 10 parts Eugenol, enough to make a creamy paste. 2.—Thymolized Calcium Phosphate; Buckley. Thymol 10 parts Calcium phosphate, precipitated . . . 438 “ 3. Thymol 1 part Zinc oxide 2 parts Melt the thymol in a porcelain capsule and gradually add the zinc oxide. Spread on a glass slab and on cooling it is removed and preserved in a wTell-stoppered bottle. 4. Gum benzoin 3 parts Balsam of tolu 2 “ Eugenol 2 “ Thymol 1 part Chloroform 8 parts AGENTS FOR REDUCING HYPERSENSITIVE DENTINE. 1.—Robinson’s Remedy. Phenol crystals 2 parts Potassium hydrate 2 “ Mix by trituration with a few drops of glycerin in a warmed wedgwTood mortar until a crystalline paste is obtained. 2. Sodium carbonate crystals .... 1 part Potassium carbonate crystals .... 5 parts Triturate in a mortar until a paste is obtained. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 187 3.—Desensitizing Paste; Buckley. Neothesin 9 parts Thymol 10 “ Trioxymethylene (paraform)1 . . . 63 “ Vaseline, enough to make 180 “ A “fibrous vehicle” and an “insoluble pigment” are added which play no part in the therapeutic action of this compound. 4. Solution of formaldehyde 2 parts Thymol . . . . ' 2 “ Eugenol 2 “ Zinc oxide, enough to make a stiff paste. 5. Bencyl alcohol 50 parts Chloroform 30 “ Alcohol 20 “ 6. Silver nitrate 1 part Gutta-percha base plate 2 parts Zinc oxide 10 “ 7. Zinc chloride 2 parts Absolute alcohol, enough to make a solution. 8. Orthoform 2 parts Eugenol, enough to make a paste. Absolute Alcohol for Dehydrating Dentin. Well-burned unslaked lime .... 1 part Alcohol 5 parts 1 Formaldehyde, in any form, employed for the purpose of reducing hypersensation of dentin is a most dangerous agent, as it usually kills the dental pulp. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 188 DENTAL FORMULARY 1.—Silver Nitrate Reducing Solution; Shansay. Solution A. Saturated solution of silver nitrate . . 1 part Asbestos felt, a convenient quantity. Saturate the asbestos felt with the silver nitrate solution, dry, and keep in a dark bottle. Solution B. Saturated solution of sodium hydroxide . 50 parts Phenol, liquid 50 “ Formaldehyde solution 25 “ Keep in a well-stoppered bottle. Dip the prepared silver nitrate asbestos into this solution, and apply to the tooth. 2.—Howe. Solution A. Saturated solution of silver nitrate . . 1 part Strong ammonia water, enough to make a clear solution. Add the strong ammonia water little by little. As the ammonia water is added a dark precipitate of silver oxide is thrown down. This is soluble in an excess of ammonia water, therefore, continue adding the latter until the solution becomes clear. Solution B. Formaldehyde solution 1 part Distilled water 3 parts These solutions must be kept in separate dark-colored bottles, with glass stoppers, and should be kept away from the light as much as possible They work better if they are freshly prepared, but are still good after a considerable time, if kept as recommended. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 189 3.—Rickert. Silver oxide is precipitated from a silver nitrate solution by KOH or NaOH. This is carefully washed to remove all impurities and kept moist in a small amber-colored bottle. In this condition reduction is so slight that it may be kept for a long time without much change. If a small amount is insoluble in excess of ammonia there has been too much reduction and the silver oxide should be freshly prepared. This is our stock solution made from silver nitrate, because it is free from nitric acid and other impurities. Now when we desire rapid reduction, the silver oxide is added to a drop or two of ammonium hydroxide to the point of saturation. In this state the ammoniacal solution is easily reduced. There is one precaution that must be mentioned here, i. e., that after a few hours, fulminate of silver may be formed from the ammoniacal solution, which is very explosive. REMOVAL OF BROKEN INSTRUMENTS FROM ROOT CANALS. Solution A. Nitric acid 5 parts Distilled water 5 “ Solution B. Potassium iodide 2 parts Distilled water . 3 “ After complete solution add Iodine crystals 2 parts Keep in a glass-stoppered bottle and preserve in a tightly closed box in the laboratory. An attempt always should be made first to loosen the piece by some mechanical device. If this method fails, the root canal is sufficiently enlarged and a drop of 50 per cent nitric acid (solution A) is worked into the canal with a platinized gold broach. It may be followed by a second N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 190 DENTAL FORMULARY and third drop at two-minute intervals. To neutralize the acid, sodium dioxide carried on a broach wound with a few fibers of asbestos and dipped into alcohol is worked in the canal. The canal is now forcibly washed with water, care- fully dried and with an eye dropper a drop of concentrated iodine-potassium iodide solution (solution B) is transferred to the canal and worked into close contast with the piece of steel with the platinized gold broach. A few fibers of asbestos are saturated with the same solution, packed into the canal and the cavity is carefully sealed with temporary cement. The application should remain undisturbed for at least twenty-four hours. If the piece of broach is not completely destroyed the treatment may be repeated. N. B.—Parts as used in this Denial Formulary mean quantities by weight. CHAPTER VIII. AN INDEX TO ORAL DISEASES-THEIR ETIOLOGY, DIAGNOSIS AND TREATMENT. IMMEDIATE TREATMENT OF ACUTE POISONING. SALIVA - AND URINE ANALYSIS. DIAGNOSTIC HINTS. Abrasion.—The mechanical wearing away of tooth sub- stance, resulting from occlusal attrition or other mechanical causes (clay-pipe stem, glass blowing, sand blasting, etc.); usually not painful, unless the pulp is irritated. Thera- peutical applications are of no avail. Filling or capping of the teeth give best results. Abscess, Acute Alveolar. — Causes.—Gangrene of the dental pulp with subsequent infection of the pericementum. Symptoms. —Swelling, severe pain, fever. The pus burrows along the line of least resistance and after the bone and gum tissues are penetrated, a fistula results. In the lower jaw, the pus may sink into deeper structures and perforation at the chin (chin fistula), of the cheek, along the lower border of the jaw, or about the neck may result. Abscesses about the third lower molars are prone to produce severe complica- tions. Treatment.—In the early stages, drainage through the pulp canal may be possible. If fluctuation is present, a deep incision is essential or the abscess may be opened with a small tubular knife. If the tooth has to be removed, it should be done at once, although, in protracted cases, swelling may increase even after the tooth has been extracted. Hot poultices in the form of cut figs, steeped in boiling water, helps to bring the abscess to a focus. To establish free drainage is important. The fever is reduced with anti- pyretics £pd the engorgement of the system is relieved by 191 192 DENTAL FORMULARY saline laxatives. Severe pain is best combated with morphine. The septic root canals require proper treatment as outlined under Pulpitis (Gangrene). 1^—Magnesii sulphatis §j Acidi sulphur, dil fl.5ss Syr. limonis fl.5 j Aquse q.s. ad fl. 5 iv—TTL Sig.—A tablespoonful in a glassful of water every three hours. morph, sulphatis .... gr.-|to| No. III. Sig.—One pill every two hours until pain is relieved. 1^—Phenacetini 5ss M. f. plv. No. vi. Sig.—One powder every two hours. Actinomycosis.—Known in cattle as “wooden tongue” or “lumpy jaw.” A chronic, infectious disease of cattle, sometimes transmitted to men, caused by actinomyces bovis, the ray fungus, a parasitic bacterium. It may involve the jaws (especially the lower), the tongue, the neck, etc. The fungus usually enters through objects which have come in contact with diseased cattle or directly with vegetable particles upon which it grows. Carious teeth or wounds about the mouth are favorable ports of entry. Symptoms.— Hard, board-like, slow swelling of the affected parts, occasionally accompanied by severe pain in the involved region, periosteal inflammation and formation of abscesses. Diagnosis.—Only positive by means of the microscope. Treatment.— Surgical, free incision of foci. The internal administration of potassium iodide in large quantities (10 to 15 grains in milk, three times daily) is recommended. Good results are reported from the internal administration pf copper sulphate, \ to § grain, three times daily. DENTAL FORMULARY 193 Arsenical Necrosis.—Local toxic effects of arsenic in the mouth are most frequently met with as the result of faulty application of the chemical for dental purposes. Leakage of the dressing seal is responsible in most cases, and contact of the mucous membrane with instruments accidentally carrying small particles of the paste, or the unnoticed squeez- ing out of arsenic resulting from pressure applied on placing the retaining stopping, are possible factors. The fact that arsenic trioxide is odorless and tasteless increases this danger, which is usually recognized only after the mischief is done. A number of cases of severe forms of toxic periostitis, followed by necrosis of the alveolar process, and consequent loss of one or more teeth, are on record. Arsenical intoxication of the gum tissue presents in its early stages all the phenomena of true inflammation. Later the surfaces become denuded and assume a raw ham color; the veins are distended, the border of the infected area is raised and shows loss of sub- stance in the depressed center, i. e., the typical picture of an ulcer. Usually there is a pronounced metallic taste present in the mouth. Arsenic penetrates very deeply, destroying the soft and hard tissues, which finally results in necrosis and gangrene. In the early stages the affection is not pain- ful, but, as soon as the deeper structures are reached, severe pain is manifested. Treatment.—The treatment depends on the severity of the poisoning. Simple intoxication requires the immediate removal of the cause and mild antiseptic mouth w’ashes. If necrosis has set in, the affected parts must be thoroughly curetted with a large spoon excavator; if the bone has sequestrated, it must be removed. Local anesthesia is usually serviceable for such work. The denuded surface is dusted with a mixture of orthoform and corn starch, 1 to 4. If sequestration of the alveolar bone continues, the applica- tion of aromatic sulphuric or diluted sulphuric acid will be of assistance in detaching the dead bone. Rigid antisepsis is of prime importance. A bland antiseptic used warm and at frequent intervals is indicated as a mouth wash. The local application of dialyzed iron or solution of iron chloride as arsenical antidotes is indicated only if arsenic is present 194 DENTAL FORMULARY in substance on the tissues; after it is absorbed, these solutions are useless. I$—Orthoform 5j Lanolin § ss M. f. ungt. Sig.—Spread on painful area and cover with a strip of gauze. I$—Orthoform 5j Amyl gss M. f. pulv. Sig.—Dusting powder. Burns.—Burns are caused by the action of intense heat upon the tissue; in the mouth they are rarely worse than the first degree. They require little more than palliative treat- ment; i. e., ice and saturated solution of sodium bicarbonate. Accidental cauterization of the oral tissues with strong acids or alkalis may occur; the treatment should correspond to the chemical nature of the caustic. Severe pain is relieved by dusting the corroded surfaces with mixtures of orthoform and starch, equal parts. Caustics Require Silver nitrate Concentrated solution of sodium chloride. Ammonia water Lemon juice or diluted vinegar, white of eggs, demulcent drinks. Caustic potash (lye) Same treatment as for ammonia. Mineral acids Gargle with soapsuds, give chalk, raw egg and lime water. Phenol and trichloracetic acid Fifty per cent alcohol as quickly as possible, followed by rinsing the mouth with cold water and the application of a mild oint- ment. Tincture of iodine Sweetened water. Formaldehyde solution Ammonia water, well diluted. Pyrozone Alcohol, followed by water. Cyanosis.—Blue discoloration of the skin resulting from insufficient oxygenation of the blood. DENTAL FORMULARY 195 Treatment, —Remove the cause; fresh air and horizontal position of patient and rest. Cysts.—Slowly growing benign tumors containing serous, mucous, hemorrhagic or other fluids. They may be divided into follicular cysts, dermoid cysts and radicular cysts. Follicular cysts, resulting from abnormal enlargement of preexisting cavities, frequently contain remnants of the enamel organ in the form of imperfectly developed teeth (odontomes) and are then spoken of as dentigerous cysts. Dermoid cysts are formed from remnants of epithelial cells; they are only very occasionally found in the oral cavity. A radicular cyst is always the sequence of a preexisting epithelial granuloma, i. e., a chronic proliferating perice- mentitis about the apical end of a tooth. The disturbance may manifest itself in the form of a fungoid new-growth, i. e., a simple or an epithelial granuloma. The epithelial granuloma is the most frequent type. Scattered in its wall are found the rests of the paradental epithelial debris of Malassez, i. e., epithelial remnants of the embryonic dental groove or ridge. As a sequence of chronic irritation, princi- pally from toxins, the epithelial rests begin to sprout and to grow until a complete sac is formed. At this moment the radicular cyst is born, as it were. Retention cysts are formed through the enclosure of a gland duct, either by some remaining epithelial cells or through an obstruction of the duct from other sources. An important cyst of the mouth is ranula, a retention cyst of the sublingual glands. Treatment.—Dentigerous cysts are referred to the surgeon; a ranula may be destroyed by caustics or it is surgically removed. A stout silk thread is drawn through the cyst and tied over its outer wall (seton). In from ten to fifteen days the inner cyst wall may unite. Extirpation of a part of the cyst wall or of the entire gland may be necessary. Truman W. Brophy employs a metal seton made of a “small silver tube and perforating it with holes; then, bending it so as to form a ring about one-half inch in diameter. This is an open ring, one end of which is carried into the cyst and out through the mucous membrane and telescoped into the other end, 196 DENTAL FORMULARY thus uniting the ends of the two and completing the ring. The perforated ring thus introduced will admit the saliva within the cyst and allow it to escape through the tube into the mouth. The ring must be rotated daily, else the tissues may fill the openings in it, thus defeating the object of this insertion. The tissues around the ring will become smooth and a few weeks only will suffice to establish permanent openings, after which the ring may be removed and the saliva will escape through the opening so perfectly formed around the silver tube.” The operation for a radicular cyst depends primarily upon the size of the cyst. Small cysts of about the size of a cherry are treated exactly as granulomas, while larger ones require a somewhat modified procedure, i. e., they are removed by the modified Partsch operation. The basic principle of this operation involves the transformation of the existing cystic cavity into an accessory cavity of the mouth by the complete extirpation of its anterior wall. The cyst is lined with secreting epithelium, which genetically is identical with that of the oral cavity, hence the absolutely sure return of the cyst when the cavity is allowed to close. In operating upon a large cyst, the preliminary procedures are the same as those employed for the operation on granu- lomas. After lifting up the overlying soft structures the entire anterior bony wall of the cyst must be cut away. After the cyst bag is opened and its contents washed out, and the roots of the teeth projecting into it are cut off, the cavity is lightly curetted, the flap folded into it, and the entire cavity tightly packed with a strip of 5 per cent iodoform gauze. Extreme care must be observed in curetting the walls of a large cyst. The resorption of bone in the upper jaw may be so complete that the curette will readily pass through the soft tissues into the roof of the mouth, antrum, or nose, and in the lower jaw the mandibular nerve, artery, and vein may lie exposed at the bottom of the cavity. Large cysts of the mandible predispose this bone to pathologic fractures. The packing is removed after twenty-four hours, when the cavity is again lightly plugged, and the gauze tampon is changed about every fourth day until the cavity DENTAL FORMULARY 197 is completely lined with epithelium from the ingrowing mucous membrane. Dental Caries.—This is a chemico-parasitic process, con- sisting of two definite stages—decalcification of the tooth substance and the destruction of the remaining organic matrix. The second stage is not to be clearly observed in the decalcification of the enamel (Miller). As predisposing factors are to be mentioned: Poorly calcified teeth, irregu- larities of form and position, unhygienic surroundings, constitutional disturbances, the condition of foodstuffs, etc. Treatment.—As, prophylactic measures, suitable food materials rich in lime and phosphorus, vigorous exercise of the jaws, and proper hygiene of the mouth, are indicated. In the early stages of caries, the application of silver nitrate under suitable conditions will inhibit the progress of the disease. The treatment of the carious defects consists in the thorough removal of all decayed material, and in filling and restoring the normal outline of the tooth. (For mouth and tooth preparations see Chapter VI.) Dental Hemorrhage.—Results from tearing the blood- vessels of the periosteum during the extraction of teeth. Occasionally profuse hemorrhage occurs from tearing large arteries in extracting lower molars (inferior dental artery). About a dozen cases are on record where the artery bodily passed through the roots of these molars. Organic disturb- ances, i. e., hemophilia, chlorosis, anemia, leukemia, etc., are often responsible for persistent dental hemorrhage. Vicarious hemorrhage of the gum tissue may occur during menstruation. Treatment.—Normal dental hemorrhage resulting from the extraction of teeth, etc., requires little attention; in severe cases plugging and splinting of the sockets is usually always successful. Introduce softened modeling compound into the mouth, let the patient close the jaws, press about the teeth, remove, chill and trim. Wash away the blood clot, and tightly pack into each single alveolus a narrow strip of iodoform gauze, having the tip of the gauze moistened with 198 DENTAL FORMULARY thromboplastin solution. Have the plug slightly extending above the border of the alveolus. Replace the prepared splint and apply a Barton bandage (figure-of-8). The plug and the splint may remain several days. Internal adminis- tration of drugs for this purpose are of no avail; to reduce blood-pressure give 5 grains of phenacetin. Let patient assume a sitting posture; keep him from all excitement and order liquid diet. No alcoholics should be allowed. If hemorrhage occurs from torn gum tissue, apply gauze strips dipped in the thromboplastin solution. Severe interpapillary hemorrhage is checked by applying a 25 per cent solution of chromic acid. Occasionally parenchymatous hemorrhage occurs in patients wearing full dentures. It is usually due to ill-fitting plates, uncleanliness, etc. Cleanse the plate thoroughly, cover with thin gauze strips dipped in throm- boplastin solution and reinsert the plate. Remedy the defects of the denture. Hemophiliacs are preferably removed to a hospital and placed under the care of a physician. Dental Pharyngitis ( Dental Angina).—Catarrhal inflamma- tion of the upper pharynx from dental causes; usually result- ing from difficult eruption of a third lower molar or as a sequence of stomatitis and other mouth infections. Symptoms.—Difficult and painful deglutition, a typical inflamed ring about the pillars of the fauces and infection of the tonsils. Treatment.—Saline purge, prohibition of tobacco, alcohol and highly spiced food. Gargling with antiseptic and astringent solutions, and, in severe cases, silver nitrate or iodine application. Tinct. ferri chloridi fl.5iij Glycerini fl.gj Aquse q.s. ad fl.giij—HI Sig.—A tablespoonful in half a glass of warm water as a gargle. I$—Iodini gr. v Pot. iodid 5 ss Glycerini fl.Sss—Tit Sig.—Apply on a swab. DENTAL FORMULARY 199 Dentition.—This is a physiological process which, normally, is not accompanied by any disturbances. The so-called diseases of dentition, i. e., diarrhea, dysentery, fevers, etc., result, in the majority of instances, from improper feeding during the period of most active development of the child. If the teeth erupt too early, extraction is not indicated unless some faults in their development make it necessary. The removal of such teeth is usually accompanied by severe hemorrhage. The eruption of the teeth may, by reflex irritation from pressure upon the overlying gum tissue, cause discomfort to the child. It is readily relieved by proper scarification. A deep cut is made over the advancing tooth, i. e., crucial incisions over the molars, and singly over the cutting edges of the anterior teeth. General disturbances are to be treated according to symptoms. The eruption of the third molars frequently causes severe disturbances on account of lack of space and malposition. These disturbances are traumatic in their nature, and should be treated accordingly. If the tooth is to be removed, general anesthesia is usually indicated; the accompanying trismus and infiltration of the tissues prevent the successful injection of a local anesthetic. Lecluse’s elevator is of excellent service if the tooth cannot be reached with the ordinary or a Physick’s forceps. The gum tissue overlying the tooth is to be divided before the extraction is made. If the socket is infected and painful, packing with iodoform gauze dipped in orthoform and strict antisepsis are important. Dry, hot applications applied externally are of service. The swelling about the angle of the jaw and the lymph glands is benefited by the application of an iodine solution or ointment, by passive massage, and by dry heat. Sore throat (see Dental Pharyngitis) very frequently accompanies the eruption of this tooth. In the early stages, small chips of ice held in the mouth, together with the removal of the overlying gum tissue, and antiseptic washes will often result in a speedy recovery. Iodipini, 10 per cent. fl.§ j Sig.—Paint upon the inflamed surface and cover with a strip of gauze. 200 DENTAL FORMULARY Dislocation of the Mandible.—It may be unilateral or bilateral; more prone in women than in men. One or both condyles have slipped out of the glenoid cavity and rest upon the interarticular fibrocartilage directly over the articular eminences. The jawr is usually rigid, the mouth wide open; chewing and speaking is much impaired. Treatment.— Place patient in a low chair, the operator wraps his thumbs with cotton or with napkins to protect them against injury. He stands in front of the patient, having the head fixed by an assistant or on the head rest of the chair and then places the thumbs firmly upon the jaw in the region of the lower molars while the other fingers rest on the body of the jaw near the symphysis. Pressure is now made downward with the thumbs and forward and upward with the fingers, and when the condyles have passed the articulating eminence they will snap back into the glenoid fossae. A metal rod (excavator) covered with cotton and placed crossw ise over the teeth in the premolar region acts as a fulcrum wTen backward and upward pressure is brought upon the symphysis and it may be used for this purpose. The patient should be instructed to be careful in not opening the mouth too far. A chin bandage may be wTorn for a few days. Dry Mouth (Xerostomia).—Pathological dryness of the mucous membrane of the mouth resulting from impaired secretions of saliva. Causes.—Severe psychical and physical disturbances, atrophy of the salivary glands, nervous diseases, diseases of the digestive tract and other unknown factors. The diseased salivary glands (mumps) may secrete a much lessened amount of saliva at times. Symptoms.—Painful deglutition and speech. The mucosa is dry, shiny, and stretched; the tongue is bright red, cracked and dry. No inflammation. The disease may last for years and occurs principally in elderly women. Treatment. —Pilocarpine hydrochloride internally; if result- ing from nervous disease, electricity is indicated. While recovery is very problematical, the patient may be made comfortable by continuous use of the above drug. DENTAL FORMULARY 201 T$—Pilocarpin. hydrochlorid. . .. gr. v Aquae distillate fl.Sss—TTf Sig.—Five drops three times daily in water. Slowly increase the dose by 1 drop until from 8 to 10 drops per dose are taken. Dyspnea.—Labored breathing; suspended animation from a deficiency of oxygen in the blood. May also result from inhaling an anesthetic or poisonous gases; i. e., coal gas, water gas, etc. Treatment.—Fresh air, horizontal position of patient, dashing of cold water in the face and artificial respiration. Emphysema of the Cheek.—The inflation of the interstices of the connective tissues with air. It may result from air penetrating into the tissues after tooth extraction or from careless injection of solution of hydrogen peroxide into a closed cavity, setting free nascent oxygen. No treatment necessary, as swelling will subside spon- taneously. A tight bandage over the affected region is often of some benefit. Empyema of the Maxillary Sinus (Antrum of Highmore).— An accumulation of fluid in the maxillary sinus; either acute or chronic. It may be caused by infectious diseases (influ- enza), diseases of the teeth, traumatism, etc. Tumors, polypi and other foreign bodies are often responsible. Symptoms.— More or less dull pain in the affected side of the face; foul-smelling discharge from the nostril, especially when the head is bent forward and turned to the sound side and in blowing the nose. The disease may be unilateral or bilateral. Diagnosis.—Discharge from the nose and the general symptoms are helpful in making a diagnosis. The dull shadow picture of the diseased sinus as revealed by the rays of the electric mouth lamp is helpful but not reliable. A trial puncture and washing of the sinus with a saline solution is the most positive means of diagnosis. 202 DENTAL FORMULARY Treatment.—If a diseased tooth is the causative factor, the tooth is to be removed and the sinus opened through its socket, according to Cowper, provided the opening affords ready access to the sinus; or an opening is made between the apices of the roots of the first molar and the second premolar, according to Drake. The opening of the sinus through the canine fossa, according to Desault, offers the best results, as it allows a clear inspection of the entire cavity. The gum tissue between the canine and the first molar is locally anesthetized, a straight cut is made reaching from the canine eminence to the second premolar, and the tissues, including the periosteum, are lifted up. With a fine spear drill the facial wall is perforated and with suitable fissure burs sufficiently enlarged to allow the little finger to enter. Foreign bodies or granulations are removed with the curette. The sinus is washed with at least a quart of warm saline or Thiersch’s solution and tightly packed for twenty-four hours with iodoform gauze. The further treatment consists in irrigating the sinus with mild antiseptic solutions. Solid plugs made of gutta-percha, vulcanized rubber, or metal should never be used. In extreme cases, a large part of the facial wall is removed, and a “window,” according to Denker, is made leading into the middle meatus of the nose; the whole sinus is thoroughly curetted and cauterized. Chronic cases may require treatment for some time. I^—Pot. permanganat 5ss Sodii chloridi . . . . . § ss Aquae fl.5L—Tff Sig.—Use as a douche. 1^—Acidi salicylici 5j Acidi borici 5 iv Aquae fl.gxxxij—Til Sig.—Thiersch’s solution. Exostosis.—See Hyperplasia of Cementum. Fracture of the Alveolus.—Resulting from difficult or clumsy extraction or other traumatic causes. DENTAL FORMULARY 203 Treatment. —Remove loose pieces and smooth sharp edges of the bone with suitable large fissure burs. If the teeth are loose, they are tied with silk ligatures. If the alveolar process is broken, replace it, if possible, and if the teeth are present, ligate them to sound neighbors. Paint with Talbot’s iodine solution and advise ice to be held in the mouth to reduce inflammation. Astringent mouth washes are indicated. I$— Acidi benzoic 3j Tinct. kramerise fl.gss Aquse hamamelidis . . q.s. ad fl.§iv—111 Sig.—Tablespoonful in a glassful of warm salt water as a gargle. Fractures of the Jaws.— Upper Jaw.—It is comparatively rare; it is frequently accompanied by crushing of the maxillary sinus (antrum of Highmore) and fracture of the other bones of the face and skull. Treatment— Replace fragments by manipulating through the mouth and nose. In vertical fractures, an interdental splint is indicated. (Gunning’s or Ivingley’s splint with the necessary modification.) Feed the patient on a liquid diet. Union takes place in from three to five weeks. Lower Jaw.— The fractures are recognized by mobility, crepitus, and dropping of the mouth on the side of the face. Treatment.—If teeth are present simply lash the lower jaw firmly to the upper by wire ligatures (No. 28 German silver or brass wire) or by means of Angle’s or Lukens’ fracture bands applied on both sides of the fracture. Look after correct articulation. In complicated cases, an interdental splint with or without external steel hooks or a Gunning splint is indicated. A suitable splint may be quickly con- structed over the articulated models from a good, hard modeling compound; it can be kept in the mouth for a month without deterioration. A chin boot made of metal, vulcanite or gutta-percha is occasionally helpful. In edentulous jaws an interdental splint is essential. A Barton or Black bandage is of advantage. Union will take place in from three 204 DENTAL FORMULARY to five weeks. Antiseptic mouth washes are indicated. Feed the patient on a liquid diet with a hooked glass tube (short bent saliva ejector) around the molars. I$— Resorcinol 5j Zinci chloridi gr. x Mentholis gr. xx Thymolis gr. xv Glycerini fl.gj Alcoholis fl-3ij Aqua? hydrogenii dioxidi . q.s. ad fl.gviij—TO. Sig.—Teaspoonful in half a tumblerful of warm water as a mouth wash. Fracture of the Teeth.—If the crown is fractured, replace it by an artificial substitute; if the root is fractured, an attempt may be made, in favorable cases, to save it by banding. Callous union may occur if the pulp recovers. Gingivitis (Acute or Chronic).—An inflammation of the gum tissue. Symptoms.—More or less severe inflammation of the gums brought about by local irritation; ill-fitting partial dentures are frequently the cause. The gums are turgid, loosened from the teeth, and upon slight irritation they bleed profusely. Treatment.—Thorough removal of all deposits from the teeth and especially from beneath the free edge of the gum margin; and thorough polishing of the tooth surfaces. The inflamed edge of the gum is touched with a 10 per cent solu- tion of trichloracetic acid or with powdered copper sulphate made into a paste with water. Cupri sulphatis ...... 3j Acidi lactici fl.Sss—Tfl Sig.—Apply with a platinum loop about the free edges of the gums. DENTAL FORMULARY 205 Acidi borici 5hj Zinci chloridi gr. x Aquae hydrogenii dioxidi . . fl.gij Aquae menth. piper . . q.s. ad fl.gviij—TU Sig.—A teaspoonful in half a glassful of warm water as a mouth wash. Acute Ulcerous Gingivitis (Gilmer).—A comparatively rare disease; its onset is sudden. It is confined to localized areas, seldom involving the entire gum tissue. “The lingual margins and festoons of the gums do not participate at first in the inflammatory process, but later the festoons are destroyed and deep pockets are formed in the inter- proximal spaces. The parts attacked present the appearance of having been gnawed away until most of the gum tissue overlying the alveolar process immediately adjoining the teeth has been destroyed. The breath of the patient is fetid, the saliva ropy, and in excess of the normal” (Gilmer). The disease may last for weeks or months. Treatment.—Irritating foodstuffs are to be avoided. Bland and slimy drinks, such as rice water, oatmeal infusion, etc., are advised, and mild antiseptic mouth washes, but no astringents, are indicated. Hyperplasia of Cementum.—A circumscribed increase of the volume of the cementum of a tooth; diffuse growth is some- times referred to as hypertrophy of the cementum. Causes.—Irritation from projecting root fillings, crown fillings, ill-fitting bands, or other chronic irritation of the pericementum. Pyorrhea alveolaris, syphilis, metal poison- ing (mercury) or the loss of the opposing tooth are claimed to be causative factors. Symptoms.—Usually not present. Gnawing and neuralgic pains are met with. Diagnosis. —Difficult. The roentgenograph ic picture of the suspected tooth may be of value. Treatment.—In suitable cases amputation of the root is advisable, otherwise extraction, which, however, is often very difficult and usually accompanied with considerable bruising and damaging of the alveolar bone. 206 DENTAL FORMULARY Hypertrophy of the Gingivae.—A pathological overgrowth of gum tissue resulting from chronic irritation brought about by ill-fitting crowns, calcareous deposits, and neglected mouth hygiene. The hypertrophic growth may be of a fibromatous nature. Treatment.—Simpler cases yield readily to local treatment; remove the cause and thoroughly clean the mouth and the teeth and apply caustics, i. e., properly diluted solutions of chromic or trichloracetic acids. Larger areas of hyper- trophied tissues are removed with the knife. In severe cases, major surgical interference is necessary. Leucoplakia (Leucoplakia Oris, Psoriasis Linguce, Ich- thyosis Buccalis, Smoker’s Patch).—Etiology.—Not settled; constant chewing or smoking of tobacco highly seasoned food, rough edges of teeth, predisposition of the tongue and the mucous lining of the mouth, or as a result of a former attack of syphilis. Rarely seen before thirty years of age; scarce in women. Symptoms.—Circumscribed or diffused white or bluish- white patches; smooth, cornified or roughened. The epithelium is much thickened. It is usually not painful; in some cases increased flow of saliva, in others, dry mouth. Diagnosis.—Differentiation from syphilitic plaques: Its bluish-white color, extreme chronicity and its history. If as a result of syphilis, the latter is to be regarded as the primary disease. Treatment.—In general, leucoplakia may be harmless; however, in advanced cases, it is often the starting point of cancer. Bring the mouth to a hygienic condition; alkaline mouth washes are indicated. Paint the affected parts with balsam of Peru. Hydrogen peroxide solution for cleansing the plaques is useful. Papain solution for the digestion of the plaques is recommended. Prolonged cauterizing is harmful. In general, medicinal treatment is of little benefit. Surgical removal of the plaques by means of the curette or the Paquelin cautery is indicated, if the plaques spread. DENTAL FORMULARY 207 Papaini gr. x Glycerini fl.5j Aquse . . . . . . q.s. ad HI Sig.—Paint upon the affected surface. Lockjaw. —(Trismus, either tonic or clonic spasms of the muscles of mastication).—Tonic spasms may result from difficult eruption of the lower third molars, faulty extraction, improper injections of local anesthetics, abscesses, or perios- teal inflammations and severe infections (actinomycosis). Treatment.— According to the causes. Inflammatory pro- cesses in the early stages may be abated by ice, or sometimes by dry heat applied externally (hot water bag). Abscesses should be at once opened and hot fomentations applied externally. Clonic spasms do not require treatment. In true ankylosis, separation of the ankylosed joint by an operation is the only relief. Luxation of the Mandible.—See Dislocation. Luxation of Teeth (Resulting from Traumatic Causes).— Treatment.—In complete luxation replace the teeth and tie with silk ligature to the neighbors. Apply Talbot’s glycerol of iodine to allay periosteal disturbances. Test for pulp reaction with heat, the mouth amp, and the electric current. If the tooth is completely detached from its socket, replanta- tion is advisable. Pack the cleansed alveolus tightly with iodoform gauze. Remove the pulp, fill the canal aseptically, cut off about | inch of the apex and sterilize the tooth in mercuric chloride solution 1 : 1000. If the peridental membrane of the tooth is intact, keep the tooth in physio- logical salt solution, warmed to body temperature, until ready for replantation. Replace and tie with silk ligature or hold the tooth in position with a metal splint. Antisepsis of the mouth is essential. Mouth-wash Eczema.—A peculiar eczematous eruption about the external mouth caused by the constant irritation 208 DENTAL FORMULARY from the use of mouth washes containing large quantities of essential oils, menthol, salol, etc., in alcoholic solutions. Symptoms.—Scaly eruptions about the lips and chin but more especially at the corners of the mouth. Those suffering from seborrhea and eczema show predisposition. Treatment.— Prohibition of the mouth wash, substituting warm salt water as a test solution. Externally apply zinc ointment or cold cream. Necrosis of the Alveolar Process.—It may result from faulty arsenic application, phosphorus poisoning, gangrene of the dental pulp, abscesses, etc. Symptoms.—It usually starts with a simple periostitis; later the formation of abscesses and fistulas occurs. The perios- teum is destroyed and the bone feels rough to the touch. Sequestration of the dead bone takes place in due time. Treatment.—If the necrosis is the result of traumatism, the removal of the loose bone spicula and antiseptic treatment of the wound will usually bring about a speedy recovery. If a large part of the bone is involved, no interference should be made until sequestration takes place. Free evacuation of pus is essential. If a part of the jaw is removed prosthetic appliances are usually necessary to preserve the contour of the face. Strong deodorizing and antiseptic solutions are essential. I}—Pot. permanganat 3ij Sig.—A few crystals in a glassful of warm salt water as a mouth wash. 1^—Zinci chloridi gr. v Aqua, hydrogenii dioxidi] a(J fl.5;v_m Aquae menth. pip. . J n Sig.—A teaspoonful in half a glassful of warm water as a mouth wash. Neuralgia (Trifacial; Tic Douloureux-, Fother gill’s Disease-, Prosopalgia. — A neuropathic disturbance of nerve fibers without having any direct connection with any organic DENTAL FORMULARY 209 disease. True trifacial neuralgia manifests itself by a sudden paroxysmal pain of a sharp, darting, stabbing character, which is most common along the course of the supra- and the infraorbital branches of the left side of the face with increased lacrimation, gray eyebrows and convulsive twitches and tenderness at the infra- and supraorbital foramina (points douloureux), as well as along the course of the nerve distribu- tion. It is most often restricted to women of middle age in which neuropathic disturbances or a general disease, princi- pally anemia or hyperesthesia of pregnancy, play predominant roles. Neuralgia should be differentiated from neuritis, i. e., an inflammation of a nerve trunk, primarily charac- terized by continuous pain, impaired sensation, motor paralysis and atrophy. Central trifacial neuralgia, either from involvement of the ganglion itself or its internal roots, or as a result of pressure from a cerebral tumor, i. e., a neuroma, often leads to a faulty diagnosis of toothache. Many patients suffer the loss of one tooth after another in the vain search for the real cause. After the sacrifice of the teeth the dentist or physician may wake up to the fact that the painful disorder is of a central origin, and that a grave mistake has been made. Neuralgiform types of pain in and about the teeth of an obscure character are occasionally met with. The true cause of the pain may be located anywhere between the origin of the nerve in the brain and its end-organs, i. e., in our case, in the teeth or within their immediate surround- ings; however, the sensation of pain is only manifested at the periphery. If a carefully conducted diagnosis by exclusion has eliminated every one of the above discussed factors, one should be mindful of the possible presence of solid new growths within the body of the pulp, which are referred to as adventitious dentin if attached to the wall of the root canal or as pulp stones or nodules, denticles, internal odon- tomes, dentinoids, etc., if suspended within its body. The formation of pulp nodules is most likely always due to some type of mild, continuous external irritatiou which excites the dentin-forming cells of a healthy, and usually, mature pulp to renewed activity, This irritation, however, must never 210 DENTAL FORMULARY become severe enough to produce acute inflammation. These pulp nodules usually represent pearl-like, shiny beads; they are found singly or multiple and occasionally a few may coalesce into an irregular multiple mass. The pulp chamber as well as the root canals serve as their abodes. Regarding their location in the various types of teeth, it has been observed that the incisors and canines are relatively seldom invaded, while the pulps of premolars, but primarily the molars in mature age, are principally selected as seats of their formation.’ By their mere presence and close contact with nerve filaments within the pulp these nodules may cause chronic pressure and, as a consequence, more or less severe pain which steadily increases with their growth. Pulp nodules have been observed in root canals which completely occluded their lumen and thereby caused atrophy of the severed pulp stump. Treatment.—If possible, remove the cause. Careful exami- nation of the teeth for hidden cavities should be made. In obscure cases, the roentgen ray may be of service. If not of dental origin, it should be referred to the physician. I$—Codeinse phosphatis .... gr. j Acidi acetyl-salicyl.] Phenacetin. . . J aa gr. xxv M. f. cap. No. vi Sig.—One capsule every two hours. I$—Ungt. veratrinae 5 ss Sig.—Rub a small quantity over the painful surface, cover thickly with raw cotton and apply the hot-water bag. 3$—Chloroformi. Alcoholis . aa fl. 5 j Tinct. aconiti fl.gij Olei menth. pip fi.Siij—1U Sig.—Externally, Apply on cotton upon the painful surface. DENTAL FORMULARY 211 Ostitis and Osteomyelitis.—Inflammation of the jaw bone. It may be idiopathic; it may result from traumatism; it may be a concomitant expression of a general disease or an intoxication. Diseased teeth, fracture of the jaw, syphilis, scurvy, mercury and phosphorus poisoning, and a peculiar infection of the periosteum of the jaw bones and the teeth in workers of mother-of-pearl are causative factors. Symptoms.—\ery painful swelling of the periosteum; the lymph glands are affected and the teeth are loosened. Treatment.—Poultices are frequently necessary to soften the swelling; if pus is present, an incision is made and the periosteal surfaces are curetted. The wound is washed with antiseptics and cauterized with 8 per cent solution of zinc chloride and packed with gauze. Antiseptic mouth washes are important. I$—Zinci chloridi gr. xxxv Aquae destil fl.5j—Tfi Sig.—To be used as a swab. Pericementitis (Inflammation of the Pericementum).— Clinically, three stages may be observed: Acute, purulent, and chronic pericementitis. Causative factors are: Trauma, too high fillings, rapid separation, root canal fillings protruding at the foramen, traumatic occlusion, foreign bodies between the teeth, calcareous deposits, metal poisoning (arsenic, phosphorus, mercury, etc.), bacterial infection starting from the apex or the gingival border, etc. As secondary factors may be counted: Sequences of general disturbances (gout, rheumatism, syphilis, diabetes, influenza, etc.). Symptoms.—'The tooth feels elongated on account of the swelling of the pericementum. The gum tissue is inflamed and the swelling may become edematous, involving the whole side of the face. The pain is very severe; it slightly subsides with the formation of the edema. Many practitioners have no clear conception of the difference between pericementitis and pulpitis, inasmuch as each produces a distinct odontalgia or toothache which only 212 DENTAL FORMULARY close observation will distinguish from the other. And yet the two conditions have little in common except the pain, and that is not of the same character. It may be well to compare their pronounced symptoms as an aid in diagnosis. Differential Diagnosis of Inflammatory Diagnosis of: THE PERIDENTAL MEMBRANE. The pain is localized, dull, steady, boring or throbbing in character; it is not paroxysmal, nor increased by a recumbent position. Pain remains more or less constant without much reference to exter- nal conditions. There is little reaction to tempera- ture changes; cold may give relief, while heat does not materially affect it. Pressure at first usually relieves the pain, later it is intensified. In the later stages swelling is com- mon. The tooth is raised in its socket and strikes before any of the others occlude. The diseased tooth is readily located; the pain is steady in degree and in its position. No reflex symp- toms are observed. Percussion induces pain. The tooth is very sore to the touch; occlusion in mastication or ordi- nary shutting of the teeth pro- duces pain irrespective of thermal changes. Carious defects, as such, are of no consequence. The mandibular lymph nodes A, B, C or D are swollen, tender and pain- ful on pressure. (See page 213.) THE DENTAL PULP. The pain is of a sharp, lancinating character; in the earlier stages it is distinctly paroxysmal. On as- suming a recumbent position, or with excitement or fatigue, the pain usually increases. The tooth is exceedingly sensitive to thermal changes; in its inceptive state cold; later on heat intensi- fies the pain. There is no swelling of the soft tis- sues about the tooth, and no ten- derness to pressure. The tooth is not elongated nor does it strike first in occlusion. At times it is quite difficult to deter- mine exactly which tooth is affected as the pain induces reflex symptoms in other teeth and tissues. Percussion is negative. It is possible to bite upon the tooth and to use it in mastication with- out any special sensation if ther- mal extremes be avoided. The tooth usually shows a carious defect. Swelling of the mandibular lymph nodes is not observed. Treatment.— Removal of the cause is of prime importance. If the disturbances result from mechanical causes they usually yield readily to treatment after the causative factors have been eliminated. Painting of the affected surfaces with an iodine solution (Talbot’s iodo-glycerol) as a palliative measure is of some service. If the disturbances are of DENTAL FORMULARY 213 chemical origin, i. e., arsenic, phosphorus, etc., they are treated as outlined under their respective headings. Schematic drawing of the relationship of the submaxillary and the sub- mental lymph nodes to the teeth of the upper and the lower jaw. A, B and C = submaxillary lymph nodes; D = submental lymph nodes. The disturbances about the apex of a tooth require prompt removal of the accumulated putrid masses from the root canals. The latter are to be opened to allow free drainage. To avoid unnecessary severe pain, stability of the tooth is essential (traction is made with a string; plaster of Paris or modeling compound splints); scarification of the highly inflamed gum tissues is of benefit, while in the early stages ice chips held between the gum and the cheek are helpful in reducing inflammation. If pus collects about the apex and no ready drainage is obtained, very intense pain is the direct sequence. An endeavor should be made to drain the pus through the root canal (blind abscess). If this is not possible, an opening is made through the gum tissue and the bone with a fissure bur or a small tubular knife, and an artificial fistula is established. If the disturbance is left alone, Nature helps herself; the pus may burrow through the bone and gum tissue along the line of least resistance, or along the perice- mentum toward the gingival line. As soon as free drainage 214 DENTAL FORMULARY is obtained the pain is much mitigated; it may often stop completely. (See Alveolar Abscess.) With the successful treatment of the infected root canals and proper filling, the fistula will close in due time and the pericemental disturbances disappear. If, on the other hand, a diffuse pus infiltration of the entire pericementum results, recovery is not to be expected; the tooth has to be removed. Occasionally we find teeth, usually multi-rooted teeth, where the root fillings have not been successfully placed and remnants of putrid matter are left about the apices and, as a sequence, the pericementum is kept in a chronic state of inflammation. Such teeth are a continuous source of trouble. The slightest disturbance (cold, influenza, mental or physical strain) may set up a renewed severe acute inflammation with all its sequences. It is then best to remove the root filling, treat the canals antiseptically and again restore the filling. Resec- tion (amputation) of the root is the most promising procedure. I$—Dichloramine-T gr. iv Chlorcosan fl.5j Sig.—Mechanically evacuate the pus and, on a sterile paper cone, hermetically seal in the canal for twenty-four hours; repeat two or three times. 1^—Phenol, cryst. Thymolis aa 5 ij Camphorse 5 j —TTI Sig.—Seal into root canal. Zinci iodid § j Iodi 5v Glycerini fl.§j Aquse q.s. ad fl.Biv—Tit Sig.—Paint upon the gum surfaces of the affected tooth. 1^—Tinet. aconiti Tinct. iodi. Chloroformi fl.5j—Ttl Sig.—Paint upon the gum surfaces of the affected tooth. aa fl.Sij DENTAL FORMULARY 215 Pf—Tablet, acid, acetyl-sal icy 1. . . gr. v No. vi. Sig.—One tablet every two hours with a tumblerful of water. I$—Magnes. sulphatis Bj Acid, sulphur, dil fl.Bss Syr. limonis fl.Bj Aquse q.s. ad fl.Biv—TH Sig.—A tablespoonful in half a glassful of water every three hours until free movement of the bowels is established. Phosphorus Necrosis.—This disease is rare at present on account of improved hygienic conditions in match and chemical factories. Rigid prophylaxis is the best pre- ventative. Symptoms.—Intoxication is very slow, extending over months. Carious teeth are the main gates of entry of the phosphorus gases; it is primarily located in the lower jaw. Severe pain, periostitis, loosening of teeth, osteomyelitis and finally necrosis, which often involves the entire mandible, are the results. Treatment.— Resection of the involved bone along the line of demarcation; packing with iodoform gauze and rigid antisepsis. Patient must keep away from factory; nutritious food and tonics are recommended (milk, cod-liver oil, b6ef, wine and iron). FI. extr. cascara sagrada . . . fl.Bj Liquor ferri pepto-mangan. q.s. ad B xij —TTL Sig. —1Tablespoonful three times daily, an hour after meals. Pulpitis (Inflammation of the Pulp).—Hyperemia.—The pulp is hypersensitive; heat and cold produces short acute, but very pronounced expression of pain. Causes.—Irritation brought about by chemical, physical or mechanical agencies, i. e., through a carious defect or through the exposure of a tooth root. Heat, resulting from 216 DENTAL FORMULARY the too rapid rotating of a disc in finishing a filling frequently produces a prolonged hyperemia. Treatment.—If the irritation results from the sequences of a carious defect, the cavity should be excavated; antiseptics, i. e., phenol, thymol, eugenol, etc., are applied and a temporary filling is inserted. If hyperemia results from an exposed root, the application of silver nitrate in the form of a concentrated solution or in substance upon the surface of the root gives temporary relief. I$—Chloreton gr. xx 01. caryophyll fl.5j—1U Sig.—Seal into the cavity for forty-eight hours. Acute Pulpitis, Partial and Total.—If the pain of the pulp is persistent, i. e., from several hours to several days, a more or less severe inflammation of the pulp is present; a minute exposure may frequently be located upon close examination. Treatment.—In the teeth of the young an effort should be made in the early stage of the inflammation to preserve the pulp by palliative treatment. Astringents and antiseptics are applied and the bottom of the cavity is lined with a non- conductive varnish prior to inserting the temporary filling. This filling must remain from one to six months. In the adult it is usually better practice to destroy the pulp at once and replace it by an aseptic root filling. Suppurative Pulpitis, Partial and Total.—Diffuse, continued pain upon the side of the face where the tooth is situated. Pain usually increases upon assuming a recumbent position. This form of pulpitis frequently results from cement and other fillings placed over an unobserved small exposure. Treatment.—On penetrating into a pulp chamber containing a suppurating pulp with a bur, practically no pain is experi- enced; occasionally, however, a very short paroxysm may be observed. On withdrawing the bur, the pent-up pus wells up, followed by a drop or two of dark blood. The violent pain which the patient has suffered for hours or days ceases DENTAL FORMULARY 217 almost instantly. The pulp chamber should be opened as widely as possible and washed out with tepid water. A broach may now be inserted to ascertain whether the whole or only a part of the pulp has succumbed to the infection. In the former case immediate extirpation of the necrotic pulp debris is indicated. A dressing of dichloramine-T is sealed into the empty root canal. The subsequent treatment of such root canals is discussed under “Necrosisand Gangrene.” Hyperplastic Pulpitis, Chronic, also known as pulp polypus, is a chronic productive inflammation of the exposed pulp characterized by a slowly growing granulation tissue upon its surface, filling more or less the carious cavity and sometimes protruding therefrom. Treatment.—The treatment of chronic hyperplastic pulpitis consists in the preliminary surgical removal of the granulation tissue and destruction of the remaining pulp. To facilitate the painless amputation of the polypus a drop of liquid phenol is allowed to flow upon it and very shortly the cauter- ized head, which now appears as a milk-white bead, may be cut off with a sharp spoon curette or a hatchet-shaped excavator, or with a small curved lancet. Profuse bleeding results. The further treatment consists in the removal of the remaining pulp, etc., to be carried out in the usual manner. Necrosis and Gangrene of the Dental Pulp.—Necrosis and gangrene of the dental pulp may be brought about by its death from any cause and by simultaneous or subsequent putrefaction which in turn results in an infected root canal. The treatment of an infected root canal resolves itself into three definite phases: The mechanical, the chemical and the therapeutic procedures. Mechanical manipulations are intended to dispose of the debris of the decomposed pulp and to assist in the enlargement of the canal. Chemical procedures are primarily applied for the purpose of facilitating the removal of obstructions, and therapeutic applications are utilized to overcome septic conditions. The successful removal of the debris from a root canal depends primarily upon its size. Curvatures of the roots and the presence of secondary dentin materially increases the difficulties. Dur- 218 DENTAL FORMULARY ing the process of enlarging the canals numerous complica- tions may arise among which the packing of debris into the apical region of the very fine canals, cutting ledges into the walls of the curved canal and breaking the tip of a broach near a curve are relatively common occurrences. Binding of the broach within the canal must be rigidly avoided, as breaking of this delicate instrument by applying undue force is almost certain to occur. If a ledge is cut, which is usually the result of using too large a broach, it must be carefully filed away, otherwise the formation of a pocket and finally the perforation of the wall of the root is very apt to take place. By alternating the various sized picks and broaches the canal is finally cleansed of its debris and the apical fora- men is brought within reach. With suitable Kerr files the canal may now be enlarged and straightened so as to assume a conical shape which may materially assist in placing the gutta-percha cone simultaneously against the wall and the apex. For the chemical disintegration of the pulp detritus, but primarily for the purpose of assisting in the opening of oblit- erated root canals two specific methods are in vogue, i. e., the alkali and the acid method. The alkali method tends to destroy the organic constituents of the calcareous deposits and incidentally to assist in the dissolution of necrosed tissue by means of the freshly formed hydroxides of potassium and sodium derived from an alloy of potassium and sodium in the presence of water, and thereby rendering the remaining inorganic debris more friable and offering less resistance to the advancing instruments, while the sulphuric acid treat- ment produces the opposite effect, i. e., it destroys the inor- ganic substances by dissolution and carbonizes the remain- ing organic material. The most satisfactory results are obtained by the use of potassium-sodium alloy or by the combined application of the alkali and acid methods in logical sequence, i. e., sodium dioxide followed by sulphuric acid and finally by copious washing with water. For the therapeutic treatment of the infected root canal the application of a 5 per cent solution of dichloramine-T at intervals of three or four visits has proven to be eminently DENTAL FORMULARY 219 successful. After thorough disinfection the canals are filled aseptically. (For the devitalizing compounds, antiseptics, root-filling materials, etc., used in this connection see Phar- maceutical Compounds, Chapter VII.) Pyorrhea Alveolaris.—Precocious senile atrophy of the alveolar process of the jaw bones accompanied by progressive loosening of the involved tooth and subsequent infection and suppuration of its retentive tissues. Causes.—Local: Salivary calculus, chronic irritation from ill-fitting dentures, distorted articulation, orthodontic appli- ances and other sources. General: Gout, rheumatism, dia- betes mellitus, locomotor ataxia and other constitutional diseases; metal poisoning and, probably, predisposition. Symptoms.—'The disease begins with a slight loosening of the affected tooth, gingivitis and subsequent formation of a pocket. Pus is not always present in the early stages; later it may be dislodged by pressure upon the pocket. The gingivae become detached from the tooth and necrosis of the alveolus follows. There is little fetor from the mouth; the disease usually produces little inconvenience to the patient in the earlier stages. Treatment. The removal of all deposits from the roots with suitable instruments is of prime importance. The pockets are washed out with hot antiseptic solutions and cauterized. Trichloracetic acid, 10 to 25 per cent, aromatic sulphuric acid, a saturated solution of copper sulphate in hot lactic acid, etc., are to be recommended. Loose teeth are ligated to their sound neighbors or held in permanent position by fixed metal splints. Articulation is restored and the mouth is brought into a hygienic condition. The gums are saturated with Talbot’s zinc iodide solution and fre- quently massaged. The continuous use of astringent and antiseptic mouth washes are highly indicated. Uric acid diathesis is held by some writers to be the sole cause of pyorrhea alveolaris. The copious drinking of water, especially weak alkaline water (lithia) together with a well- regulated diet and proper hygienic measures will be of marked benefit. 220 DENTAL FORMULARY As a solvent of the uratic tophi hexamethylene, also known as urotropine, etc., is recommended. If the under- lying cause is a general disease the cooperation of the family physician should be secured. Lithii citratis gr. v Tablet, No. L. Sig.—One tablet dissolved in a tumblerful of water four to five times a day. Shock.—Sudden vital depression due to injury or emotion making an untoward impression upon the nervous system. Its severity depends upon the cause, i. e., it may be slight, transient, profound or even fatal. Recovery is followed by more or less quickening of the pulse and the respiration and an abnormally high temperature. Treatment.—It requires prompt attention. The body is placed in a recumbent position with the head lowered and the patient is wrapped in warm blankets and hot-water bottles are placed about the extremities. Quickly acting stimulants, viz., whisky or brandy by the mouth or hypo- dermically in 0.5 to 1-dram doses should be given very freely, assisted by strong, hot coffee. The heart is supported with digitalis and atropine. When there has been much hemorrhage copious draughts of hot liquids are indicated. Recovery from shock, if it occurs at all, is usually quite speedy. Stomatitis, Aphthous.—Primarily a disease of childhood. Small, round ulcers of a grayish color surrounded by a red, narrow border; occasionally three or four ulcers will coalesce to a larger one. It is found principally upon the surfaces of the tongue and upon the buccal mucosa. Especially prone to be present at the time of the first dentition; less frequently in the adult. Symptoms.—Painful mouth; slight fever. The salivary secretions areAincreased. Usually, in ten to fifteen days the ulcers disappear without leaving a scar. DENTAL FORMULARY 221 Treatment.—Perfect cleansing of the child’s mouth and the utensils employed in nursing. Washing of the mouth with a 2 per cent boric acid solution or with mild astringent m’xtures. Use the finger, wrapped with cotton cloth and dipped into the warmed solution. An 8 per cent solution of zinc chloride used as a caustic upon the ulcers is the supreme remedy. Keep the bowels open. Zinci chloridi gr. xxxv Aquae destil fl. § j —Til Sig. — Apply upon the ulcers with a small piece of cotton wrapped about the point of a wooden applicator. Glycerol, acidi tannici . . . . fl. 3 ij Aquae q.s. ad fl. S j —hi Sig.—To be painted upon the inflamed spots. f^—Acidi borici 5ij Glycerini fl.gj Aquae q.s. ad fl. S iv—TTL Sig.—A tablespoonful in a tumblerful of warm salt water as a mouth wash. Stomatitis, Catarrhal (Acute or Chronic. Follicular Stoma- itis. Inflammation of the Mucous Linings of the Mouth). Causes.—Neglected mouth hygiene; ragged edges of teeth; calcareous deposits or secondary expressions of general diseases, i. e., influenza or other infections, anemia, and during pregnancy. Symptoms.— Red and swollen mucous linings, increased salivation, thickened papillae and turgid gums. The tongue is usually swollen and coated and shows the imprints of the teeth. A pronounced fetor from the mouth exists with painful deglutition and speech; fever is more or less present. Treatment.—Clean up the mouth; smooth all ragged edges about the teeth; loose roots must be removed. Smoking is to be prohibited. If artificial dentures are worn they should be temporarily removed. The bowels should be kept open 222 DENTAL FORMULARY by a saline purge; the gum edges are cauterized with copper sulphate in substances and rigid mouth hygiene is enforced. 1^—Magnesii sulphatis 5j Acidi sulphur, dilu fl.5ss Syrup, limonis fl.5j Aquse q.s. ad fl.Siv—TU Sig. — A tablespoonful in half a glass of water every four hours. 1^—Acidi benzoici 5j Tinct. kramerise fl.Sss 01. menth. pip gtt. xv Alcohol q.s. ad fhgiv—TU Sig.—A teaspoonful in a glassful of warm salt water as a mouth wash. Stomatitis, Gangrenous (Noma; Cancrum Oris; Water Cancer).— An acute, rapidly progressive gangrenous ulcera- tion of the mouth, leading to extensive sloughing and destruc- tion of the affected parts. It is brought about by an infec- tion which is probably specific in its nature. The disease progresses very rapidly; it is accompanied by an intense fetid odor and nearly always ends fatally. Its treatment belongs to the domain of the surgeon. Stomatitis, Scorbutic (Scurvy).—General malnutrition or anemia brought about by an infection resultant from dietary insufficiency of fresh vegetables (absence of certain vitamins). The gums are much swollen, spongy and ready to bleed upon the slightest irritation. Malaise, debility and mental lethargy are pronounced. Refer to the physician for the treatment of the general condition. Stomatitis, Ulcerative.—Various forms of severe disturb- ances of the soft tissues. Mercurial Stomatitis.—This results from the internal administration of mercury or from inhalation of mercury DENTAL FORMULARY 223 vapors. Usually starting about the posterior teeth, more so if ragged tooth structure is a source of irritation. The gums are much swollen and loosened from the teeth; the teeth are loose and covered with a thick, slimy sordes of intense foul odor; salivation is much increased. Ulcerous destruction of the gum tissue terminates in gangrene. Caries and necrosis of the alveolar process and jaw bones may be the result. Treatment.— All mechanical disturbances have to be removed from the mouth; loose teeth and useless roots are extracted and the mercury treatment has to be stopped temporarily. Smoking and spiced or acid foods are pro- hibited. Thorough hygiene of the mouth is of prime import- ance. Hydrogen peroxide in combination with a metal astringent is the sovereign remedy for this affection. The much lauded potassium chlorate administration is of doubt- ful value.- In severe cases of ulceration iodoform or its odor- less substitutes applied upon the corroded surfaces are of much benefit. 1^—Zinci chloridi gr. x Resorcinolis 5 j Thymolis gr. xx Glycerini fl.gj Alcoholis fl-Bij Aquse hydrog. dioxidi . q.s. ad fl. S viij —1TL Sig.—A teaspoonful in a glassful of warm salt water every hour as a mouth wash. Iodoformi 5j Glycerini fl. § ij —Tfl. Sig.—To be painted upon the ulcerated surfaces. Ulcero-membranous Stomatitis, (Ulcerative or Gangren- ous Gingivostomatitis; Vincent’s Angina; “ Trench Mouth”). —An acute highly infectious disease of the oral mucosa caused by the so-called Plaut-Vincent organisms, i. e., a symbiosis of Bact. fusiformis and Spirochsete refringens. The gums are swollen and congested and at times; the 224 DENTAL FORMULARY gingival margin has undergone ulceration and sloughing. The ulceration may involve the hard and soft palate, tonsils, mucous membrane of the cheeks, the tongue and, on rare occasions, the floor of the mouth. The ulcers are covered with a yellowish-white necrotic scum, which when removed leaves a bleeding, highly sensitive surface. The breath is fetid and there is some fever, with malaise, considerable pain, sleeplessness, loss of appetite, thirst, salivation, diffi- cult deglutition, etc., with more or less severe symptoms of toxemia. The early characteristic sign is the sloughing of the interdental papillae followed by their permanent destruc- tion. Treatment.—Treatment should be primarily directed against the removal of the predisposing causes, viz., calca- reous deposits upon the teeth, foul roots, abscessed teeth, etc. Predisposition to this disease is much favored by local dis- turbances arising within the oral cavity, wThich lower the normal vitality of the mucous lining (abuse of tobacco, etc.) and by an unbalanced metabolism (canned food, etc.). Thorough cleansing of the ulcerated surfaces with 3 per cent hydrogen peroxide combined with copious hot irrigation of the mouth with a weak potassium permanganate solution or 1 per cent hydrogen peroxide at frequent intervals combined with massage of the gums and hygienic care of the teeth is imperative. In the milder types application of zinc chloride solution (8 per cent) is useful: The supreme remedy in severe cases is 10 per cent chromic acid solution. The general health of the patient must be carefully considered. Recurrent attacks are rather frequently observed. As this disease is highly infectious, the patient should be cautioned to exercise the greatest care to prevent its spreading. 1^—Acidi chromici gr. xl Aquse destil fl.Bj—TTL Sig. — Apply with a cotton swab upon the ulcerated surfaces. Swallowing Artificial Dentures.—Artificial dentures, like other foreign bodies, may accidentally be swallowed. The following points should be carefully observed in the con- DENTAL FORMULARY 225 struction of dentures: (1) Great care should be exercised in regard to fastening dentures in the mouth. (2) It is best to advise the patient to remove such substitutes during sleeping hours. (3) Epileptics should quickly remove the artificial teeth in the beginning of an attack (aurea epileptica). (4) Before administering a general anesthetic, artificial sub- stitutes must be removed from the mouth. (5) Dentures should not be made too small and too many clasps and sharp corners should be avoided. Diagnosis.—'The esophageal probe and the roentgen ray are sure means. Treatment.—If the denture is caught in the pharynx the coin catcher or other suitable instrument may help to extract it. If lodged in the esophagus it may be possible to gently force it into the stomach by means of a sound. If lodged in the stomach or the intestines an attempt should be made to facilitate the removal of the denture through the natural way, viz., the intestines. The patient should eat large quantities of asparagus, oatmeal porridge, boiled rice or mashed potatoes, mixed to a thick mush with milk and white crochet cotton cut in pieces about two inches long. The meal should be repeated every three hours and this diet may be continued for several days. After the third or fourth day, half an ounce of castor oil is administered. Avoid purga- tives in the beginning. The object is to distend the intes- tines and to entangle the denture in the cotton threads. If the stomach or the bowels persist in retaining the denture an operation should be resorted to. Syncope.—A more or less sudden failure of the heart; extreme state of prostration. Treatment.—Fresh air, horizontal position of the patient, opening of obstructing garments and massage of the heart; dashing of cold water in the face and irritating substances, like ammonia (smelling salt) and amyl nitrite, for inhalation. Syphilis of the Mouth.—The hard chancre (Hunterian) is the typical initial lesion of syphilis which usually appears about three weeks after infection at the point of inoculation. 226 DENTAL FORMULARY It is more typical in men than in women. It is a definite round or oval ulcer, having a sharply defined border and presenting a corroded surface which is covered with a whitish lard-like detritus and which secretes a thin serous fluid. The edges are often ragged and undermined. Swelling of the neighboring lymph glands occurs in the early stages of the disease. Of all extragenital chancres, 65 per cent are located about the mouth (lips, throat, tongue and buccal cavity). The secondary manifestations appear from four to eight weeks after the initial lesion and are ushered in with fever, malaise and headache. A typical sore throat makes its appearance early. The diagnosis is often difficult in the early stages; the presence of certain skin eruptions (roseola) and the mucous patches make the diagnosis certain. There are several points which all syphilides have in common, and which, taken together, may be considered as pathognomonic of syphilis. “1. Syphilitic rashes or syphilides are superficial. They are situated in the capillary layer or the corium of the skin and extend only superficially. There is no tendency, as in tertiary lesions, to extend into the deep tissue, and very little tendency to increase peripherally, though two or more closely situated lesions may coalesce. “2. It is only the epidermis overlying the syphilides that is destroyed and it is replaced by new epithelium. “3. If the lesion is not contaminated by pus cocci there is no tendency to ulcerate. “4. The epidermis is replaced and does not leave a scar. “5. There is, however, a deposit of pigment where the syphilide occurred, which is of a characteristic ham or copper color. This spot may disappear very shortly, leaving no trace. It may appear immediately or its appearance may be delayed a few days. “6. Syphilitic rashes may or may not itch. “7. They are symmetrical on both sides of the body. “8. The roseola disappears on pressure. “The mucous patch develops upon mucous surfaces of the skin and it is similar in structure to a papule, but it secretes a glairy fluid which is highly infective. If inoculated into DENTAL FORMULARY 227 Differential Diagnosis. SYPHILITIC SORE THROAT. History of infection. Inflammation slight. Little swelling. Slight rise in temperature. Little pain. No difficulty in swallowing and open- ing mouth. Symmetrically disposed. SYPHILITIC SORE THROAT. Syphilitic history. May be in children; if so, hereditary. No emaciation. Little fever and pain. Hoarseness; no dysphagia or aphonia. Ulcer sharply defined with edges. Undermined. Situated on a thickened base with surrounding area of redness. Duration brief. SYPHILITIC ULCER OF TONSIL. Swelling and induration slight. Usually bilateral. Syphilitic history. Ulcer has indurated base. Edges sharply defined, undermined. May be superficial or deep. Little or no pain. No cachexia. Discharge not so offensive. MUCOUS PATCHES. Duration short. Round or oval, smaller. Seldom on cheek. Often on tip, margin and under sur- face of tongue. Patches thinner. Glands involved. No carcinomatous tendency. Patches grayish or red. ACUTE TONSILLITIS. No specific history. Inflammation much greater. Much swelling. Temperature high. Pain very severe. Difficulty in opening mouth and swallowing. Usually unilateral. TUBERCULAR SORE THROAT. Tubercular history. No syphilitic history. Usually adults. Rapid emaciation. High fever, much pain. Aphonia, dysphagia, dyspnea. Ulcer, superficial, indefinite edges, not undermined. Grayish perforated appearance. Progresses rapidly. Anemic mucous membrane. CANCER OF TONSIL. Much swelling and induration. Usually unilateral. No history of syphilis. No indurated base. Edges not undermined, grayish. Profuse granulations. Pain very severe before and after ulceration. Cachexia marked. Fetid discharge. LEUCOPLAKIA BUCCALIS. May last for years. Form irregular, may grow quite large. Frequently on cheek. Never found in these locations. Patches thickened. If involved, only later. Tendency to develop into carcinoma. Patches very white. (L, B. Baldwin.) 228 DENTAL FORMULARY a healthy person a chancre will always result at the point of infection. Mucous patches are not painful and seldom give rise to inconvenience. In the mouth the first mani- festation of the secondary stage of syphilitic infection is the appearance of a general dull red erythema involving the entire fauces. The erythema soon fades, leaving symmetrically disposed erythematous spots on both sides of the palate, the walls of the pharynx, the pillars of the fauces and sides of the tongue.” Tertiary manifestations may occur from two to three years or even fifteen years after the primary infection. Gummata, viz., small defined accumulations of cells, which show a tendency to break down into ulcers and destroy sur- rounding tissues. The gummata of the palates destroy the soft and hard portions equally rapid; necrosis of the bone results. The ulcer finally heals but leaves a round perfora- tion which communicates with the nasal cavity. Hereditary syphilis is characterized by typical imperfections of the permanent teeth usually confined to the upper incisors; they present crescent-like peculiar excavations at their incisive edges and they, with the other teeth, may show pitted surfaces, irregularity of position and, in general, weak structure. Pathognomonic signs of inherited syphilis are: The presence of malformed teeth, interstitial keratitis and otitis media (Hutchinson’s triad). Treatment.—It is to be left to the physician. The oral cavity of the syphilitic should be brought in perfect order before medicinal treatment is inaugurated. This factor will, to a very large extent, prevent the possible occurrence of mercurial stomatitis. The teeth should be scrupulously cleaned and kept in that condition during the treatment; all useless roots are removed and present cavities filled. The frequent use of astringent and antiseptic mouth washes are essential. The greatest care is to be exercised by the operator to work with sterilized instruments only to prevent a possible infection of himself or of his patients. All instru- ments used during treatment must be sterilized by boiling. DENTAL FORMULARY 229 Thrush (White Mouth; Soor; Muguet; Parasitic Stomatitis). —An inflammation of the mucous lining of the mouth from a parasitic fungus, o'idium albicans, manifesting itself in pain, disturbed deglutition, disorders of digestion and of the bowels. Symptoms.—The mucous lining of the oral cavity is covered with a whitish thick deposit which may be lifted up by an instrument. Thrush fungi are seen on microscopical examination. The pain varies with the severity of the disease. Treatment.— Absolute cleanliness of the mouth, alkaline mouth washes and painting of the affected surfaces with borax or salicylic acid solutions. —Sodii boratis 5ij Glycerini fl.gss Aquae q.s. ad fl.gj —TTl Sig. — Apply with a cotton swab three or four times daily. 1^—Acidi salicylici gr. xxv Alcoholis A- 5ij Glycerini q.s. ad fl 5 j —TTL Sig.—Paint upon affected surfaces three times daily. Tumors of the Mouth.—All forms of tumorous growths are found in the mouth. Upon the gums giant-cell sarcoma- tous growths, known as epulis, are especially prone to occur. Usually they have their origin in the periosteal lining of the alveolus, and they are benign in their nature. Sar- coma and carcinoma are rarely found upon the gums proper. From the periosteum may develop fibromas, myxomas, sar- comas, carcinomas, cysts, etc. In the floor of the mouth retention cysts are occasionally observed. (See Cysts.) Treatment—Epulis is usually pedunculated; it is removed with the knife or by the galvanic cautery, care being taken to destroy the peduncle at its starting point, otherwise it will recur in a short time. (For the treatment of the reten- tion cysts, see Cysts.) 230 DENTAL FORMULARY Treatment of all larger tumors of the oral cavity are to be referred to the surgeon. Wounds.—Wounds are breaks in the continuity of the tissues. They may be incised, as made by a cutting instru- ment; lacerated, resulting from crushing or tearing; or pene- trating, as made by a pointed instrument. Wounds fre- quently become infected. Treatment—General: To stop the hemorrhage, tie the vessels or pack the wounds; remove crushed or lacerated tissues and close the wound by a suture or by a protective (collodion, adhesive plaster). Infected wounds with pus formation require prompt incision and evacuation of the purulent matter. Remove detritus by syringing and, if necessary, with a curette. Dress with wet hot gauze soaked in solution of phenol, 2 per cent, or mercuric bichloride, 1 in 5000. Wounds in the mouth heal comparatively readily; antisepsis should be rigidly enforced. IMMEDIATE TREATMENT OF ACUTE POISONING When a poison has been swallowed, the stomach should at once be evacuated with the stomach tube, or, in its absence, with a fountain syringe. If corrosives have been swallowed and the mucous membranes are greatly swollen, the stomach tube is not indicated, as laceration of the soft tissues may follow. Emetics are of prime importance. Certain metallic salts, especially copper sulphate in 3-grain (0.2 gm.) doses, and zinc sulphate in 10-grain (0.65 gm.) doses, dissolved in a glassful of water, act very promptly. If the patient is unable to swallow, apomorphine hydro- chloride, TV grain (0.006 gm.), hypodermically, acts promptly and vigorously. As an emergency remedy a tablespoonful of ground mustard stirred in a cupful of tepid water usually produces quick vomiting. If the poison is of an unknown origin, emetics, bland liquids and stimulants, together with suitable systematic treatment, is indicated. General Directions. DENTAL FORMULARY 231 Acetic, Hydrochloric, Nitric, Nitro-hydrochloric and Sulphuric Acids. No emetic should be given. To dilute and neutralize the acid, milk mixed with chalk, whiting, magnesia, or baking soda, strong soap suds, or white of egg beaten up with water, is given; later oil and mucilaginous drinks of flaxseed or slippery elm are indicated. Usually intense ulceration follows the acid burns. To relieve pain, morphine sulphate j grain (0.015 gm.), or tincture of opium, 15 drops (1 cc), is administered. Hydrocyanic Acid and All Cyanides, Alcohol, Chloroform, Ether, Chloral Hydrate, Gasoline, Carbon Bisulphide and Sulphurets of the Alkalies. Hydrocyanic acid and cyanides require very prompt measures; they are quick and powerful poisons. Emetics may be given if necessary. The patient is put in a recum- bent position, the head lowered and plenty of fresh air for free respiration. Persistent artificial respiration should be instituted if needed. Keep the body warm and try to arouse the patient with ammonia vapors; put cold douches to his head and apply friction to the extremities. Strong stimulants—whisky, nitroglycerin solution in \ drop doses, etc.—are indicated. Give chalk or whiting mixed with two tablespoonfuls of vinegar and an equal quantity of water; do not give soda or potash with the object of neutralizing the acid. Vomiting should be induced at once and followed by olive oil or mucilaginous drinks. General stimulants—whisky, etc.—and warmth applied to the extremities are essential. Oxalic Acid and Its Salts. Phenol (Carbolic Acid) and Its Compounds, Cresol, Creosote, Lysol and Resorcinol. Induce vomiting and give large quantities of diluted whisky or magnesium sulphate solution in the early stages. Remember that alcohol is not a chemical antidote for phenol or its compounds. Later give bland liquids, olive oil and general stimulants as required. 232 DENTAL FORMULARY Promote vomiting by large draughts of warm water. Mild acids in the form of diluted vinegar or lemon juice are indicated, which should be followed by olive oil, white of egg beaten up with water and mucilaginous drinks. Severe pain calls for morphine sulphate, \ grain (0.015 gm.) or tincture of opium, 15 drops (1 cc). Caustic Alkalies and Ammonia. Arsenic and Its Compounds. Promote vomiting with large draughts of warm water and administer at once hydrated oxide of iron (the official antidote for arsenic) or dialyzed iron. The official antidote may be prepared extemporaneously by mixing a teaspoonful of calcined magnesia with a cupful of water, add 3 teaspoonfuls of tincture of iron chloride, mix well and give the whole of it at once. This is to be followed with olive oil, white of egg beaten up with water and mucilaginous drinks. Antimony Salts, Copper, Iodine and Its Preparations, Mercury Salts, Potassium Bichromate, Tartar Emetic, Tin and Its Salts, Colchicum, Cantharides and the Oils of Croton, Savin and Pansy. Induce vomiting and it is usually produced by the metallic salts themselves. Give large draughts of raw white egg (about half dozen or more) beaten up with water, or flour stirred in water, strong tea or coffee and general stimulants. To relieve pain and tenesmus, morphine sulphate, f grain (0.015 gm.) is indicated. Give magnesium sulphate, 4 drams (15 gm.) or sodium sulphate, 1 ounce (30 gm.), dissolved in a large tumblerful of water. Promote vomiting by warm water or with mustard and follow with milk and demulcent drinks. Pain is relieved by morphine sulphate, l grain (0.015 gm.) or tincture of opium, 15 drops (1 cc). Barium and Lead Salts. DENTAL FORMULARY 233 Silver Nitrate. Give common salt, one-half tablespoonful dissolved in a tumblerful of warm water and induce vomiting; later, large draughts of demulcent drinks—starch, flaxseed or slippery elm stirred in water—are indicated. Phosphorus (Rat Paste, Etc.). Give a prompt emetic—-copper sulphate, 3 grains (0.03 gm.), dissolved in a tumblerful of water—every five minutes. Old, thick oil of turpentine in 1-dram (4 cc) doses, suspended in flour water and repeated every hour, is much lauded. Do not give oils or fats. Milk of magnesia is often beneficial. When indicated give general stimulants. Atropine, Cocaine, Gelsemine, Pilocarpine and All Preparations Containing These Alkaloids. Induce vomiting, give large draughts of warm water, strong coffee and tea and general stimulants. If the patient is drowsy, rouse him with ammonia vapors; apply heat to the extremities and institute artificial respiration if necessary. Aconite, Cotton Root, Digitalis, Ergot, Lobelia, Tobacco, Veratrum and Preparations Containing These Substances. Give an emetic, which should be followed by large draughts of warm water, strong tea or coffee. Keep the patient in a horizontal position, apply warmth and friction to the extremities and use artificial respiration if needed. Opium and Its Preparations, Morphine and Its Salts and Indian Hemp. If necessary, vomiting should be induced. Give strong tea or coffee and large draughts of warm water. Keep the patient awake and, if possible, in motion. A cold douche is beneficial. Strychnine sulphate, grain (0.002 gm.) and atropine sulphate, -yg-y grain (0.0006 gm.), administered hypodermically, are often of benefit. Per- sistent artificial respiration should be kept up, even after life seems to be extinct. 234 DENTAL FORMULARY Nux Vomica and Its Preparations, Strychnine and Its Salts and Fish- berries (Cocculus Indicus). Induce vomiting, followed by large draughts of warm water, and give tannic acid in 1 per cent solution or iodide of starch. Spasms are relieved by inhalation of chloroform or by chloral hydrate, 15 grains (1 gm.), dissolved in a tumblerful of water. Evacuate the bowels and give the patient absolute rest. Formaldehyde and Its Solutions. Give ammonia in very diluted solutions and demulcent drinks. General stimulants should be given when indicated. Give immediately a tablespoonful of common salt, dis- solved in a large tumblerful of warm water, and repeat with strychnine sulphate, yg- grain (0.002 gm.), hypo- dermically and give strong coffee or tea. Wood Alcohol. Decayed Meat or Vegetables. These materials are often productive of ptomaine poison- ing. Induce vomiting and cleanse the bowels with full doses of castor oil. Strong stimulants and heat and friction applied to the extremities are beneficial. Poisonous Fungi. Evacuate the stomach as quickly as possible by promptly acting emetics. Give atropine sulphate, grain (0.0006 gm.), hypodermically and tannic acid in the form of strong tea or coffee. URINE ANALYSIS. Urine analysis as an aid in diagnosticating certain dental diseases is an essential adjunct to the clinical examination of the patient. Oral manifestation of typical general dis- eases—as diabetes, gout, autointoxication, etc.—are often the first pathognomonic signs of these diseases. The cor- rect diagnosis of the latter is verified by a urine analysis and the patient may be surprised to learn that the presence DENTAL FORMULARY 235 of an odor of acetone from the oral cavity, together with the formation of pericemental abscesses and the rapid accumulation of soft white calcareous deposits about the teeth should be indicative of diabetes, of which he has no knowledge at the time. The presence of sugar in the urine will verify the diagnosis. A urine analysis is also of im- portant value to the dental practitioner if he intends to administer a general anesthetic—chloroform or ether—to a patient. For the foregoing purposes an exhaustive examina- tion of the urine is not necessary; it is merely intended to ascertain by a few simple tests the presence or absence of albumin, of sugar, of the approximate amount of uric acid, etc. The determination of these substances may also indicate if the assistance of the family physician is desired in the treatment of the case under observation. An intelli- gent report made to the physician will not merely insure the cooperation of the latter, but may also assist in bringing about a better understanding and a much desired closer relationship of the two professions. The normal quantity of urine voided in twenty-four hours varies from 40 to 50 ounces (1200 to 1500 cc). Free perspiration decreases the quantity, while chilling of the skin increases it. The greatest portion of urine is passed during the day; during the night and the early morning hours the portion is passed. Usually the urine has a light, amber color, due to urobilin; the color depends, however, largely on the quantity voided. On standing, nearly all normal urine assumes a cloudy appearance, which is due to the presence of mucus. The normal reaction of urine is slightly acid, due to uric acid, hippuric acid, or acid sodium phosphate. After meals the reaction may be neutral or even alkaline for a short time. The normal specific gravity varies from 1.015 to 1.025; it is low when an increased amount is passed and high when the quantity is diminished. Normal urine has a peculiar, aromatic odor; it is altered by certain foods or drugs—asparagus and oil of turpentine produce a violet-like odor, garlic gives a garlic-like odor, etc. The solid constituents of urine consist of organic and inorganic compounds and they vary very markedly. The 236 DENTAL FORMULARY solids held in solution by and excreted with the urine within twenty-four hours amount to approximately: 308 to 617 grains (20 to 40 gm.) urea. 6 to 12 grains (0.36 to 0.78 gm.) uric acid. 9 to 14 grains(0.54 to 0.90 gm.) ammonium, calcium, magnesium, potassium and sodium urate. 12 to 45 grains (0.72 to 2.9 gm.) sodium phosphate. 154 to 237 grains (10 to 25 gm.) sodium chloride. General Examination. For the examination of the urine the mixed total quan- tity voided during the twTenty-four hours or a part thereof should be submitted. The preliminary inspection begins with the color of the sample; the latter may be expressed as pale straw, straw, pale amber, amber, dark amber, red- dish amber, etc., or after Vogel’s scale of colors. It should not be forgotten that certain drugs which are taken internally may impart a distinctive color to the urine—santonin produces an intense yellow color, which changes to red or purple when alkalies are added; methylene blue produces a blue color, etc. The odor is recognized as normal aromatic, as ammonical or as putrid; the reaction is obtained with sensitive litmus paper. The specific gravity is readily determined by the urinometer, the specific gravity bottle, or by the specific gravity beads. If it is above 1.025, sugar in appreciable quantities may be expected. The instruments used for this work are usually corrected to conform to a temperature of 60° F (15° C.). If the temperature is above or below this standard 1° of the urinometer has to be re- spectively added or subtracted for every 5° F. (2.8° C.). Serum albumin is the most often tested for of any con- stituent of the urine, and of the many tests which have been proposed the following are to be preferred. No single test is sufficient. 1. Heat Test.—Boil the urine in a test-tube; when an opalescence appears it indicates the presence of albumin Tests for Albumin. DENTAL FORMULARY 237 or an excess of phosphate. If a few drops of nitric acid are now added the cloudiness will disappear if due to phosphate, but will remain permanently if due to albumin. 2. Purdy's Modified Heat Test.—Fill the test-tube three- quarters full with urine and add saturated sodium chloride solution to fill the tube; now add 2 or 3 drops of strong acetic acid and, holding the tube in the fingers by its bottom, heat the upper layer of the fluid until the mixture boils; then, without shaking the tube or its contents, examine the layer of fluid in the upper part of the tube, comparing its degree of transparency with that of the fluid that was not heated in the lower part of the tube. If the heated portion of the fluid is in the slightest degree hazy or less transparent, albumin is present. 3. Heller’s Nitric Acid Test.—A test-tube is filled to the depth of one-half inch with nitric acid, and while being held in an inclined position, the clear (filtered, if necessary) acid is allowed to trickle slowly down the inside surface from a medicine dropper, so as to form a superimposed layer on the acid. An opalescent ring at the junction of the two liquids indicates albumin. Excess of urates, mucus, etc., sometimes gives rings resembling those of albumin, but on close observation these rings will be seen to be slightly above in the column of urine instead of at the bottom of contact. Tests for Sugar. Sugar occurs less frequently in the urine than albumin, and is usually present in urine having a very high specific gravity—above 1.025. If a sample of the urine contains albumin, it should always be removed by boiling and filtering before any of the tests for sugar are applied. 1. Fehling’s Copper Test.—Equal volumes of the ordinary Felding’s solutions are mixed in a test-tube and heated to the boiling point; if no reduction occurs, the solution may be considered safe, and the urine is now added drop by drop to the boiling Fehling’s solution until an orange color or reddish precipitate forms, or until a volume of urine equal to that of the copper solution has been added. If there is no precipitate of orange or reddish cuprous oxide, sugar may 238 DENTAL FORMULARY be considered absent. Simple discharging of the color of the formation of various bluish-gray precipitates must not be mistaken for a true reduction. 2. Trommer’s Modified Copper Test.—Place one inch of urine in a test-tube and add one-half inch of potassium hydroxide solution, U. S. P., to the urine. Mix the two fluids by shaking the tube and add 2 or 3 drops of a 5 per cent solution of copper sulphate in distilled water. Do not heat the mixture, but allow the tube to stand undis- turbed for twelve to twenty-four hours in the cold. At the expiration of that time, if sugar be present, there will be collected in the tube an ochre-yellow to brick-red precipi- tate of fine sand-like character of suboxide of copper. Quantitative Estimation of Sugar. The quantity of sugar in urine is very conveniently and quickly estimated by using “ soloid”1 tablets of copper sulphate and alkaline tartrate. It is based on Fehling’s re- duction test as follows: Prepare a standard test solution by dissolving four “ soloids” copper sulphate in about 2 cc of distilled water and in this solution also dissolve 4 “soloids” alkaline tartrate, then adjust to 4 cc at 15° C. Each cubic centimeter corresponds to 0.005 gram of anhydrous glucose. It may be found more convenient to dilute the above measure of 4 cc with an equal volume of water, when each cubic centimeter of diluted test solution will correspond to 0.0025 gm. of anhydrous glucose. Make a rough estimation by adding the urine to a definite volume of the boiling test solution in such quantity that, after boiling and allowing the precipitate to subside, the blue color of the reagent is just discharged. Now dilute the urine (if necessary) until it contains 0.5 to 1 per cent of sugar and make an accurate estimation with the diluted urine. Tests for Uric Acid. The presence of an excess of uric acid or of urates is usually readily detected by the physical appearance of the 1 “Soloid” tablets are made by Burroughs Wellcome & Co., of London and New York. DENTAL FORMULARY 239 urine itself. If the urine has stood in a vessel from three to four hours and a sediment of red sand (“brick dust deposit”) is seen in the bottom of the vessel, it usually points to an excessive excretion of urates. The urates are more soluble in hot water than in cold water and consequently the urine may be clear on voiding, but after becoming cold may deposit quite a sediment. The amorphous urates readily dissolve on warming. Under the microscope uric acid appears as whetstone-shaped crystals, which are some- times arranged in rosettes. These crystals are usually of a yellowish-red color. 1. Hopkin’s Test.—To 100 cc of urine add 33 gm. of ammonium chloride. Shake or stir until it dissolves and then allow to stand in a cool place for three or four hours. Collect the precipitated ammonium urate on a filter and wash with saturated ammonium chloride solution until the filtrate is clean. Spread out the filter on a square glass plate and wash the precipitate down over one corner of the plate and into a beaker or flask with hot The contents of the beaker are now heated to boiling with an excess (10 cc) of hydrochloric acid and allowed to stand in a cool place for several hours (not less than three), when the uric acid will crystallize out. This is collected on a small filter (the volume of the filtrate being noted) and washed slightly with cold water. Wash off the filter into a flask with hot water, enough sodium carbonate solution being added to dissolve the uric acid, the volume is made up to 100 cc with water, 20 cc of sulphuric acid are added and a decinormal potassium permanganate solution run in from a burette until a faint pink coloration remains one minute after shaking. Each cubic centimeter of decinormal permanganate equals 0.007 gm. of uric acid, to which must be added 0.001 gm. for each 15 cc of the filtrate before noted. 2. Murexid Test.—Evaporate to dryness at a low heat over an alcohol lamp a few drops of urine in a watch crystal, add a drop or two of nitric acid and again cautiously evapo- rate to dryness. A red residue will remain. Now add a drop or two of ammonia solution without at first letting it come directly in contact with the residue. The formation 240 DENTAL FORMULARY of inurexid, which is shown by a beautiful purple color (purpurate of ammonia), indicates uric acid or urates. Test for Indican. Salkowski’s Test.—Eight cubic centimeters of urine with 1 cc of a 10 per cent copper sulphate solution are mixed with an equal volume of hydrochloric acid of a specific gravity of 1.19. A few cubic centimeters of chloroform are added and the mixture inverted a number of times. The indican (indol-potassium sulphate) having been split up, the chloro- form extracts the resulting indigo and takes on the charac- teristic blue color. The quantity is estimated by the depth of the blue color. If the urine contains albumin, it must be removed before applying this test; otherwise the blue color often arising from the admixture of hydrochloride acid after standing may prove misleading. (Purdy.) Strauss’ Test—The urine is acidulated with acetic acid and cleared by the addition of one-fourth of its volume of 10 per cent lead acetate solution and filtrate. The filtrate is then shaken with amyl alcohol, the urobilin being thus extracted, as is shown by the yellow to deep orange color. The addition of ammonious zinc chloride causes a fluorescence. Urobilin in very small quantities is present in the healthy urine. Test for Urobilin. SALIVA ANALYSIS. (After Dr. Henry C. Ferris.) History of chronic diseases. Description of teeth and character of caries. Amount of saliva. Normal average, 60 cc per hour; 20 cc required for examination. Consistence: Report sticky, thick or thin. Odor: Ammoniacal, sweet, sour, etc. Specific gravity: Normal 1.002. DENTAL FORMULARY 241 Precipitate: Centrifuge entire amount and record in terms of centrifuge scale. Then take 5 cc of this and dilute with an equal quantity of distilled water, which will become cloudy if globulin is present. Centrifuge again and record amount of globulin. Pour off supernatant fluid again in the centrifuge tube; add four drops of glacial acetic acid, which precipitates the mucin. Pour off supernatant fluid and add 1 cc of 10 per cent solution potassium ferrocyanide; if albumin be present specimen will become cloudy. Centri- fuge as before and record quantity of albumin. Enzymic action: Take immediately upon delivery. Make 2 per cent solution of starch paste, according to the following directions: Mix starch with half the quantity of cold water and let stand for five minutes; then add the rest of the water and boil for ten minutes. Take 5 cc of this solution in test-tube and place in incubator at temperature of 55° C., to which add \ cc saliva, let stand for one minute and boil to kill action of enzyme. Centrifuge and read scale, which will give percentage of reduction of starch to dextrin. To determine further the product of the reaction, take 2 cc of the clear solution and add 1 cc of iodine solution N/250. If starch is present the reaction will be deep violet (iodide of starch); if a light violet, it indicates a partial reduction of starch, or erythrodextrin; a colorless result indicates complete reduction of starch to dextrin. Proteolytic test: 1 cc Fehling copper solution. 5 cc Fehling alkaline. 94 cc sodium carbonate solution. Dissolve in the solution 1 decigram casein C. P. Take 5 cc of the above and place in the incubator at temperature of 50° to 55° C.; then add | cc saliva, if there is a strong proteolytic action in a few seconds, the color turns to pink; if it is of medium action to violet; if no action, to a dirty blue color. The first represents peptones; second, albuminose; third, unsplit casein. 242 DENTAL FORMULARY Oxydase Test. Take 1 cc saliva, 4 cc distilled water, 12 drops of a 10 per cent solution of sulphuric acid, then mix and add drop by drop 0.5 per cent aqueous solution of metaphenylene- diamin. If there is no oxydase, it stays without color. If there is an oxydase, there is formed triaminphenylin, which makes the solution strongly yellow. Test for Acid Index. Should be ascertained as soon as specimen is delivered. Use . 1/40 normal sodium hydrate solution in 5 cc buret. The degree of acidity is obtained by taking 5 cc of saliva and adding 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution, neutral, then drop by drop 1/40 normal solution sodium hydrate until a rose color is produced. Having noted on paper the number of cc of the sodium hydrate solution in the buret before and after the rose color is obtained, the number of cc displaced multiplied by 20 and divided by 4 (in order to find the number of cc sodium hydrate solution necessary to reduce 100 cc saliva) equal the degree of acidity. Normal being alkaline. To attain a more accurate result add 1 cc of 1/10 normal hjrdrochloric acid solution and boil to drive off the carbonic acid; titrate as before and subtract the acid index of the hydrochloric acid from result. Test for Alkalinity. Proceed as above, substituting 1/40 normal hydrochloric acid for sodium hydrate and methyl orange for phenol- phthalein and titrate. Ammonia or Organic Matter. Take cc saliva and 1 drop phenolphthalein solution and titrate it with sodium hydrate solution to a feeble pink color. The used cc of the sodium hydrate solution gives the acidity in relation to phenolphthalein. Take formalin and put in 1 drop phenolphthalein solution and titrate it with NaOH solution to a feeble pink color. DENTAL FORMULARY 243 Now both solutions are neutral or feebly alkaline to phenolphthalein; but if you put 1 cc of this neutralized formalin to the neutralized saliva the pink color disappears, because the ammonia is used up by the formalin. Now titrate a second time with yy sodium hydrate until the reappearance of the pink color. This amount corresponds to the amount of ammonia. Multiply the cc by 0.017 and you have the percentage of ammonia in the saliva. Proof: 2\ cc and yy has the same relation as 100: y; therefore, the amount of grams in the amount of cc normal solution (instead of used yy sodium hydrate solution) gives the per- centage. Ammonia has the atomic weight of 17, therefore 1 cc normal solution corresponds to 0.017 per cent and any amount of cc used must be multiplied by 0.017 per cent. Sulfocyanate Test. Use colorimetric scale (Eimer & Amend), 1 cc of specimen in tube A, 1 cc of 1:2000 ammonia sulfocyanate in tube B; add 2 drops of 5 per cent ferric chloride to each tube, add distilled water until color in B matches that of specimen. Read scale in thousandths and ten thousandths. Care must be taken to have the bottom of the meniscus on the line. Chlorine. To 1 cc of specimen add 2 or 3 drops of potassium bichro- mate 1 per cent solution; then titrate with yy silver nitrate solution until a light brick-red color is attained. Multiply the buret cc used by 0.3545. The result will show the amount of chlorine. Urea. To attain the amount of urea, use a Ferris’ modified Doremus ureometer, supplied by Eimer & Amend, New York. Tube A is washed with water and filled with hypo- bromite solution; close the stopper and fill tube B with 1 ec of specimen; open the stopper, allow specimen to enter tube A and close stopper. After all bubbles of gas have dis- appeared, the reading is taken. The degrees marked upon 244 DENTAL FORMULARY the tube are divided into 0.025 and represent the number of grams or grains of urea contained in the amount of saliva employed. (The normal relation between the chlorine and the urea in the urine is 1:2). Acetone. In 4 drops of specimen dissolve a crystal of potassium carbonate, then add a drop of Gram’s reagent. An odor of iodoform indicates acetone. (Care must be taken not to confound the odor of iodine in Gram’s reagent with that of iodoform.) To mount slide and examine with microscope for crystals of iodoform is best test. Total Solids and Ash. To obtain total solids cleanse and weigh a platinum dish, into which place 2 cc of specimen. Dry in the incubator at 100° C. from two to three hours. Care should be taken that it does not turn too black. Weigh again and add to this 2 or 3 drops of fuming nitric acid. Evaporate the acid and burn it white. Weigh again. The first gives the total of solids and the second the amount of ash. Note A.—To determine the percentage of chlorine in total solids, you multiply the chlorine by 110 and divide by total solids. Note B.—In urine the normal amount of chlorine is 15 per cent of total solids and it is reduced in pathological states. DIAGNOSTIC HINTS. Frequency of Pulse. At birth 130-150 times a minute At the first year . . . 100-130 “ At the seventh year . . 72- 90 “ At the time of puberty . 80- 85 “ At middle life .... 69- 75 “ At old age 50- 60 “ “ At the first year .... 35 times a minute At the second year ... 25 “ During time of puberty . . 20 “ Above twenty years of age . 18 “ Frequency of Respiration. DENTAL FOBMULARY 245 Temperature of the Body. Normal temperature . . . . 97|- F. Feverishness 99 -100° F. Slight fever 100 -1010 F. Moderate fever 102 -103° F. High fever 104 -105° F. Intense fever 105 F. Comparison Between Temperature and Pulse. A temperature of 98° F. corresponds to a pulse of 60 « « u 990 p « << u 79 “ “ “ 100° F. “ “ “ 80 u u u 101o p u « it 90 “ “ “ 102° F. “ “ “ 100 “ “ “ 103° F. “ “ “ 110 “ “ “ 104° F. “ “ “ 120 “ “ “ 105° F. “ “ “ 130 “ “ “ 106° F. “ “ “ 140 CHAPTER IX. MISCELLANEOUS.1 REMEDIES FOR THE TEETH. Beeswax 16 parts Lard 4 “ Oil of clove 8 “ Creosote 8 “ Melt the wax and lard, when cool add the oil of clove and the creosote and sufficient cross-cut cotton to saturate it thoroughly with the mixture. Roll into small sticks, wrap in paraffin paper and place in vials. Toothache Gum. Chloral hydrate 1 part Menthol 1 “ Gum camphor 2 parts Eugenol 2 “ Rub together until a syrupy liquid is obtained. Toothache Drops. Toothache Sticks. Beeswax 8 parts Phenol 6 “ Eugenol 1 part Melt the wax and add the phenol and the eugenol. While still liquid immerse thin layers of absorbent cotton in the 1 Under this heading pharmaceutical and technical formulas and preparations are enumerated, which may be more or less useful. They actually represent in part many of the inquiries which were received by the author from dental practitioners. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formvlary mean quantities by weight. 246 DENTAL FORMULARY 247 fluid and when sufficiently cool roll them into the shape of rods. For use snip off a little piece, warm it gently and introduce into the cavity of the tooth. Gum copal 10 parts . Gum mastic 20 “ Chloroform 50 “ Tannic acid 5 “ Oil of clove 5 “ Dissolve the gum mastic and copal in the chloroform and add the other ingredients. Apply on a ball of cotton. Toothache Cement. Tooth Polish for the Removal of Stains. Acid potassium tartrate 1 part Pumice stone 1 “ Orris root 250 parts Muse I part Cumarin 1 “ Vanillin 5 parts Oil of rose 5 “ Oil of orange, sweet 5 “ Oil of peppermint 5 “ Oil of spearmint 5 “ Oil of ylang-ylang 2 “ Extract of licorice, enough to make a solid mass. Divide into pluglets of about one grain each. Mouth Cachou. REMEDIES FOR THE HAIR AND SCALP. Resorcinol 1 part Compound tincture of cinchona ... 4 parts Bay rum, enough to make . . . . 64 “ Apply to scalp twice a day. Hair Tonic for Oily Hair. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities bv weight. 248 DENTAL FORMULARY Hair Tonic for Dry Hair. Betanaphthol \ part Balsam of Peru 5 parts Castor oil 10 “ Alcohol 100 “ Oil of bergamot “ Apply to scalp twice a day. Pilocarpine hydrochloride 3 parts Lanolin 350 “ Cold cream, enough to make . . . 1000 “ Apply to scalp daily. Alopecia Ointment. Shampoo Powders. 1. Powdered quillaja 12 parts Camphor 1 part Borax 50 parts Sodium carbonate, dried 25 “ Oil of rosemary 2 “ 2. Powdered soap .16 parts Dried sodium carbonate 8 “ Borax 4 “ Oil of rosemary 1 part Castile soap, powder 2 parts Tincture of benzoin 10 “ Castor oil 20 “ Alcohol 180 “ Oil of bergamot \ part Brilliantine. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 249 Eau de Quinine. Quinine hydrochloride 4 parts Tannic acid 10 “ Alcohol 850 “ Tincture of cantharides 10 “ Glycerin 60 “ Eau de Cologne 40 “ Vanillin y1 part Red saunders wood f “ Filter after a week’s standing. Bay Rum. Oil of allspice 1 part Oil of orange 1 “ Oil of Bay 5 parts West Indian Rum (Santa Cruz) . . . 200 “ Alcohol 400 “ Water 400 “ Talc 20 “ Dissolve the oils in the alcohol, add the rum and finally the water and the talc. Allow the mixture to stand, with occasional agitation, during five to six days and then filter, returning the first portions of the filtrate until it passes through clear. Barium sulphide, fresh 2 parts Zinc oxide 3 “ Corn starch 3 “ Mix with water into a paste, spread on the hairy parts with a wooden spatula, and when dry, wash off with warm water. Depilatory Compound. Vermilion 1 part Yellow beeswax 8 parts Rosin 16 “ Melt on a water-bath, stir well and pour in suitable moulds. Depilatory Pencil. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 250 DENTAL FORMULARY Hair Dyes. 1. Solution A. Silver nitrate 2 parts Distilled water 15 “ Keep in amber-colored bottle. Solution B. Copper sulphate, C. P f part Distilled water 10 parts Ammonia water 6 “ Add equal parts of solution A to B when needed. Apply with a soft toothbrush, comb the hair thoroughly and expose to sunlight for ten minutes. 2. Solution A. Silver nitrate 10 parts Distilled water 240 “ Ammonia water .♦ 5 “ Solution B. Pyrogallic acid 4 parts Tannic acid 2 “ Acetic acid, diluted 8 “ Distilled water 240 “ Mix equal parts of solutions A and B when needed and apply as above. If black stains about the skin should result from accidental contact with the dye, they may be removed with the following solution. Potassium iodide 2 parts Distilled water 16 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 251 REMEDIES FOR THE SKIN AND THE HANDS. Lanolin 25 parts Glycerin 35 “ Borax 5 “ Oil of geranium 1 part Hand Cream. Greaseless Toilet Cream. Gum tragacanth 2 parts Water 125 “ Glycerin 8 “ Tincture of benzoin 2 “ Borax 2 “ White rose extract, enough to perfume. Macerate the tragacanth in the water until it is perfectly soft. Dissolve the borax in the glycerin. Mix the two solutions, add the tincture and the perfume and press through muslin. Stearic acid 3 parts Cocoa butter | part Sodium carbonate, pure 2 parts Borax;, powdered \ part Glycerin 2\ parts Water 40 “ Mucilage of tragacanth 10 “ Alcohol 3 “ Perfume, enough to suit. Dissolve the borax and sodium carbonate in the water and add this solution, with the glycerin and mucilage to the cocoa butter and stearic acid contained in a vessel on a water-bath. Heat the whole together until effervescence ceases, allow to cool, then add the perfume dissolved in the alcohol and beat until the mass stiffens. Heat again and beat until it becomes creamy and fluffy. Massage Creams. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 252 DENTAL FORMULARY Gum tragaeanth, in fine powder ... I part Boric acid 1 “ Glycerin 5 parts Water 32 “ Perfume, enough to suit. Hand Lotion. Skin Food. White wax 4 parts Spermaceti 4 “ Cocoanut oil 8 “ Lanolin 8 “ Oil of sweet almonds 16 “ Melt together in a porcelain capsule, remove from fire and add: Orange flower water 8 parts Tincture of benzoin \ part Briskly beat until a perfect cream is obtained. Borax 16 parts Potassium carbonate 2 “ Dissolve in hot water and add: Glycerin 16 parts Eau de Cologne 16 “ Tincture of benzoin 4 “ Essence of violet 4 “ Rose water, enough to make .... 125 “ A teaspoonful to be added to a basin of warm water. Skin Lotion. Almond Meal Compound. Almond meal 25 parts Orris root, powdered 5 “ Borax 3 “ Castile soap powder 2 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 253 Fingernail Bleach. Sodium perborate 2 parts Cornstarch 2 “ Make into a paste with water and apply to the nails. After drying wash off with warm water and polish with putty powder. Nail Polish. Precipitated chalk 50 parts Putty powder 150 “ Carmine 1 part Perfume to suit Hand-Cleaning Pastes. 1. Extract of quillaja 2 parts Borax 1 part Fuller’s earth 1 “ Soft soap 1 “ Perfume q. s. Triturate the borax with the extract of quillaja and afterward with Fuller’s earth; then incorporate with the soft soap and sufficient water to form a paste. Lastly perfume as desired. 2. Domestic soap, dried and rasped . . . 750 parts Sodium carbonate, crystallized . . . 20 “ Hot water 120 “ Heat upon the water-bath until soft; thoroughly mix. Then add: Pulverized pumice stone 200 parts Pulverized talc 50 “ Perfume, enough to suit N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 254 DENTAL FORMULARY Shaving Cream for Collapsible Tubes. Curd soap 8 parts Spermaceti | part Oil of almonds 2 parts Glycerin 1 part Potassium carbonate \ “ Water 16 parts Cut the soap into shreds and dissolve on a water-bath in 14 parts of water. Dissolve the spermaceti in the almond oil and while warm mix it with the glycerin, potassium carbonate and remainder of the water. Transfer to a warm mortar, gradually incorporate the warm soap solution and continue to stir until a smooth paste is obtained. Incor- porate any suitable perfume. For Barber’s Itch. Tannic acid 2 parts Gum camphor 2 “ Alcohol 10 “ Ether 10 “ 1.—Borax Soap Powder. Soap 5 parts Sodium hydroxide 3 “ Sodium silicate 2 “ Sodium borate 1 part Soap Powder Cleansers. 2. Soap 6 parts Sodium hydroxide 2 “ Pearlash 1 part Sodium sulphate 1 “ 3.—Dry Soap Powder. Desiccated hard soap 28 parts Sodium carbonate (crystals) . . . . 68 “ Anhydrous boric acid 1 part Boron nitride 1 “ Ammonium chloride 1 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by Weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 255 Liquid Soap. Sodium hydrate 32 parts Potassium hydrate 200 “ Cotton-seed oil 400 “ Alcohol 200 “ Distilled water 2000 “ In a suitable container, preferably a glass-stoppered bottle, dissolve the sodium hydrate and the potassium hydrate in 250 parts of distilled water, add the alcohol, and then add the cotton-seed oil in 3 or 4 portions, shaking vigorously after each addition. Continue to agitate the mixture occasionally until saponification has been completed; then add the remaining portion of distilled water and mix. The only precautions that are at all necessary is to use U. S. P. grade of ingredients, and to be sure that saponification is complete before adding the remaining portion of the distilled water. Soft soap 16 parts Ammonia water 1 part Finely levigated pumice stone ... 6 parts Oil of turpentine 2 “ Hand Cleansers for Motorists. Eau de Cologne. Oil of bergamot 8 parts Oil of lemon 4 “ Oil of rosemary 4 “ Oil of neroli . 2| “ Oil of lavender 2 “ Oil of sweet orange peel .... \ part Acetic ether \ “ Acetic acid, diluted “ Alcohol 850 parts Orange flower water, enough to make 1000 “ Mix and age at least a month before filtering. N. B,—Part,a a?) used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 256 DENTAL FORMULARY Lavender Water. Oil of lavender, English 3 parts Oil of bergamot 1 part Tincture of ambergris 1 “ Alcohol 70 parts Water 30 “ Mix and age at least a month before filtering. English Smelling Salt. Ammonium carbonate 80 parts Ammonium chloride 20 “ Oil of lavender 4 “ Oil of lemon 2 “ Oil of bergamot 1 “ Alcohol 4 “ Glycerin 4 “ The salts are coarsely powdered and perfumed with the alcoholic solution of the oils; lastly add the glycerin. Keep in a well-stoppered bottle. SOLID ALCOHOL. Heat 1000 parts of denatured alcohol (90 per cent) in a flask of double the capacity on the water-bath to about 140 ° F., and then mix with 28 to 30 parts of well-dried rasped Castile soap and 2 parts of gum lac. After repeated shaking, complete dissolution will take place. The solution is put, while still warm, into metallic vessels, closing them up at once and allowing the mixture to cool therein. The admixture of gum lac effects a better preservation and also prevents the evaporation of the alcohol. On lighting the solid spirit the soap remains behind. DUSTING POWDERS FOR SORE FEET. 1. Salicylic acid 1 part Boric acid 2 parts Zinc oxide 2 “ Talc . • 10 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 257 2. Zinc stearate 2 parts Boric acid 4 “ Talc . ’ 16 “ LIQUID CORN REMEDY, „ Salicylic acid 12 parts Extract Indian hemp 2 “ Alcohol 10 “ Flexible collodion, enough to make . . 100 “ LIQUID WART REMEDY. Trichloracetic acid 5 parts Diluted alcohol 5 “ TREATMENT FOR BURNS AND SCALDS. Exclude air by thin paste of starch, flour, or baking soda. Ordinary oils such as vaseline, olive or castor oil, lard or cream may also be used. Lime water mixed with an equal part of raw linseed oil makes an excellent dressing. An especially valuable material for all burns is picric acid gauze which may be applied in the form of a compress. After treatment with any of the above materials, cover with a cloth or with cotton and hold in place with a light bandage. CARRON OIL FOR BURNS. Raw linseed oil 50 parts Lime water 50 “ Cresol 1 part Shake well before using. ACID AND ALKALI BURNS. With either, wash off as quickly as possible with a large quantity of water. Water from a tap may be allowed to flow over burns. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 258 DENTAL FORMULARY Acids. While the injury is being washed, have procured, lime water or lime water and raw linseed mixed together in equal proportions or a mixture of baking soda and water or soap suds and apply freely. For acid in the eye wash as quickly as possible with water and then with lime water. Wash with a large quantity of water as for acid burns. Neutralize with weak vinegar, hard cider or lemon juice. For lime or other strong alkali burns in the eye wash with a weak solution of vinegar or with olive oil or a saturated solution of boric acid. Alkalis. LUBRICANT FOR SYRINGE PISTONS, SOUNDS, ETC. Irish moss 1 part Gelatin 1 “ Phenol solution, 2 per cent .... 32 parts Macerate the first two ingredients in the phenol solution over night. Then heat the mixture, and while warm strain by squeezing through gauze. LUBRICANT FOR SURGEON’S RUBBER GLOVES. Gum tragacanth 8 parts Boric acid 4 “ Solution of formaldehyde 1 part Alcohol 32 parts Water 200 “ Oil of rose geranium, enough to suit. Dissolve the gum tragacanth in the water, in which the boric acid has previously been dissolved. Dissolve the oil in the alcohol, add the solution of formaldehyde and mix with the gum solution. Keep in well-stoppered wide-mouthed bottles. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 259 A SUBSTITUTE FOR RUBBER GLOVES 1. Celloidin 1 part Alcohol, 96 per cent 5 parts Castor oil \ part The hands are thoroughly cleansed with soap and hot water, dried, washed in alcohol and again dried. The above solution is now painted on the hands. It leaves an elastic coat. Washing in alcohol will remove it. 2. Pyroxylin (soluble cotton) . . . .If parts Amyl acetate 35 “ Canada turpentine 12 “ Castor oil 3 “ Cresol 1 part Acetone 100 parts Mix and agitate until dissolved. To remove this varnish from the hands a solvent con- sisting of equal volumes of acetone and denatured alcohol may be used. Powdered starch 2 parts Gelatin 2 “ Solution of potassium silicate . . . 60 “ Boric acid 1 part Mix the starch with the solution of silicate of potash by shaking from a pepper-box and stirring constantly until mixed. Dissolve the gelatin in 10 parts of warm water and add the solution to the mixture. Put into a jug of double the capacity and ferment at room or sun temperature for three or four days. Then add the boric acid, mix well, and it is ready for use. LIQUID SPLINT FOR THE FIXATION OF FRACTURES. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 260 DENTAL FORMULARY If too thick after standing, thin it with boiling water. Keep corked. Apply a silk stocking or roller bandage then a coat of the preparation with a brush, and repeat until three or four are applied or until the splint is thick enough. It may be cut after hardening and eyelets and laces put in. TO MAKE A PLASTER CAST FROM LIFE. The face is well covered with vaseline, the eyelashes and eyebrows are well buried in wet clay (antiphlogistine is serviceable) and well covered with wet tissue paper and smaller hairs smoothened down. Mustache, whiskers, etc., are coated with clay and oiled. Rubber tubing or quills are inserted into the nostrils for respiration. If the ear is embedded, stop it up with cotton and wax. Have the patient in a recumbent position and apply the well-mixed plaster with a spatula. Just before setting bury a stout string into the plaster corresponding to the long axis of the face. When hardened, cut the plaster by pulling the string, which facilitates the ready removal of the impression. The impression must be thoroughly set before the cast is made. Soak the impression in water and paint it with a separating medium. The cast has to set for at least two hours before separation is undertaken. PLASTIC COMPOUNDS FOR THE RESTORATION OF FACIAL DEFECTS. 1. Carpenter’s glue 9| parts Best molasses “ Glycerin 7 “ Soak the glue in water over night, pour off the excess and add the molasses and the glycerin. Melt on a water- bath under constant stirring. 2.—Pont. Gelatin, white 20 parts Carpenter’s glue, white 5 “ Water 25 “ Glycerin 62 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 261 Cut the gelatin and glue into small pieces, add the water and cover the vessel to prevent evaporation. Let stand over night. Now add the glycerin and heat on the water-bath, under constant stirring, until complete solution is obtained. To impart to the compound a natural flesh-tint is quite a difficult procedure and requires artistic skill. The most suitable color compounds are those known as artist’s water colors in tubes. The following list is serviceable for the purpose: Terra di Sienna, burnt Terra di Sienna, carmine, ultramarine, light or French ochre, ivory black and zinc oxide. According to Zinsser convenient emulsions of these colors for tinting the compound may be prepared by emptying the contents of the tubes into 1 ounce bottles and adding an equal amount of glycerin. Shake thoroughly before using. The average quantity of compound required for a nose necessitates from 20 to 30 drops of the zinc oxide emulsion, from 2 to 5 drops of the carmine emulsion, and very little of the ochre or Terra di Sienna. These emulsions are added to the melted compound and are thoroughly mixed with it by stirring with a glass rod. A few preliminary trials are necessary to obtain a close approximation of the facial color of the patient. The wax nose is carefully modelled over the plaster cast obtained from the facial impression. The wax nose thus obtained is taken from the model and on one side a thick layer of plaster is poured. The plaster is cut and shaped before it hardens, so as to give it as geometrical a shape as possible. It is coated with oil and a counter-die of plaster is poured so as to completely envelop the wax nose. One thus obtains a cast in two parts. It is sometimes necessary to make a cast in three parts. It only remains to take out the wax and pour the liquefied plastic compound, melted on a water-bath, into the mould through a vent-hole shaped like a funnel. As the compound slightly contracts on cooling, a surplus of material must be allowed. Only sufficient heat should be applied to melt the compound. Do not overheat N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 262 DENTAL FORMULARY it. The mould must be dusted with talc so as to prevent the plaster from sticking to the compound. Leave it to harden in a cool place for an hour, then separate the parts of the cast and take out the artificial nose. The surplus of the compound is cut away with scissors so as to leave the edges quite clean. It only then remains to fasten the prosthetic appliance in position with a suitable adhesive. The following varnish answers this purpose admirably well: Gum mastic 30 parts Canada balsam 5 “ Ether 30 “ Keep in a well-stoppered bottle. One coat of the varnish painted over the inside of the artificial substitute is quite sufficient; then put the appliance quickly on the skin. Level the edges with a warmed blunt instrument. It is useful to touch up slightly with a carmine pencil those parts which are naturally redder (as the interior of the nostrils, etc.) and to put on carefully a little face powder. The patient quickly learns not only to do this easily—but also to make his own nose. PRESERVING FLUID FOR ANATOMICAL SPECIMENS; KAISERLING. For preservation of colors of gross pathological specimens the following method gives satisfactory results: 1. Fix the tissue for one to five days in Kaiserling’s Fluid No. 1: Formaldehyde 200 parts Water 1000 “ Potassium nitrate 15 “ Potassium acetate 30 “ 2. Drain and place in 80 per cent alcohol from one to six hours. 3. Ninety-five per cent alcohol for one to two hours. 4. Preserve specimen in Kaiserling’s Fluid No. 3: N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 263 Potassium acetate 200 parts Glycerin 40 “ Water 2000 “ For display purposes the preparations preserved by these methods are often mounted permanently in gelatine. A jelly is made as follows: Finest French gelatin 40 parts Water 210 “ Glycerin 250 “ Carbolic acid crystals 5 “ Soak the gelatine in the water for two hours. Add the glycerin and the carbolic acid and warm for ten to fifteen minutes, stirring all the while until the mixture is smooth. It is advised to filter through the finest spun glass laid wet in a funnel. EMBALMING FLUID 1. Solution of formaldehyde 16 parts Phenol, liquid 4 “ Water 60 “ 2. Boric acid 2 parts Borax 5 “ Potassium nitrate 5 “ Glycerin 8 “ Solution of formaldehyde 22 “ Solution of eosin (1 per cent) . . . . t4q- part Water, to make 160 parts Dissolve the boric acid, borax and niter in 75 parts of water, then add the glycerin, formaldehyde, eosin and balance of the water. MULLER’S HARDENING FLUID Potassium bichromate 2 parts Sodium sulphate 1 part Distilled water 100 parts N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 264 DENTAL FORMULARY FLEMING FIXING FLUID. Osinic acid solution, 1 per cent ... 80 parts Chromic acid 1| “ Glacial acetic acid 10 “ Distilled water 200 “ HARD RUBBER CORROSIONS OF THE PULP CANALS OF TEETH. (After I)r. J. A. Brown.) The preparation of vulcanite corrosions of the pulp canals of teeth consists of the following distinct steps: 1. Removal of the contents of the canals. 2. Washing out and drying of the canals. 3. Packing the canals with vulcanizable rubber. 4. Investing the tooth in plaster of Paris and vulcanizing. 5. Removal from the investment and corroding the tooth in an acid. The process in detail is as follows: Making an opening into the pulp chamber of the tooth and with suitable broaches remove the contents of the canals. Wash and dry the tooth. Fill the canals, with a solution of vulcanizable rubber in chloroform and keep in a warm place until the chloroform has entirely evaporated. Now pack some more rubber into the pulp chamber, force it in the canals as far as possible with warm instruments. Before investing the teeth press a small roll of rubber into the pulp chamber by means of a hot spatula. The purpose of the extra roll of rubber is to force more material in the canals by the expansion of the rubber during the process of vulcanization. The flask should be vulcanized for an hour and thirty minutes at a temperature of 320° F. When cold remove the tooth from the investment, wash in water and place in 50 per cent hydrochloric acid, which corrodes the tooth substances, leaving a hard rubber cast of the canals and pulp chamber complete. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 265 CLEANING AND BLEACHING OF BONES. A skull in the flesh or one which, though dry, has been properly roughed out and dried will always make the best specimen. Roughing out, as the natural science collector would term it, is removing the skin and the major portion of the flesh from the skull. Care should be taken when working on the underside of the skull not to injure the often long and delicate styloid, hamular and other processes. With a flattened instrument, slightly bent at one end, remove all the brain substance possible. Place the roughed-out skull in a bucket of cold water, changing the water daily until it is no longer bloody. If it is not convenient to macerate the skull at this time take it from the water and place it in a shady place to dry. It can then be kept as long as desired and will have little or no odor. On the collecting grounds the skulls are treated in this way and can then be shipped to any point in safety. Roughed-out ligamentary skeletons—the skeletons of all smaller animals, reptiles and birds are of this kind— are soaked in an aqueous solution of arsenic for fifteen minutes to protect them from the ravages of insects which would otherwise destroy the ligaments by which the bones are held together when mounted. Skulls, of course, do not need this treatment. Skulls should never be buried in the soil or boiled in water to remove the flesh, as either method tends to set the blood in the bones and leave them dark and discolored. Placing them in an anthill and allowing the ants to remove the flesh will produce the same effect. Skulls exposed for a long time to the weather become dark and can rarely be whitened. Place the bucket containing the roughed-out specimens in a warm place and in summer, which is the best time to macerate, place in a sunny location, filling the bucket as the water evaporates. In winter a covered crock in a warm, sheltered nook will do, though the maceration process will be much slower. In Milan, Italy, where large numbers of skeletons are macerated yearly, pieces of horseflesh are N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 266 DENTAL FORMULARY thrown in the maceration tubs to hasten the decomposition. The time of maceration varies, being best in summer, slower in winter; fresh skulls in this climate in the summer requiring from six to eight weeks. When the skull has macerated sufficiently, remove it from the bucket and scrub it in clean water with a stiff brush until thoroughly cleansed. A scraper is often of great service in cleaning the skull cavity. Now take two gallons of water, bring it to the boiling point and add first two pounds of washing soda and then one pound of chloride of lime. Then, with a brush, wash the skull in this solution, commonly called Javelle water. The washing soda assists in removing the grease from the skull, while the chloride of lime bleaches the bones by means of the chlorine liberated. The length of time the skull is washed in this solution will depend on the strength of the solution and quality of the bone; strong, hard bones are not easily affected, while a delicate bone, left long in the solution, ceases to exist in its original form. After washing the skull in Javelle water the proper length of time, rinse thoroughly in clean water to remove any of the lime which may have been deposited and which, on drying, fills the small pits of the bone, giving it an unnatural, chalky appearance. Place the skull in the sunshine, when it soon becomes white. If, after two or three days, it is not as white as desired, again wash in Javelle water. If the skull shows signs of grease place it in a glass jar containing naphtha and allow it to remain in the sunshine, the jar to be covered with a glass plate to prevent the readily volatilized liquid from vaporizing. The skulls are placed in the sunshine as the warmth assists the action of the naphtha. The time needed to properly degrease skulls depends considerably on their size, the smaller ones being degreased more rapidly than a relatively larger skull. For small skeletons and skulls about two months would be the average length of time required. After removing from the naphtha again wash the bones in the Javelle solution, rinse in water and again place in N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 267 the sun to bleach. In many fresh skulls the bones show little or no signs of grease and do not need this treatment, and in large skulls and skeletons a special machine is needed, which, though doing the work quicker and using a much smaller amount of naphtha, is much more likely to injure the bones. The bones from the dissecting room, if strongly injected, seldom bleach perfectly, just why one cannot tell, the arsenic with which the subjects are injected being, no doubt, the cause. Bones of this sort often remain in maceration for a year and a half and then are very hard to clean, while fresh specimens would be fully cleaned in one-fourth of that time. In macerating skulls great care should be taken to prevent any brass or iron getting into the water, as the brass renders the bones of a greenish hue, which, as yet, nothing has been found that will remove. The iron rusts the bones and then they must be scrubbed in hot hydrochloric acid, washed in Javelle fluid, rinsed in clean water and bleached. THE SPALTEHOLZ METHOD OF PREPARING TRANSPARENT ANATOMICAL SPECIMENS. Fixing.—The fixing of the object may be readily accom- plished by using a weak formaldehyde solution; the official formaldehyde solution contains about 37 per cent of the gas dissolved in water. A suitable solution is made by adding 10 parts of formaldehyde solution to 90 parts of water. The object remains in the solution several days. Decalcifying.—As a decalcifying fluid, dilute hydrochloric acid is preferably employed. The process is started with a 2 per cent solution and followed by a 1 per cent solution until complete decalcification is accomplished. The acid should be used in quantities amounting to about forty to fifty times the volume of the object and it must be changed daily. The official hydrochloric acid contains 31.9 per cent by weight of absolute acid. A 2 per cent solution is prepared by adding N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 268 DENTAL FORMULARY 20 parts of the pure acid to 219 parts of water. To test the progress of decalcification, a fine steel (sewing) needle is thrust into the bone at its thickest portion; if the needle readily passes through the bone, the process is completed. Too many punctures should be avoided. Washing.—After complete decalcification, the specimen is washed in running water for a few hours and then remains immersed in water with frequent changes, for two or three days, or until the water reacts neutral to blue litmus paper. Bleaching. —Occasionally it is advisable to bleach a speci- men. The official hydrogen peroxide solution is satisfactorily employed for this purpose. It should be used undiluted and the specimen completely immersed in it for one to two hours. After bleaching, the specimen is again washed in running water. Dehydrating.— The removal of water from the tissue cells is best accomplished by immersing the decalcified specimen successively in alcohol of various grades. The process is started by using a mixture of equal volumes of alcohol, 95 per cent, and distilled water. After twenty-four hours a mixture of 2 volumes of alcohol, 95 per cent, and 1 of water is used, which, after twelve hours, is replaced by 95 per cent alcohol. Finally, the alcohol is changed to absolute alcohol and the specimen remains in it for twenty-four hours. A small quantity of well-burned unslaked lime may be added to the absolute alcohol to take up traces of water. The alcohol incidentally hardens or “fixes” the soft gelatinous specimen. Clearing.— Of the various clearing fluids, benzol or xylol act equally well. Both are hydrocarbons and are very inflammable. Benzol is the cheaper of the two. The clearing fluid has to be changed twice; the specimen remains in the first bath for twenty-four hours, or until complete penetration is accomplished. The fluid is then removed and the specimen is immersed in the second bath, charged with fresh benzol or xylol for two to three days. The clearing fluid may be preserved for future use, but only for N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 269 the first clearing; the second clearing always requires fresh benzol or xylol. Permanent Clearing and Preserving Fluid.—The final solution in which the specimen is permanently preserved is methyl salicylate, which is a hydrocarbon, whose index of refraction is equal, or nearly so, to that of the specimen. The specimen is transferred from the clearing fluid to the methyl salicylate as quickly as possible to prevent the air from entering into its cellular structure. If air bubbles have formed in the specimen, they may be removed by exhausting the air with a suction pump. It has been found that a very good quality of a light mineral oil, such as Nujol, for instance, makes an excellent permanent and inexpensive preserving fluid. After the specimen is placed in the final fluid, the container is covered with a layer of cheese-cloth to allow the benzol or xylol to evaporate and to keep out the dust, etc. Preserving Jars.— Specimen jars must be made of perfectly clear glass and have parallel sides. If possible, they should have a polished front. Round jars will distort the light rays and consequently disturb the image. The perfect sealing of the lid to the jar has offered many difficulties as the ordinary sealing materials, which are more or less of a resinous character, will be dissolved by the preserving fluid. Fish glue, coated over the edges and rendered insoluble by precipitating with chromic acid, has been found very serviceable. To insure success, it is imperative that the various steps of the process be carefully followed in rotation, and we, therefore, recapitulate them briefly. 1. Fixing of the dry or green specimen in a suitable solution. 2. Decalcifying. 3. Washing in running water. 4. Bleaching. 5. Second washing. 6. Dehydrating in graded alcohol. 7. Clearing in benzol or xylol. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 270 DENTAL FORMULARY 8. Permanent clearing in preserving fluid. 9. Evaporating the benzol or xylol and final sealing of the jar. Green or dry bones may be used with equally satisfactory results. The bones must be thoroughly cleansed of adhering soft tissue and washed with soap, water and brush before they are subjected to the treatment. In decalcifying a jaw with the teeth in position, the enamel of the teeth is naturally totally destroyed, while the organic matrix of the teeth and the bone remain intact. If it is intended to preserve the enamel of the teeth the crowns should be carefully coated with wax or paraffin before the preparation is subjected to the acid. Of course the remaining enamel cannot be made transparent. The pulps do not have to be removed from the teeth; they will be made perfectly transparent by the process. If it is desirous to show' the relation of the various canals in the specimen, we first inject with a colored gelatin solution, i. e., prior to decalcification. The gelatin is prepared by taking a sufficient quantity of the best quality French gelatin (Silver Label), and placing it in distilled water for twelve hours or until it is saturated. It is then pressed out by hand and melted in a porcelain dish on a water-bath. For coloring, vermilion, i. e., artificial cinnabar, is used in the proportions of 5 parts of vermilion to 25 parts of gelatin. The freshly prepared mixture has to be injected under pressure while hot. For this purpose we use a glass or hard rubber syringe heated to the proper degree. Insert the nozzle of the syringe in the mandibular foramen, the nozzle is wrapped in wet cotton to assist in making a water-tight joint. As soon as the colored solution appears about the mental fora- men, the opening is closed with the finger and the injection is continued. The alveoli from which the teeth have been removed are plugged with wet cotton. Superfluous material pressed out may be trimmed away, when set, with a sharp knife. The gelatin is now rendered insoluble by immersion in a N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 271 weak formaldehyde solution for a suitable length of time, i. e., about five hours. WRITING FLUIDS AND ACCESSORIES. Standard Blue-black Ink. Pure dry tannic acid 25 parts Gallic acid, in crystals 8 “ Ferrous sulphate 30 “ Dilute hydrochloric acid (U. S. P.) . . 25 “ Phenol, liquid 1 part Bavarian-blue dye (Schultz and Julius No. 478) 2 parts Distilled water to make .... 1000 “ Dissolve the tannic and gallic acids together in about 50 parts of warm water and allowr to cool; dissolve the ferrous sulphate in about 150 parts cold water. Add the hydro- chloric acid to the ferrous sulphate and immediately mix the solutions. Add the dye dissolved in water and the liquid phenol and make up with distilled water to 1000 parts. Mix thoroughly. Indelible Ink. Extract of logwood 20 parts Boiling water 280 “ After solution has been effected mix with a liquid composed of: Potassium bichromate 3| parts Hot water 20 “ Hydrochloric acid 8 “ A. Silver nitrate 5 parts Ammonia water 10 “ B. Sodium carbonate 7 parts Gum arabic 5 “ Distilled water 12 “ Ink for Marking Linen. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 272 DENTAL FORMULARY Add solution A to B and keep in well-corked bottles, protected from light. Mark linen with a new steel or quill pen and apply a hot flatiron. Indelible Ink for use with a Hand-stamp. Silver nitrate 12 parts Sodium carbonate 24 “ Ammonia water 20 “ Venice turpentine 10 “ Gum arabic, powdered 20 “ Glycerin, a sufficient quantity, or about 60 to 70 parts Dissolve the silver nitrate in the ammonia water. Tritu- rate in a mortar the sodium carbonate, gum arabic and 60 parts of glycerin, and to the triturate add the solution of the silver nitrate gradually and under constant rubbing. Put the mixture on a water-bath and heat to boiling, and then add the Venice turpentine, a little at a time, under constant agitation. Remove, and let cool. If too thick, add a few drops of glycerin and stir in well. After stamping expose the article to direct sunlight, or pass a hot smoothing iron over the stamped part. Gelatin 22£ parts Water 40 “ Mix and set aside for one-half hour, add Glycerin 70 parts Place on a water bath, heat until dissolved and evaporate until the whole mass weighs 100 parts HECTOGRAPH COMPOUND Ink for Hectograph. Resorcin blue 10 parts Distilled water 85 “ Acetic acid 1 part N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 273 Diamond Ink for Etching Glass. Hydrofluoric acid is neutralized with ammonia water and an equal amount of hydrofluoric acid is then added with sufficient barium sulphate to slightly inspissate the fluid. Writing may be done with a steel pen. Indestructible Ink for Writing on Glass. 1. Gum shellac 5 parts Alcohol 20 “ Borax 10. “ Distilled water 80 “ Methyl violet part The shellac is dissolved in the alcohol, and the borax in the water. The alcoholic solution previously slightly warmed, is then added to the borax solution, little by little, and as soon as the two solutions are thoroughly mixed, the methyl violet is added. 2.—White. Barium sulphate 1 part Solution sodium silicate 3 parts 2.—Black. Higgins’ India ink 1 part Solution sodium silicate 2 parts Glass Lettering Ink. Zinc oxide 1 part Liquid silex 10 parts Mix and apply with a brush Pencils for Writing on Glass. Black —Lampblack, 1 part; yellow wax, 4 parts; tallow, 1 part. White.—White lead, 4 parts; yellow wax, 2 parts; tallow, 1 part. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 274 DENTAL FORMULARY Light Blue —Turnbull’s blue, 3 parts; yellow wax, 4 parts; tallow, 2 parts. Dark Blue.—Prussian blue, 3 parts; mucilage 1 part; tallow, 2 parts. Bed.—Vermilion, 1 part; yellow wax, 2 parts; tallow, 1 part. Yellow —Chrome yellow, 1 part; yellow wax, 2 parts; tallow, 2 parts. Melt the wax and tallow and rub in the colors. The pencils are moulded and then dried to the desired consistency. Ink for Zinc Labels. Potassium chloride 60 parts Copper sulphate 120 “ Anilin blue 1 part Dilute acetic acid 100 parts Distilled water 1800 “ Dissolve the potassium chloride and cupric sulphate in 1400 parts of the water. Mix the acid and the remainder of the water, and in the mixture dissolve the blue. Mix the two solution. INK ERASING COMPOUND. Solution A. Citric acid 1 part Water 8 parts Solution B. Chloride of lime 3 parts Water . . . 8 “ Place in a bottle with closely fitting stopper and set aside for a week. Decant the clear liquid. Moisten the writing to be erased with solution A and let it remain for one to two minutes. Absorb with a clean white blotter and apply a drop of solution B. After writing has disappeared apply water and absorb with the blotter until all traces of the chemicals have been removed. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 275 White dextrin 80 parts Gum arabic, powdered 6 “ Water 128 “ Oil of clove part Dissolve the dextrin and gum arabic in the water, which has been heated to about 160° F. Allow to cool and add the oil of clove. Store in a cool place for several weeks before using. LIBRARY PASTE. Best glue 50 parts Water 30 “ Let stand over night; apply gentle heat until dissolved, and add to the hot solution: Nitric acid 3 parts Glycerin 4 “ LIQUID GLUE. WATERPROOF GLUE. Soak the best quality of carpenter’s glue in water until it is well softened, but still retains its form. Pour off any excess of water and put the glue on a water-bath with sufficient linseed oil to reduce it to a jelly when melted. It should be stirred almost constantly while melting and put up in wide-mouthed bottles. This glue sets very slowly. CEMENT FOR PORCELAIN, GLASS, ALABASTER, ETC. (Diamond Cement.) Isinglass 60 parts Water 200 “ Alcohol 20 “ Cut the isinglass into small pieces and soak in the mixed liquids for twenty-four hours; apply gentle heat until fully dissolved. Make a solution of: Gum ammoniac 10 parts • Alcohol 25 “ Water 25 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 276 DENTAL FORMULARY and a solution of: Gum mastic 20 parts Absolute alcohol 120 “ Mix the gum ammoniac solution with the isinglass solution; boil and strain through flannel; add the gum mastic solution and evaporate on a water-bath until the mass weighs 240 parts, and pour in small wide-mouthed bottles. To use the cement, place the bottle in hot water until the cement becomes liquid. Apply with a wooden stick upon the broken surface and tie together for twenty-four hours. Cement for Pestle Handles. Gum shellac 1 part Gutta-percha 1 “ Rosin 1 “ To Cement Iron to Glass. 1. Liquid glue, hot 20 parts Boiled linseed oil 7 “ Mix thoroughly and apply while hot. 2. Yellow beeswax 1 part Rosin 4 parts Red iron oxide (Crocus martis) ... 1 part 3.—Mendeljeff’s. Yellow beeswax 25 parts Rosin 100 “ Red iron oxide (Crocus martis) . . 40 “ Alloy to “Cement” Metal Tubing to Glass. Lead 6 parts . Antimony 8 “ Bismuth 1 part N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 277 Aquarium Cement. Litharge 10 parts Plaster of Paris 10 “ Dry white sand 10 “ Rosin, finely powdered 1 part Mix the substances, when wanted for use, into a stiff putty with boiled linseed oil. This cement will stick to wood, stone, metal or glass, and hardens under water. It is also good for marine aquaria, as it resists the action of salt water. It is better not to use the tank until three days after it has been cemented. Cement for Steam Fittings. Red lead 4 parts White lead 10 “ Powdered clay 8 “ Boiled linseed oil, enough to make a stiff paste. To Cement Iron to Iron. Pieces of iron can be cemented so firmly together as to withstand a blow of considerable force, by the following process, which is admirably adapted to the mending of cracked and broken iron mortars: Mix intimately 6 parts each of sulphur and white lead and 1 part of powdered borax. Wet the mass with strong sulphuric acid and apply at once a thin layer of it to the edge of each of the surfaces to be united. Bring the pieces together by strong pressure and leave them at rest, placing in such a position that they cannot fall apart. In repairing a cracked mortar, insert, if possible, a thin wedge at the initial point of the crack, pushing it in carefully so as not to fracture the iron. Then place the cement in the crack, beginning at the lower end, and when the fissure is filled up remove the wedge. Now wind a few rolls of strong copper wire around the object and, with a pair of forceps, tighten the wire so as to bring the fractured edges into intimate contact. In a short time the joint will be as firm as any other part of the object. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 278 DENTAL FORMULARY DURABLE BLACK STAIN FOR LABORATORY TABLES. Solution A. Copper sulphate 125 parts Potassium chlorate 125 “ Water 1000 “ Solution B. Aniline hydrochloride 75 parts Water 500 “ Aniline Hydrochloride. Aniline oil . .60 parts Hydrochloric acid 60 “ Water 500 “ The table must be in natural wood without paint or varnish. Two coats of solution A are applied hot and allowed to dry. Two coats of solution B are applied at an interval of one day A coat of raw linseed oil is then applied on the dry surface and thoroughly rubbed in. Finally, the table is washed with hot soap suds. LUMINOUS PAINT FOR CLOCK DIALS, ETC. Strontium thiosulphate is heated for about one-half hour over a strong bunsen flame. When cooled reduce to a very fine powder and keep in a well-stoppered bottle. When needed mix with about 2 parts of sandarac varnish and apply with a fine hair pencil. All luminous paints require exposure to strong sunlight for a time to become active in the dark. BLACKBOARD PAINT. Gum shellac 4 parts Lampblack 2 “ Emery powder, fine 2 “ Ultramarine 1 part Alcohol 40 parts N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 279 Dissolve the shellac in the spirit; place the lampblack, emery, and ultramarine on a cheese-cloth strainer, pour on part of the shellac solution, stirring constantly and gradually adding the rest of the solution until all the powders have passed through the strainer. PAINT AND VARNISH REMOVER 1. Potassium hydroxide 16 parts Acetone 40 “ Methylated spirit 20 “ Oil of turpentine . . . . . . . 20 “ Petroleum spirit 20 “ Castor oil 10 “ Used by spreading thinly over old paint. After a few minutes the second application is made, when the softened paint can generally be removed with a blunt spatula. 2. Soft soap 24 parts Potassium carbonate 5 “ Alcohol 48 “ Water, enough to make 400 “ TO PREPARE A CLEAR VARNISH. The filtering of alcoholic varnishes is accomplished with many difficulties. A satisfactory clear varnish is readily obtained by thoroughly shaking the varnish with about 5 per cent perfectly dry kaolin and setting aside in a warm place until the impurities have been carried to the bottom of the vessel by the heavy kaolin particles. Shellac varnishes are clarified by adding about 25 per cent of gasoline to dissolve certain waxy compounds present in the shellac. The super- natant gasoline solution has to be drawn off from the trans- parent shellac varnish before the latter is ready for use. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 280 DENTAL FORMULARY LABEL VARNISH. Pyroxylin (soluble gun cotton) ... 2 parts Ether 40 parts Alcohol 80 “ Camphor 1 part Pour the ether over the pyroxylin, add the alcohol and finally add the camphor, and dissolve by agitation. LIQUID FURNITURE POLISH. Linseed oil 40 parts Vinegar 6 “ Oil of turpentine 3 “ Hydrochloric acid 1 part Alcohol 2 parts Shake well before using. FLOOR OR FURNITURE WAX. Venice turpentine 1 part Rosin 4 parts Beeswax 16 “ SWEEPING COMPOUND. Dry sawdust 80 parts Paraffin oil 4 “ Paraffin wax 1 part Coarse salt 4 parts Eucalyptus oil 16 “ Sea salt 32 “ Warm the paraffin oil and mix with the melted wax, dissolve in the mixture any aniline color required, add the eucalyptus oil and saturate the sawdust. Then mix with the salt. SILVERING OF MIRRORS Solution A. Silver nitrate 15 parts Rochelle salt 15 “ Distilled water 4000 “ Boil for six to eight minutes. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities bv weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 281 Solution B. Silver nitrate 20 parts Distilled water 1000 “ Stir with a glass rod until dissolved and add Ammonia water, a sufficient quantity (usually a few drops only) until solution becomes perfectly clear. Now add: Silver nitrate 15 parts Stir until dissolved and add Distilled water 3000 parts Filter the solution through paper (glass funnel). Keep the solution in amber-colored glass-stoppered bottles. Directions for Silvering: Clean the glass with ammonia water and running water. Place equal parts of solution A and B into a graduate, stir well and quickly pour on the middle of the glass to be silvered. The solution will spread over the flat surface of the glass. Leave it until the solution has precipitated, remove, place on edge for drying and when perfectly dry, coat with a thin layer of asphalt varnish. TO PREVENT FOGGING OF MIRRORS, EYEGLASSES, WIND- SHIELDS, ETC. Potassium oleate 16 parts Glycerin 8 “ Oil of turpentine 1 part German green soap may be used instead of potassium oleate. Melt the oleate and glycerin together on a water bath, then add the turpentine. Should the paste be too thick, it may be thinned by the addition of more glycerin. Zinc sulphate 3 parts Magnesium sulphate 5 “ Dextrine 2 “ Water 200 “ Dissolve and apply with a soft brush. FROSTING FOR WINDOW GLASS. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 282 DENTAL FORMULARY WATERPROOFING OF CANVAS 1. Gelatin 5 parts Water 40 “ 2. Alum 10 parts Water 40 “ 3. Rosin (scrubbing) soap 4 parts Water 40 “ Stretch the cloth moderately taut and flow over the above solutions in rotation. WATERPROOFING OF PAPER. Gelatin 1 part Water 4 parts Glycerin 1 part Cover the paper on both sides with the warmed solution; after a few minutes, before it is fully dry, drop into the following solution: Formaldehyde solution 75 parts Water 500 “ WATERPROOFING OF BOOTS Heat fish oil, castor oil or tallow to about 250° F. over a naked fire, and then add about one-fifth of the weight of the oil taken of either vulcanized or raw India rubber, stirring well until the latter is dissolved. To color, a little printer’s ink may be used. One or two applications of this are sufficient to thoroughly waterproof a pair of boots for a season. Boots thus treated will take a common shoe blacking afterwards with ease. The usual procedure for treatment with paraffin is to immerse the dry corks in the melted substance; they should IMPERVIOUS CORKS. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 283 be kept in the bath for some time and sunk by a porous disc of some kind. Corks treated in this way should be quite impervious to glycerin. STOPPERS FOR CHEMICALS. Suitable corks are saturated in a solution heated to 100° F. composed of Gelatin 15 parts Glycerin 25 “ Water 500 “ If corks are used for acids, they should be additionally treated with Paraffin 10 parts Petrolatum 2 “ Rosin 480 parts Japan wax 60 “ Turpentine 30 “ Melt together in a water-bath. To color above quantity, add For green color: verdigris .... 45 parts For red color: cinnabar 45 “ For blue color: Prussian blue . . . 100 “ For yellow color: chrome yellow . . . 40 “ SEALING WAX FOR BOTTLES. TO REMOVE A TIGHTLY WEDGED GLASS STOPPER FROM THE NECK OF A BOTTLE. Gently heat the neck of the bottle and remove the stopper while the neck is still warm and before the stopper becomes affected by the heat. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 284 DENTAL FORMULARY BATTERY FLUIDS. A. For the Carbon and Zinc Battery. 1. For Ordinary Use. Sodium bichromate 4 parts Sulphuric acid, commercial .... 4 “ Water, cold 32 “ 2 For Use With the Galvano-Cautery. Sodium bichromate 4| parts Sulphuric acid, commercial . 9§ “ Water, cold 32 “ 3. For Medical Batteries. Potassium bichromate, powdered . . 1\ parts Sulphuric acid, commercial .... 8 “ Water 40 “ Add the acid in a thin stream, under constant stirring, to the water and dissolve the powdered potassium bichromate in the mixture. Ammonium chloride 5 parts Water, enough to make 32 “ B. For the Leclanche Battery. FREEZING PREVENTIVES FOR AUTOMOBILES. 1. Potassium carbonate 75 parts Glycerin 50 “ Water 100 “ 2. Calcium chloride parts Water, hot 8 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 285 3. Wood alcohol 15 parts Glycerin 15 “ Water 70 “ For a temperature not lower than 5° below zero. 4. Wood alcohol 17 parts Glycerin 17 “ Water 66 “ For a temperature lower than 15° below zero. 5. (For acetylene generators.) Calcium chloride 2 parts Water 8 “ FREEZING MIXTURES 1. Potassium nitrate 10 parts Ammonium chloride 30 “ Potassium chloride 60 “ Water 100 “ 2. Ammonium chloride 10 parts Potassium nitrate 3 “ Potassium chlorate 20 “ Cold water 32 “ Mix the salt and add to the water. Will reduce the temperature of the water about 50 ° F. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1. Sodium chloride 43 parts Alum 20 “ Sodium phosphate 5 “ Sodium carbonate 3| “ Sodium silicate 20 “ Powders. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 286 DENTAL FORMULARY 2. Potassium nitrate 60 parts Sublimated sulphur 36 “ Charcoal powder 4 “ English red 1 part Place in a round paper carton, holding about 5 pounds. Punch a hole in the center and push one end of a fuse cord (about 4 inches) into the mixture, leaving the other end (about 6 inches) extend on the outside. In case of fire, the mixture is set on fire by the fuse cord. The burning of the mixture uses up the oxygen in the air and thus extinguishes the flames. To be used in closed rooms only. Liquid. 1. Calcium chloride, crude 20 parts Sodium chloride, crude 5 “ Water 75 “ To be used with a hand spray in case of fire. 2. Carbon tetrachloride . . a convenient quantity To be used with a hand spray in case of fire. 3. Sodium bicarbonate 8 parts Sulphuric acid, crude 2 “ Water 128 “ To be used with the Babcock spray. FIREPROOFING OF PAPER. Ammonium sulphate 4 parts Sodium borate 1 part Boric acid 1| parts Water 4 “ The paper is immersed in the hot solution until com- pletely saturated and dried. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 287 Lime, fresh slaked 40 parts Sodium chloride 10 “ Alum 10 “ Solution of sodium silicate 10 “ Sodium wolframate 10 “ Mix. FIREPROOFING OF WOOD. FIREPROOFING OF TEXTILE MATERIALS Ammonium sulphate 8 parts Ammonium carbonate 2\ “ Boric acid 3 “ Borax 2 “ Starch 2 “ Water 100 “ TO CLEAN MARBLE SLABS. Grease spots are removed by a thick mixture of magnesia and gasoline spread over the surface, say f of an inch thick. Let it remain on the stone an hour or two, then remove the dried crust of magnesia. Stains from extracts may be removed by a thick paste of talcum, white lead, lemon juice and either citric, tartaric or oxalic acid, thinned with alcohol. If this fails, try a mixture of barium hyperoxide and dilute sulphuric acid mixed at the lowest available temperature and avoiding any excess of acid. Use as in the case of the magnesia mixture above spoken of. The stone will have to be repolished, using a mixture of “putty” and paraffin oil. KID GLOVE CLEANSER. Stearic acid 5 parts Carbon tetrachloride 75 parts Ammonia water 20 “ Shake before using. STRAW HAT CLEANSER. Sodium bisulphate 10 parts Tartaric acid 2 “ Borax 10 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 288 DENTAL FORMULARY Moisten a small quantity of the powder with water and apply this mixture with a wet brush. Place in 10 per cent hydrochloric acid for a few hours and wash in running water. TO CLEAN SALIVA EJECTOR TUBES. OIL STONE LUBRICANT. Neatsfoot oil 1 part Fresh lead shavings, a sufficient quantity. Place in bottle and expose to sunlight for some weeks. Alum 10 parts Sodium carbonate 10 “ Ammonium chloride 2 “ Sodium chloride 2 “ Zinc chloride 1 part Hydrochloric acid, crude, a sufficient quantity. Water, enough to make 125 parts Dissolve the alum in 50 parts of hot water, add the sodium carbonate which gives a precipitate of ammonium hydrate. Hydrochloric acid is now added in sufficient quantity under constant stirring until the precipitate is dissolved and converted into aluminum chloride. The other salts are dissolved in the remainder of the water and added to the first solution. A suitable strength of the solution for ordinary disin- fectant purposes (rooms, clothing, etc.) is made by mixing 1 pint of the concentrated solution with 1 gallon of water. DISINFECTANT SOLUTIONS: “FOUR CHLORIDES.” DISINFECTING POWDER FOR STABLES, LATRINES, ETC. Fresh slaked lime 75 parts Plaster of Paris 30 “ Sulphate of iron, powder 20 “ Carbolic acid, crude 10 “ Mix thoroughly. To be used dry. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 289 DISINFECTION OF ROOMS. The room to be disinfected should have a temperature of 65° F. or more, and the air present must contain at least 75 per cent of moisture. This humidity can be produced by placing pans of steaming hot water about the room. Drawers, closet doors, etc., should be opened and the furni- ture moved from the walls. Set on the floor in the middle of the room a large tin bucket, in which place a tin can of suitable capacity. Put into the can 6 ounces of potassium permanganate crystals and pour over them 1 pint of com- mercial formaldehyde solution. This quantity is sufficient for every thousand cubic feet of air space. The operator should leave the room at once, as large quantities of formalde- hyde gas are immediately evolved. The room must be closed air tight and not opened for at least six hours. Furni- ture, draperies, carpets, pictures, etc., are not damaged by this method of disinfection. After the disinfection is completed the formaldehyde gas can be neutralized by ammonia, so as to render the room fit for occupation. This may be readily accomplished by placing in a suitable vessel 2 pounds of freshly burnt lime, 7 pints of boiling water and 3 pints of strong ammonia water. After one hour’s exposure to the ammonia vapors the room should be well aired. FORMULAS FOR MAKING NEGATIVES, LANTERN SLIDES AND ROENTGEN-RAY WORK. Solution A. Hot water, pure 18 parts Metol 1 part Hydrochinone \ “ Sodium sulphide, crystallized ... 6 parts Solution B. Water, pure 80 parts Sodium carbonate, crystallized ... 5 “ Developer for Contrast Work, Lantern Slides, Etc. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 290 DENTAL FORMULARY To develop take: Water, pure 2 parts Solution A 1 part Solution B 2 parts Solution A. Water, pure 64 parts Eikonogen 1 part Hydrochinone | “ Sodium sulphide, crystallized .... parts Solution B. Water, pure 64 parts Potassium carbonate (dry) . . . . 2\ “ To develop take: Solution A 2 parts Solution B 1 part and add developer (solution previously used) a sufficient quantity to produce best results. Developer for View Work. Quickly Acting Photographic Developer. A soft effect is obtained in negatives of portraits by using iron oxalate developer containing a small quantity of sodium thiosulphate. The following is said to give a good developer: Solution of ferrous sulphate (1:3) . . 25 cc. Solution of potassium oxalate (1:3 and containing 5 drops of chemically pure sulphuric acid) 75 “ Solution of potassium bromide (1:10) 4 drops Solution of sodium thiosulphate (not more concentrated than 1:200) . 12 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 291 This solution develops the plate two or three times more rapidly than those ordinarily used and gives finer gradations in the tones. Contrasts can be heightened by increasing the quantity of potassium bromide, i. e., 12 drops of potas- sium bromide solution and 12 drops of sodium thiosulphate to 100 cc of the developer. Methods for Quick Developing of Films, Plates, Etc. For films one may use the widely advertised developing machine, or, better still, the new system of tank development introduced within the past few years. By this method the film is wound up in broad daylight, by means of a transfer box, in a light tight apron, and immersed in a cup containing the developing solution and allowed to develop, the period depending upon the formula used and its temperature. When development is completed the developer is poured off and the cup filled with water two or three times to rinse off the film, which is then transferred to the fixing solution, all being done in daylight. With plates, practically the same method of procedure is followed except that a dark closet is required, so that the plate may be safely transferred from the holders to the developing tank. This having been done, the tank may be covered and the room made light and the plates left until development is completed, and the time required for this having been determined beforehand by regulating the strength and temperature of the developing solution. In selecting a developer for this kind of work it is of the utmost importance to have one which has absolutely no tendency to fog and which is not seriously affected by changes in temperature. Given a developing agent with these characteristics, a formula should be used which is susceptible to many modifications. No developing agent fills the first mentioned specifica- tion as well as Edinol and the following formula cannot be equaled for versatility: N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 292 DENTAL FORMULARY Water 2500 parts Acetone sulphite 75 “ Sodium sulphite (dry) 225 “ Edinol 30 “ Hydroquinone 15 “ Potassium bromide 7 “ Potassium carbonate 480 “ For regular tray development, dilute this stock solution with 5 parts of water. For machine development, dilute with 6 parts of water and develop for six minutes at a temperature of 65° F. For tank development (either plates or film) to take ten minutes, dilute with 10 parts of water and have tempera- ture at 65° F. For the tank development (plates or film) to take thirty minutes, dilute with 25 parts of water and have temperature at 65° F. Any other state of dilution may be used and development may be prolonged for several hours if desired. In using extreme dilutions, however, it is advisable to wet the plate thoroughly before immersing it in the developer. This will prevent “freaks,” which are irregular streaks and which sometimes occur with certain makes of plates. In addition to the above directions it may be well to mention, especially for the benefit of roentgen-ray workers, the following modifications: to increase contrast omit the acetone sulphite. To increase softness omit the hydro- quinone and add an equivalent quantity of edinol. Another method of time development is the factorial system. The factor being a certain number, which when multiplied by the number of seconds elapsed between the immersion of the plate in the developer and the first appear- ance of the image, gives the time in which the development should be completed. The factor of the above formula is 15. Besides the simplified methods of development, photo- graphic printing has also been made much easier since the introduction of the various so-called gaslight papers. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 293 With these papers any negative may be printed by any kind of artificial light in a few seconds and the developing and printing done in a few minutes longer. The directions for using papers of this kind are so complete and so simple that it is unnecessary to go into the matter here, except to give a formula with which superb results can be obtained and which keeps indefinitely even in open bottles. It is as follows: Water 4000 parts Edinol 30 “ Acetone sulphite 150 Sodium carbonate (dry) .... 225 “ Bromide, 1 per cent, 5 drops to 30 parts of solution. After adopting the above simple method of working it is unnecessary to sit up all night washing negatives and prints. The new hypo-destroyer “Bayer” will be found to reduce the time of washing to eight minutes. Plain Fixing Bath. The plain fixing bath is a solution of sodium hyposulphate of a strength of about 5 or 6 parts to 16 parts of water. A fully saturated solution diluted with an equal quantity of water is about this strength. The plate should be left in the fixing bath for several minutes after it appears to be cleared; as long as it took to fix would not be too much. Neglect of this precaution may lead to the formation of insoluble compounds in the film, which, although not visible at first, may in time result in stains or even total decay of the nega- tive. Commercial hyposulphite of soda usually contains foreign matter, which, if allowed to remain in the solution, will cause spots on the negative. Filter before use. If the regular fixing bath is too strong and not stirred before use, it will at times cause parallel lines on the negatives that were fixed in grooved fixing boxes. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 294 DENTAL FORMULARY A cool fixing bath can be prepared by dissolving a fresh lot of “hypo” for each batch of plates. This is of benefit during the hot weather. Acid Fixing Bath. Owing to the quality of the water in some localities some workmen prefer an acid fixing bath. The following is good and remains clear (mix in order given): Water (about) 960 parts Sulphuric acid 3 “ Sodium sulphite 32 “ When dissolved, add: Sodium hyposulphite 32 parts Water, to make 160 “ (For hot weather use.) Water (about) 800 parts Sulphuric acid 3 “ Sodium sulphite 32 “ When dissolved, add: Sodium hyposulphite 256 parts Dissolve and then add: Chrome-alum, from 8 to 15 parts previously dissolved in 120 parts of water. Then add water to make 1280 parts. Acid Chrome-alum Fixing Bath. Intensification. No. 1 —Bichloride of mercury 12 parts Bromide of potassium . . . 12 “ Water 750 “ No. 2.—Sulphite of soda, dry 2 “ Water 16 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 295 After the negative is well fixed and washed immerse in No. 1 until it has become thoroughly whitened, and after rinsing carefully place it in No. 2, leaving it there until entirely cleared. In case sufficient intensification has not been gained, wash for ten minutes, repeat the operation and finally wash well. If after intensification the negative is too dense it may be reduced by placing it for a few seconds in water 16 parts, hyposulphite 1 part. If the negative has not been thoroughly fixed and washed before intensification, stains will ensue. A. Hyposulphite of soda 2 parts Water . 32 “ B. Potassium ferricyanide 2 parts Water 32 “ As this solution is affected by light, the bottle containing it should be of amber color or wrapped in opaque paper and kept in the dark when not in use: A 8 parts B . 1 part Use in subdued daylight. The negative can be placed in this solution directly after fixing. If a dry negative is to be reduced, it must be soaked in water for at least half an hour before applying the solution. To avoid streaks, always rinse the negative before holding it up for examination. As soon as sufficiently reduced wash thoroughly. Reduction. Iron Clearing Solution. To remove yellow stain caused by Pyro or Hydrochinon developer, wash well to free from hypo and place in the following solution, until stain is gone, then wash well. Powdered alum 1 part Sulphuric acid, C. P 1 “ Ferrous sulphate, pure 3 parts Water 20 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 296 DENTAL FORMULARY Dry Plates. For snapshots, landscapes and general outdoor work: Cramer’s Crown plates, Hammer’s fast plates or Seed’s No. 27 plates. For copying drawings, interior views and all time exposures: Cramer’s Banner, Hammer’s slow plates and Seed’s No. 23 plates. These special plates are made by Cramer, Hammer or Seed and are suitable for making slides by contact or reduction. For all view and landscape work the average kodak with film attachment gives perhaps the most universal satis- faction. For interior work, such as copying and scientific work, an ordinary camera, strongly constructed and pro- vided with a good lens (Goerz, Zeiss, Cooke, etc.) is indicated. For daylight work, solar paper is best adapted, while for night work, velox paper is to be used. Lantern Slide Plates. Photographic Blueprint Paper. The ordinary photographic blueprint paper is made as follows. Two solutions are prepared: Solution A. Potassium ferricyanide 10 parts Distilled water 32 “ Solution B. Iron ammonium citrate 15 parts Distilled water 32 “ Mix when wanted for use. Filter and apply to the sur- face of the paper by means of a brush or a piece of cotton wool. Let the paper dry in a dark place and store away from the light. No developer is required for this paper. After exposure it is placed in water to wash out the unde- composed iron salts. It may be improved by immersion in N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formularxj mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 297 diluted hydrochloric acid, after which it must be again thoroughly washed in water. Varnish for Celluloid Negatives. Gum shellac, pale orange 4 parts Methyl alcohol 6 “ Dissolve and add: Ammonia water 6 parts Boiling water 8 “ Glycerin . \ “ Allow to stand for a week and filter. After the negative is fixed and washed it is thoroughly drained. The varnish is then poured into a dish and the negative immersed and allowed to soak for a few minutes. It is then taken out and pinned by one corner to the edge of a shelf or another con- venient article to dry. Transparent Cement for Photographs. Gum tragacanth, powdered 1 part Gum arabic, best selected 4 parts Glycerin 4 “ Water, distilled 32 “ Dissolve the tragacanth in one-half of the water, the gum arabic in the remainder and mix the solutions, com- pleting by adding the glycerin. If the gum arabic is not first class you may have to filter the solution through absorb- ant cotton. The white of a fresh egg dissolved in a little distilled water is also an excellent medium for attaching photographic prints to glass, face foremost. Paste for Mounting Photographic Prints 1. Nelson’s photographic gelatin ... 4 parts Glycerin 1 part Alcohol 5 parts Water 16 “ N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 298 DENTAL FORMULARY Dissolve the gelatine in water, add the glycerin and finally the alcohol. 2. In mounting by the “dry method” the paper or a part of it is previously varnished and the print having been put in place, is subjected to heat in a press. This softens the resins in the varnish and makes perfect contact between the print and the mount. The resinified paper is made by brushing fine tissue paper with the following solution: White gum shellac 30 parts Gum elemi 3 “ Canada balsam 5 “ Alcohol 1000 “ To Transfer Photographs, Engravings, Etc., from Paper to Glass in Lines of Silver. Lightly silver a sheet of glass by any of the numerous processes in use (see page 280). Then float on the silvered surface a very thin coating of Syrian asphaltum (obtainable from any dealer in photographic supplies) dissolved in benzol. This should be done in very subdued light, best of all in the dark. When the asphaltum is dry, lay on it the picture to be transferred and expose the whole to the sunlight for several hours. The asphalt, by its peculiar property, is thus rendered insoluble in direct proportion to the quantity of light received and, as a consequence, the parts protected by the lines of the picture are left soluble, while the other parts become insoluble. After exposure, the plate is placed in benzol and the soluble parts of asphaltum dissolved away. It is then rinsed and put in nitric acid for a moment, which dissolves the silver thus exposed. Rinsing in water completes the operation. Making of Hand Lantern Slides for Immediate Use. (After Dr. G. V. Black.) The materials necessary for this work are: Hard rolled, fine, tissue tracing paper. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 299 Ordinary cover glasses for lantern slides (thin, white glass is preferable). Hard pencils No. H. B. and H. BBB., charcoal and paper points. India ink and “crowquill” pens. Water colors and fine har pencils. Xylol and Canada balsam. The India ink should be diluted with water proportion- ately so as to make five different grades. The weak solution is used for making a very light shade, the others grading blacker. All water colors can be used freely with the exception of yellow. The latter must be used very carefully, as it will kill light badly. The picture is made by copying or tracing on the tracing paper with pencils, ink or water colors. Dr. Black described in the following the details of making colored slides: “This drawing is of a lower bicuspid tooth in which I noticed a very peculiar pulp chamber. In order to bring this out a little plainer I will use a lead pencil with which to outline the pulp chamber, doing this very lightly, and then I will color it lightly with red. I will outline the enamel also with a lead pencil, rather lightly, and go over it lightly with a pencil so as to make the enamel stand out a little from the dentine, showing it to be different; then I will take the red ink and my brush, making sure that the latter is not very wet, and lightly color the pulp chamber. It is best to do any such coloring last. It is not necessary to the drawing particularly that we color the pulp chamber, but a fresh tint catches the eye. We must not make this paper too wet, for if we do it will all crinkle up’ in drying. When we use a brush with India ink the paper will be all crumpled up and not fit for use. How will we straighten it out? Let it dry to fix the ink, then lay it on water and saturate the entire paper and it will straighten out. It may then be dried between pieces of blotting paper under a light compress, after which we can add anything further we wish. Now my picture is completed. I will make a second one of different N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. 300 DENTAL FORMULARY design, a large pul]) chamber in a second bicuspid, a very different form of tooth in which 1 will make the enamel a little bit stronger in its demarcation from the dentine by just a little shading with a pencil. This pulp chamber I will not color. I will put this on a cover glass, place on it a mat and cover this with another cover glass, having the picture and the mat between two cover glasses. Around the whole I will place a couple of rubber bands. This is now ready for the screen.” To make a picture as transparent as possible, it is now dropped into xylol and left there for about five minutes. Two cover glasses are laid on blotting paper and on each is placed a small quantity of Canada balsam, the same as is used in mounting microscopic specimens, care being taken not to include any air bubbles. Remove the picture from the xylol and place it on the balsam cover as nearly to the center as possible and place a second balsam cover slide, face downward, over the picture. Press the two together lightly and carefully put a rubber band on each end so as to hold the slides firmly together. Place the slides on their edge for drying. After a few days’ drying, the edges may now be enclosed in the usual binding. All pressed out balsam must be carefully removed. Sizing Preparation for Lantern Screens. White glue 1 part Zinc oxide 2 parts Glycerin 1 part Water 8 parts Macerate the glue in the water, boil until dissolved and add the glycerin. Mix the zinc oxide with a small quantity of the solution until a smooth paste is obtained and add the remainder of the solution under constant stirring. Have the fabric stretched on a smooth surface and apply while hot. Leave on the stretcher until perfectly dry. One gallon of this sizing will cover a screen 10 feet square. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. DENTAL FORMULARY 301 FLASHLIGHT POWDER. Potassium perchlorate 1 part Magnesium powder, finely sifted ... 2 parts Mix very carefully, preferably with a card or feather. (Potassium perchlorate is a powerful oxidizing agent and is apt to “go off” prematurely unless tenderly handled.) In using this powder the lens should be protected with a screen or greenish-yellow color. TO REMOVE PHOTOGRAPHIC STAINS FROM HANDS. First wash the hands in a thin solution of potassium permanganate, then rinse in a solution of oxalic acid, and lastly wash with hydrogen peroxide. N. B.—Parts as used in this Dental Formulary mean quantities by weight. CHAPTER X. TABLES. WEIGHTS AND MEASURES. The system of weights and measures as used in the United States was standardized in 1836, when the then Secretary each of the Treasury was authorized by Congress to furnish state of the Union with a complete set of revised stand- ards for weights, liquid measures, and measures of length. These various methods of weights and measures are quite confusing when an examination of their comparative units is made—that is, it is perplexing to find that a pound is not a pint, an ounce does not equal a fluidounce, and a drop is neither a grain nor a minim. The United States National Prototype Standards, from which all weights and measures now used in this country are derived, are the meter and the kilogram, and they are preserved in the custody of the National Bureau of Standards at Washington. The United States meter and kilogram are identical with the international Standards of the same capacity. The United States standards of weights and measures are: The apothecaries’ or troy ounce = 480 grains. The commercial or avoirdupois ounce = 437.5 grains. The apothecaries’ fluidounce (identical with the fluidounce of the liquid gallon) = 480 minims. The weights and measures used in the British Pharma- copeia are the Imperial weights and measures, legal for commercial purposes in the British Empire. The English apothecaries’ weights are the same as those used in the United States. 302 DENTAL FORMULARY 303 Apothecaries’ Weight. Pound. Troy ounces. Drams. Scruples. Troy grains, lb 1 12 96 = 288 5760 5 1 = 8 24 480 5 1= 3 60 9 1 = gr. 20 Troy Weight. Pound. Troy ounces. Pennyweights. Troy grains, lb 1 = 12 = 240 = 5760 gl = 20 = 480 4 troy grains = 7 carat. dwt. 1 = gr. 24 Avoirdupois Weight. Pound Ounces Drams Troy grains, lb 1 = 16 = 256 = 7000. oz. 1 = 16 = 437.5 dr. 1 = gr. 27.34375 Relative Value of Troy and Avoirdupois Pounds. 1 troy pound = 0.822857 avoirdupois pound. 1 avoirdupois pound = 1.215277 troy pounds. Apothecaries’ or Wine Measure (United States). Gallon. Pints. Fluidounces. Fluidrams. Minims. Cubic inches. Cong. 1 8 = 128 1024 = 61440 = 231 O 1 = 16 128 7680 = 28.875 fig 1 8 480 = 1.8047 fl3 1 = PI 60 = .2256 Liquid Measure. 1 gallon = 4 quarts. 1 pint = 4 gills. 1 quart = 2 pints. 1 gill = 4 fluidounces. Imperial Measure (British Pharmacopeia). Gallon. Pints. Fluidounces. Fluidrams. Minims. 1 = 8 = 160 1280 = 76800 1 = 20 160 9600 1 8 = 480 1 = 60 The Metric System. The metric or decimal system of weights and measures originated with Prince de Talleyrand, Bishop of Autun, in 1790. Its almost universal adoption by civilized nations, its legality (though not compulsion) in England and the 304 DENTAL FORMULARY United States,1 and its adoption by the United States Pharmacopeia of 1890 demand that it should be understood by the progressive practicing physician. Except in the English-speaking world, it is the only system of weights and measures used for governmental, statistical, and scientific purposes. It is based upon the decimal system—that is, the denominations increase by tens and decrease by tenths. The starting point is the unit of linear measures, the meter, which represents one-ten-millionth of the polar quadrant of the earth—that is, the distance from the equator to the poles—and is equivalent to 39.37 English inches. The gram (gm.) is the unit of weight; the liter, or capacity (although the cubic centimeter is oftener preferably used); the are, of surface measure. The denominations repre- senting the subdivisions of any unit are expressed by prefixing the Latin numerals, deci, centi, and milli to the unit—meaning respectively one-tenth, one-hundredth, and one-thousandth; the multiples are expressed by prefixing the Greek numerals deka, hedo, kilo and myria—meaning ten, hundred, thousand, and ten thousand. The gram is derived as follows: The meter is divided into one hundred equal parts, called centimeters. On one centimeter as a base a cube is erected, having for its three dimensions one centimeter (cm.) each. The contents of this cube will be one cubic centimeter (cc), measuring one milliliter. This quantity of distilled water at its maximum density (39.2° F., 4° C.) and 30 inches barometric pressure weighs one gram, or 15,432 grains. The liter is derived as follows: The meter is divided into ten equal parts, called decimeters. On one decimeter as a base a cube is erected, having for its three dimensions one decimeter (dm.) each. The contents of this cube will be one cubic decimeter (dm.3), the capacity of which is one liter, equivalent to 1000 cubic centimeters, or 33.81 fluidounces, or 2.113 pints. One liter of distilled water at 4° C. and 30 inches barometric pressure weighs 1000 grams, or 1 kilogram, or 2.2 pounds avoirdupois, or 15,432 grains. 1 The metric system was legalized in Great Britain in 1864, and in the United States by act of Congress in 1866, DENTAL FORMULARY 305 Metric Weights and Measures. The meter, or unit of length, The liter, or unit of capacity, The gram, or unit of weight, = 39.37043 inches. = 33.814 fluidounces (U. S.). = 15.432348 troy grains. Measures of Length, English inches. English inches. Millimeter (mm.) = .03937 Decimeter (dm.) = 3.93704 Centimeter (cm.) = .39370 Meter (m.) = 39.37043 Kilometer = 39.370.43 English inches. Measures of Capacity. English cubic inches. Milliliter (cc.) = .06102 Centiliter (cl.) = .61028 English cubic inches. Deciliter (dl.) = 6.10280 Liter (L.) = 61.02800 Hectoliter = 6102.8 English cubic inches. Measures of Weight. Troy grains. Milligram (mg.) = .0154 Centigram (eg.) = . 1543 Troy grains. Decigram (dg.) = 1.5432 Gram (gm.) = 15.4324 Kilogram = 15432.34 troy grains. grain = 0.0006 gram. “ = 0.001 A “ = 0.0013 “ “ 0.0016 “ A “ = 0.002 ~h “ = 0.003 A “ = 0.004 = 0.005 TV “ = 0.006 f “ = 0.008 £ = o.on \ = 0.012 i = 0.015 f = 0.022 £ = 0.032 f “ = 0.048 1 = 0.065 2 grains = 0.13 “ 3 “ = 0.2 4 = 0.26 5 = 0.32 6 = 0.39 8 = 0.52 10 “ = 0.65 12 “ = 0.78 15 “ = 0.97 Apothecaries’ Weight and Metric Equivalents 15.4 grains = 1. gram. 20 “ = 1.3 grams. 24 “ = 1.55 30 “ = 1.94 40 “ = 2.6 45 “ = 2.92 50 “ = 3.23 60 “ (1 dram) = 3.89 “ If drams = 5.58 “ If “ = 6.81 2 = 7.78 “ 2f “ = 9.72 3 = 11.65 4 = 15.55 5 = 19.43 6 = 23.3 1 ounce (480 grains) = 31.1 2 ounces = 62.2 “ 3 = 93.3 4 = 124.4 6 = 186.6 8 = 248.8 10 “ = 311. 12 “ = 373.2 306 DENTAL FORMULARY Apothecaries’ Measure and Metric Equivalents. 1 minim = 0.06 cc. 2 minims = 0.12“ 3 “ = 0.18 “ 4 = 0.24 “ 5 “ = 0.30 “ 6 “ = 0.36 “ 7 = 0.42 “ 8 = 0.50 “ 9 = 0.55 “ 10 “ = 0.60 “ 15 “ = 0.92 “ 20 “ = 1.25 “ 25 “ = 1.54 “ 30 “ = 1.90 “ 40 “ = 2.50 “ 45 “ = 2.80 “ 50 “ = 3.10 “ 60 minims (1 fluidram) = 3.70 “ 1 \ fluidrams = 4.65 cc. li “ = 5.60 “ 1.. “ = 6.50 “ 2 7.50 “ 3 11.25 “ 4 15.00 “ 8 (1 fluidoz.) = 30.00 “ (more exactly) = 29.57 “ 2 fluidounces = 59.15 “ 3 88.72 “ 4 118.29 “ 8 236.59 “ 16 “ = 236.59 “ 16 (1 pint) = 473.18 “ 32 “ = 946.36 “ 128 (1 gallon) = 3785.43 “ Weight Equivalents. To convert grains into grams multiply by 0.065 To convert grams into grains multiply by 15.5 To convert drams into grams multiply by 3.9 To convert ounces (avoirdupois) into grams multiply by . . . 28.4 To convert pounds (avoirdupois) into grams multiply by . 543.6 Measure Equivalents. To convert cubic centimeters into grains multiply by . . . . 15.5 To convert cubic centimeters into drams multiply by . . . . 0.26 To convert cubic centimeters into ounces (avoirdupois) multiply by 9.03 To convert pints into cubic centimeters multiply by ... 473. To convert liters into ounces (avoirdupois) multiply by . . 35.3 To convert gallons into liters multiply by 3.8 Approximate Measures. A drop equals roughly 1 minim. A teaspoonful = 1 fluidram. A dessertspoonful = 2 fluidrams. A tablespoonful = J fluidounce. A wineglassful = 2 fluidounces. A teacupful = 4 fluidounces. A tumblerful = 8 fluidounces. A handful = 4 ounces. DENTAL FORMULARY 307 Percentage Solution Table. Showing the quantity of drug and water to use for prepar- ing aqueous solutions of different strengths. In these calculations 456 grains have been taken as the weight of one fluidounce of distilled water at ordinary temperature. Fluidoz. water. Gr. for 1-1000 per cent sol’n. Gr. for 1-500 per cent sol’n. Gr. for 5 per cent sol’n. 1 Gr. for 1 per cent sol’n. Gr. for 2 per cent sol’n. Gr. for 3 per cent sol’n. Gr. for 4 per cent sol’n. Gr. for 5 per cent sol’n. Gr. for 10 per cent, sol’n. Gr. for 20 per cent sol’n. Gr. for 25 per cent sol’n. Gr. for 50 per cent sol’n. i ... . 0.228 0.457 1.14 2.3 4.6 7.0 9.5 12 25.3 57 76 228 1 ... . 0.456 0.913 2.29 4.6 9.3 14.1 19 24 50.6 114 152 456 2 ... . 0.912 1.83 4.58 9.2 18.6 28.2 38 48 101.3 228 304 912 3 ... . 1.37 2.74 6.87 13.8 27.9 42.3 57 72 151.9 342 456 1368 4 ... . 1.82 3.65 9.16 18.4 37.2 56.4 76 96 202.6 456 608 1824 6 ... . 2.74 5.48 13.75 27.6 55.8 84.6 114 144 303.9 684 912 2736 8 ... . 3.65 7.31 18.32 36.8 74.4 112.8 152 192 405.2 912 1216 3648 12 . . . . 5.47 10.96 27.5 55.2 111.6 169.2 228 288 607.9 1368 1824 5472 16 ... . 7.3 14.6 36.64 73.6 148.8 225.6 304 384 810.4 1824 2430 7296 Short Rules for Determining Percentages in Mixtures. Multiply 456 by the percentage desired and point off two right-hand figures. The figures at the left of separatrix will give the number of grains or drops, 456 being the number of grains to the ounce of water. Examples: 456X4 = 1824; 18.24 = 18j; 181 grains to an ounce of liquid, a 4 per cent solution. lb libra a pound 3 uncia an ounce 5 drachma a drachm 9 scrupulus a scruple gr. granum a grain C congius a gallon O octarius a pint fg fluid uncia a fluidounce f3 fluid drachma a fluidrachm nt minim a drop gtt gutta a drop ss semis * half Cabalistic Signs Used in Prescription Writing. 308 DENTAL FORMULARY Latin Numerals, All Latin numbers are expressed by one, or a combination of two or more, of the following letters: I, V, X, L, C, I), and M. I means 1; V, 5; X, 10; L, 50; C, 100; D, 500; and M, 1000. These should be written together as capital letters, but in prescriptions we find them usually written as small letters, or in print as “ lower case ” letters, and it is customary to write a single “i,” or the final “i” when several numeral letters are used together, as a small “j.” The letters are combined thus: I 1 II 2 III 3 IV 4 V 5 VI 6 VII 7 VIII 8 IX 9 X 10 XI 11 XX 20 XL 40 L 50 LX 60 XC 90 C 100 CC 200 D 50C DC 600 M 1000 MCMXXIII 1923 Table of Solubility. Name. Water. Alcohol. Ether. Glyceric. Acetanilid ..... 230 3.5 readily Acid arsenic . . . • 80 5 Acid benzoic .... 400 3 3.5 10 Acid boric 25 15 10 Acid carbolic .... 15 readily readily readily Acid citric 1 1 50 readily Acid salicylic .... 500 readily readily Acid tannic 1 2 2 Acid tartaric .... 1 2.5 readily Acid trichloracetic . readily readily readily Alum 12 3 Ammonium bromide 1.3 • Ammonium carbonate . 4 Ammonium chloride 3 5 Antipyrin ..... 1 1 50 Apomorphine hydrochloride 35 35 Atropine sulphate . 1 10 readily Borax 17 Camphor readily readily Caffein 80 50 300 Chloral hydrate readily readily readily readily DENTAL FORMULARY 309 Name. Water. Alcohol. Ether. Glycerin. Cocaine hydrochloride . 0.5 4 Codeine Phosphate . 4 difficult Copper sulphate 4 4 Iodine 5000 10 3 Iodoform 50 6 Iodol 5000 3 15 Iron sulphate .... 2 4 Lithium carbonate . 80 Magnesium sulphate 1 Menthol difficult readily readily Mercuric chloride 16 3 4 15 Morphine hydrochloride 25 50 5 20 5 Phenacetin 1400 16 Pilocarpine hydrochloride . 10 readily Potassium acetate . 0.5 2 4 Potassium bromide . 2 200 4 Potassium carbonate 1 ...... 15 Potassium chlorate . 16 130 32 Potassium iodide 1 12 2.5 Potassium permanganate . 21 explosive Potassium sulphate 10 Potassium tartrate . 1 Quinine hydrochloride . 34 3 Quinine sulphate 800 90 Resorcinol 1 0.5 0.5 5 Saccharin 250 25 Salol 10 0.3 Silver nitrate .... 0.6 10 readily Sodium acetate .... 3 30 15 2 13 12 4 Sodium bromide 1.2 5 1 2 5 3 6 Sodium salicylate 1 6 readily 3 1 Strychnine nitrate . 90 70 25 Strychnine sulphate 31 65 Sugar 0.5 Sugar, milk 6 Sulphonal 500 65 135 17 readily Thymol 1100 1 1 Yeratrin 4 7 100 Zinc sulphate .... 0.6 3 310 DENTAL FORMULARY Number of Drops in a Fluidram. Table showing number of drops in a fluidram of different liquids, with weight in grains and in grams: Name. Acid, aceticum . Drops in 1 fluidram (60m) . . 108 Weight of 1 fluidram In grains. In grams. 58 3.75 Acid, aceticum dilut . . 68 55 3.56 Acid, hydrochlor . . 70 65 3.62 Acid, hydrochlor. dilut . . 60 56 3.49 Acid, lacticum . . . Ill 66 4.27 Acid, nitricum . . . 102 77 4.98 Acid, nitricum dilut . . 60 58 3.62 Acid, sulphur . . 128 101 6.54 Acid, sulphur, aromat. . . . 146 53 3.43 Acid, sulphur, dilut . . 60 58* 3.79 iEther fortior . . 176 39 2.52 Alcohol . . 146 44 2.85 Aqua . . 60 55 3.56 Aqua ammon. fortior . . . 66 50 3.24 Chloroform, purificat . . . 250 80 5.18 Creosotum .... . . 122 56* 3.66 Glycerinum .... . . 67 68 4.40 Hydrargyrum . . 150 760 49.24 Liq. potassi arsenitis . . 57 55 3.56 Oleum caryophylli . . . 130 57 3.69 Oleum cinnamonic . . . 126 53* 3.46 Oleum gaultherise . . . 125 62 4.01 Phenol liquid . . Ill 59 3.82 Spiritus ammon. aromat. . . 142 48 3.11 Syrupus . . 65 72 4.66 Tinctura aconiti . . 146 46 2.98 Tinctura digitalis . . . 128 53 3.43 Tinctura ferri chloridi . . . 150 53 3.43 Tinctura iodi . . 148 47 3.04 Tinctura opii . . 130 53 3.43 Tinctura zingiberis . . . 144 46 2.98 DENTAL FORMULARY 311 THERMOMETRIC EQUIVALENTS. To reduce Centigrade degrees to those of Fahrenheit, multiply by 9, divide by 5 and add 32; or, degrees Centi- grade X1.8+32 = degrees Fahrenheit. To reduce Fahrenheit degrees to those of Centigrade, subtract 32, multiply by 5, and divide by 9; or, degrees —32 -7-1.8=degrees Centrigrade. Fahrenheit and Centigrade Scales. °c °F °C 0F °C op °C °F —20 —4.0 5 41.0 30 86.0 55 131.0 —19 —2.2 6 42.8 31 87.8 56 132.8 —18 —0.4 7 44.6 32 89.6 57 134.6 —17 1.4 8 46.4 33 91.4 58 136.4 —16 3.2 9 48.2 34 93.2 59 138.2 —15 5.0 10 50.0 35 95.0 60 140.0 —14 6.8 11 51.8 36 96.8 61 141.8 —13 8.6 12 53.6 37 98.6 62 143.6 —12 10.4 13 55.4 38 100.4 63 145.4 —11 12.2 14 57.2 39 102.2 64 147.2 —10 14.0 15 59.0 40 104.0 65 149.0 — 9 15.8 16 60.8 41 105.8 66 150.8 — 8 17.6 17 62.6 42 107.6 67 152.6 — 7 19.4 18 64.4 43 109.4 68 154.4 — 6 21.2 19 66.2 44 111.2 69 156.2 — 5 23.0 20 68.0 45 113.0 70 158.0 — 4 24.8 21 69.8 46 114.8 71 159.8 — 3 26.6 22 71.6 47 116.6 72 161.6 — 2 28.4 23 73.4 48 118.4 73 163.4 — 1 30.2 24 75.2 49 120.2 74 165.2 0 32.0 25 77.0 50 122.0 75 167.0 1 33.8 26 78.8 51 123.8 76 168.8 2 35.6 27 80.6 52 125.6 77 170.6 3 37.4 28 82.4 53 127.4 78 172.4 4 39.2 29 84.2 54 129.2 79 174.2 312 DENTAL FORMULARY Fahrenheit and Centigrade Scales.—(Continued.) °c °F °C °F °C °F °C °F 80 176.0 114 237.2 148 298.4 182 359.6 81 177.8 115 239.0 149 300.2 183 361.4 82 179.6 116 240.8 150 302.0 184 363.2 83 181.4 117 242.6 151 303.8 185 365.0 84 183.2 118 244.4 152 305.6 186 366.8 85 185.0 119 246.2 153 307.4 187 368.6 86 186.8 120 248.0 154 309.2 188 370.4 87 188.6 121 249.8 155 311.0 189 372.2 88 190.4 122 251.6 156 312.8 190 374.0 89 192.2 123 253.4 157 314.6 191 375.8 90 194.0 124 255.2 158 316.4 192 377.6 91 195.8 125 257.0 159 318.2 193 379.4 92 197.6 126 258.8 160 320.0 194 381.2 93 199.4 127 260.6 161 321.8 195 383.0 94 201.2 128 262.4 162 323.6 196 384.8 95 203.0 129 264.2 163 325.4 197 386.6 96 204.8 130 266.0 164 327.2 198 388.4 97 206.6 131 267.8 165 329.0 199 390.2 98 208.4 132 269.6 166 330.8 200 392.0 99 210.2 133 271.4 167 332.6 201 393.8 100 212.0 134 273.2 168 334.4 202 395.6 101 213.8 135 275.0 169 336.2 203 397.4 102 215.6 136 276.8 170 338.0 204 399.2 103 217.4 137 278.6 171 339.8 205 401.0 104 219.2 138 280.4 172 341.6 206 402.8 105 221.0 139 282.2 173 343.4 207 404.6 106 222.8 140 284.0 174 345.2 208 406.4 107 224.0 141 285.8 175 347.0 209 408.2 108 226.4 142 287.6 176 348.8 210 410.0 109 228.2 143 289.4 177 350.6 211 411.8 110 230.0 144 291.2 178 352.4 212 413.6 111 231.8 145 293.0 179 354.2 213 415.4 112 233.6 146 294.8 180 356.0 214 417.2 113 235.4 147 296.6 181 357.8 215 419.0 DENTAL FORMULARY 313 TENSILE STRENGTH OF METALS. Given in pounds per square inch. The values can be considered only as approximation. Metal. Tensible strength in lbs. per sq. in. Aluminum wire . 30,000- 40,000 Brass wire . 50,000-150,000 Bronze wire, phosphor, hard drawn . 110,000-140,000 Bronze, wire, silicon, hard drawn . . 95,000-115,000 Bronze 60,000- 75,000 Copper wire, hard drawn .... . 60,000- 70,000 Gold wire 20,000 Iron, cast 13,000- 33,000 Iron wire, hard drawn . 80,000 120,000 Iron wire, annealed 50,000- 60,000 Lead, cast or drawn 2600- 3300 Palladium 39,000 Platinum wire 50,000 Silver wire 42,000 Steel 80,000-330,000 Steel wire, maximum 460,000 Steel, specially treated nickel steel. 250,000 Steel, piano wire, 0.033 in. diam. . . 357,000 390,000 Steel, piano wire, 0.051 in. diam. . . 325,000-337,000 Tin, cast or drawn 4000- 5000 Zinc, cast 7000 13,000 Zinc, drawm . 22,000- 30,000 314 DENTAL FORMULARY DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS. Of Millimeters and Inches. m/m inches. m/m inches. m/m inches. m/m inches. 1-100 _ .00039 35-100 ± .01299 70-100 .02756 1 .03937 5-100 = .00197 40-100 ± .01575 75-100 =t .02953 5 = .19685 10-100 = .00394 45-100 = .01772 80-100 = .03150 10 = .39370 15-100 = .00591 50-100 ± .01969 85-100 = .03346 15 = .59055 20-100 = .00787 55-100 ± .02165 90-100 = .03543 20 = .78740 25-100 = .00984 60-100 = .02362 95-100 = .03740 25 = .98425 30-100 = .01181 65-100 = .02559 26 = 1.02362 Comparison of Wire Gauges. Number of Wire Gauges Expressed in Decimal Parts of an inch. Gauge Nos. *B.&S.&A. W. Gauge. **B.W.G. Eng. Standard Stubs. Twist drill. Gauge Nos. ♦B.&S.&A W. Gauge. **B.W.G Eng. Standard Stubs. Twist drill. 4.0 .460 .454 19 .03589 .042 .166 3.0 .40964 .425 20 .03196 .035 .161 2.0 .3648 .380 21 .02846 .032 .159 1.0 .32486 .340 22 .02535 .028 .157 1 .2893 .300 .228 23 .02257 .025 .154 2 .25763 .284 .221 24 .0201 .022 .152 3 .22942 .259 .213 25 .01/'9 .020 .1495 4 .20431 .238 .209 26 .01594 .018 .147 5 .18194 .220 .2055 27 .01419 .016 .144 6 .16202 .220 .204 28 .01264 .014 .1405 7 .14428 .180 .201 29 .01126 .013 .136 8 .12840 .165 .199 30 .01002 .012 .1285 9 .11443 .148 .196 31 .00893 .010 .120 10 .10189 .134 .1935 32 .00795 .009 .116 11 .09074 .120 .191 33 .00708 .008 .113 12 .08081 .109 .189- 34 .0063 .007 .111 13 .07196 .095 .185 35 .00561 .005 .110 14 .06408 .083 .182 36 .005 .004 .1065 15 .05707 .072 .180 37 .00445 .104 16 .05082 .065 .177 38 .00396 .1015 17 .04525 .058 .173 39 .00353 .0995 18 .0403 .049 .1695 40 .00314 .098 * Brown & Sharpe, or American Wire Gauge. ** Birmingham Wire Guage. DENTAL FORMULARY 315 1. Talc 2. Rocksalt 3. Calcite 4. Fluorite 5. Apatite 6. Feldspar 7. Quartz SCALE OF HARDNESS. 8. Topaz 9. Corundum 10. Diamond Hardness of Materials. The numbers give only the order of arrangement as to hardness. Agate .... 7.0 Alabaster . . . 1.7 Alum .... 2-2.5 Aluminum . . 2.0 Amber . . . 2-2.5 Anthracite . . 2.2 Antimony . . 3.3 Apatite . . . 5.0 Arsenic . . . 3.5 Asbestos . . . 5.0 Asphalt . . . 1-2.0 Barite .... 3.3 Beryl .... 7.8 Bell-metal . . 4.0 Bismuth . . . 2.5 Boric acid . . 3.0 Brass .... 3-4.0 Calamine . . . 5.0 Calcite. . . . 3.0 Copper . . . 2.5-3.0 Corundum . . 9.0 Diamond . . . 10.0 Dolomite . . . 3.5-4.0 Feldspar . . . 6.0 Flint .... 7.0 Fluorite . . . 4.0 Galena . . . 2.5 Garnet . . . 7.0 Glass . . - . . 4.5-6.5 Gold .... 2.5-3.0 Graphite . . . 0.5-1.0 Gypsum . . . 1.6-2.0 Hematite . . . 6.0 Hornblende . . 5.5 Iridium . . . 6.0 Iridosmium . . 7.0 Iron .... 4-5.0 Kaolin ... 1.0 Lead .... 1.5 Magnetite . . 6.0 Marble . . . 3-4.0 Meerschaum . . 2-3.0 Mica .... 2.8 Opal .... 4-6.0 Palladium . . 4.8 Phosphor bronze 4.0 Platinum . . . 4.3 Plat, iridium . . 6.5 Pyrite .... 6.3 Quartz. . . . 7.0 Rocksalt . . .' 2.0 Ross’ metal . . 2.5-3.0 Silver chloride . 1.3 Sulphur . . . 1.5-2.5 Stibnite . . . 2.0 Serpentine . . . 3-4.0 Silver .... 2.5-3.0 Steel .... 5-8.5 Talc .... 1.0 Tin ... . 1.5 Topaz .... 8.0 Wax (0°) . . 0.2 Wood’s metal. . 3.0 Zinc .... 2.5 316 DENTAL FORMULARY CHEMICAL EQUIPMENT FOR A SMALL DENTAL LABORATORY.1 1 Prescription balance. Pans G inches in diameter. Capacity 500 grams in each pan; sensitive to 5 centigrams. 1 set of weights—200 grams to 1 centigram. 1 set of weights—1 ounce to | grain Apothecaries’ coin weight. 1 dozen glass-stoppered reagent bottles-—8 ounces. 1 dozen “ salt mouth bottles—4 ounces. | dozen “ “ “ “ —8 ounces. 2 glass funnels; one—2 inches diameter, one—4 inches, diameter. 2 dozen test-tubes, thin walled, with lip, length 6 inches, f inch diameter. 1 test-tube rack, wood, 12 holes. 1 “ holder, wire spring. 2 “ brushes. 1 galvanized iron tripod, inches high. 1 Nichrome wire gauze for tripod. 3 Erlenmeyer flasks, one 4 ounces, one 8 ounces, one 16 ounces. 1 nest of beaker glasses, with lip, 1-8 ounces. 1 porcelain casserole, wood handle and cover, 1 pint. 1 porcelain evaporating dish, 4 ounces. 100 sheets of filter paper, 10 cm. diameter. 100 “ “ “ 15 cm. diameter. 1 porcelain mortar and pestle, shallow—7f inches. 1 cylindrical minim graduate—60 minims. 1 “ graduate—4 ounces • 1 “ “ —8 ounces. 1 chemical thermometer, engraved on stem, 100° C. 1 dozen pipettes with rubber bulbs—3| inches. 3 glass stirring rods; 8, 10 or 12 inches. pound glass tubing, assorted sizes, rubber tubing. 1 The complete Chemical Laboratory Equipment may be obtained from Arthur H. Thomas Company, West Washington Square, Phila- delphia, Pa. DENTAL FORMULARY 317 50 assorted corks. 1 steel spatula, wooden handle, 3 inch blade. 1 box paper labels, gummed, Dennison—1| x 2\ inches. 1 “ “ “ “ “ — f x 1 inch. 1 Acme flour sieve—1 quart. 1 Fletcher crucible furnace No. 40. 1 Dixon plumbago crucible No. 00. 1 urinometer and cylinder. 1 carton “Soloid” Fehling’s test tablets. Litmus test papers, red and blue. INDEX. A Abrasion, 191 Abrasives, 138 Abscess, acute alveolar, 191 Acetone, 244 Acid and alkali burns, 257 fixing bath, 294 index, test for, 242 mouth wash, Pickerill’s, 144 phenol-sulphonic, 175 Actinomycosis, 192 Action of antiseptics, 140 Acute poisoning, treatment of, 230 pulpitis, 216 ulcerous gingivitis, 205 Adrenalin solution, quantities of, 160 After-pain, relieve of, 161 Alabaster, cement for, 275 Albodon dental cream, 153 Albumin, tests for, 236 Alcohol for dehydrating dentin, 187 solid, 256 Alkaline mouth wash, 142 Alkalinity, test for, 242 Alloy or Alloys, cast gold, 59 to cement metal tubing to glass, 276 cheoplastic castings, 60 coin gold, 57 commercial, 62 compensation amalgam, 85 cosmos, 62 dental, 61 gold, 58 solder, 65 low fusing, 63 for valve plugs, 64 Randolf’s, 63 Reetz’s, 63 Alloy or Alloys, Ruoltz’s, 63 Samsioe’s, 61 silver coin, 60 stellite, 63 Watt’s, 61 Weston’s, 61 Almond meal compound, 252 Alopecia ointment, 248 Aluminum acetate, solutions of, 179 alloy, 61 bronze, 61 copper-plating, 121 solder, 68 Alveolus, fracture of the, 203 Amalgam alloy, compensation, 84 manufacture of, 72 modern, 86 cement, 51 Amalgamation of dental alloy, to improve, 86 of gold in mouth, prevention of, 87 Analysis, saliva, 240 urine, 191 Anatherin dentifrice, 142 Anesthetic for pulps, 162 for scaling, 161 solution, local, 158 tropacocaine, 159 Angina, dental, 198 Aniline hydrochloride, 278 Antacids, 138 Antiseptic compounds, 172 mouth wa§h, 143 Antiseptics, 138 Aphthous stomatitis, 220 Aquarium cement, 277 Aristol oil solution, 178 Aromatized iodoform, 177 Arsenical disks, 164 fiber, 163 319 320 INDEX Arsenical necrosis, 193 pastes, 162 Artificial dentin, 53 dentures, swallowing of, 224 stone, 24 Astringent to be applied to the anesthetized pulp, 185 Astringents, 138 Austrian tooth soap, 156 B Babbitt metal, 64 Baked clay models, 24 Bags, capsicum, 172 Balsam analgesique, Bengu6, 172 Barber’s itcb, 254 Battery fluids, 284 Bay rum, 249 Beerite, 14 Bergmann’s tooth soap, 157 Bismuth paste, Morison, 166 Black, 1-2-3 mixture, 174 silver nitrate ointment, 166 stain for laboratory tables, 278 zinc chloride solution, Witzel,177 Blackboard paint, 278 Blackening of metals, 130 Bleaching and cleaning of bones, 265 Blueprint paper, photographic, 296 Body, temperature of the, 245 Bone cavity pastes, 165 plombe, 165 Boots, water proofing of, 282 Borax soap powder, 254 Bottles, sealing wax for, 283 Brass plating solution, 115 Brilliantine, 248 Bronze, aluminum, 61 Bronzing of plaster casts, 20 Burns, 194 and scalds, treatment of, 257 Burrow’s solution, 179 C Cabalistic signs, 307 Calcium phosphate, thymolized, 186 Camphor tooth powder, 150 Camphorated phenol, 172 Canvas, waterproofing of, 282 Capsicum bags, 172 plaster, 172 Carbon coating of metal dies, 64 Caries, dental, 197 Carron oil for burns, 254 Carving compound, 40 Cast gold alloys, 59 Catarrhal stomatitis, 221 Caustic iodine, Churchill, 170 Cavity varnishes, 55 Cement, aquarium, 277 amalgam, 51 diamond, 275 for pestle handles, 276 for porcelain, glass, etc., 275 for repairing celluloid, 54 for steam fittings, 277 gutta-percha, 54 iron to glass, 276 to iron, 277 oxychloride of magnesium, 54 of zinc, 53 oxyphosphate of aluminum, 51 of copper, 52 of gold, 52 of silver, 52 of zinc, 53 rubber, 55 silicate, 47 tin, 54 tooth-ache, 247 Cementum, hyperplasia of, 205 Chemicals, stoppers for, 283 Chinosol mouth wash, 143 Chlorinated soda, compound solu- tion of, 175 Chlorine, 243 Chloroform liniment, 171 Chloro-percha, 26 Chrome-alum fixing bath, 294 Clarifying of wax remnants, 38 Clasp metal, 60 Cleaning and bleaching bones, 265 of engraved copper, 107 of marble slabs, 287 of nickel instruments, 105 of plaster casts, 20 of silver by electrolysis, 103 Cleanser, kid glove, 287 straw hat, 287 Cleansers, soap powder, 254 Clear varnish, to prepare, 279 Clock dials, luminous paint for, 278 INDEX 321 Coin gold, alloys, 57 Cold solder, 71 Collodion varnish, 18 Color scale of temperature, 94 Colored tooth powders, 150 Coloring of metals, 122 Colors for mouth washes, 142 Commercial alloys, 62 “Common sense” tooth paste, 154 Comparison between temperature and pulse, 245 of ware gauges, 314 Compensation amalgam alloy, 84 Compound or Compounds, almond meal, 252 antiseptic, 172 chloral solution, Baumgartner, 175 depilatory, 249 eucalyptol, 174 eucapercha, Buckley, 179 for devitalizing, 162 hectograph, 272 iodine solution, Harlan’s, 169 Talbot’s, 168 Younger’s, 169 mono-chlor-phenol, 175 phenol, Buckley, 172 solution of cresol, 173 sweeping, 280 Concrete, dental, 24 Conservation of vulcanized rubber, 30 Contraction of castings in cooling, 96 Copper plating aluminum, 121 solutions, 114 wood, 121 tempering of, 97 Corks, impervious, 282 Corn remedy, liquid, 257 Correctives, 139 Cosmos alloy, 62 Cream, hand, 251 massage, 251 shaving, 254 Cresol, compound solution of, 173 saponated tincture of, 173 Crown gold, 59 Counter-die metals, 64 Counter-irritant, Buckley, 170 Cyanosis, 194 Cysts, 195 D Decimal equivalents, 313 Decolorized tincture of iodine, 170 Dehydrating dentin, alcohol for, 186 Dental alloy, 61 to improve amalgamation of, 86 angina, 198 caries, 197 cements, 42 concrete, 24 cream, albodon, 153 kolynos, 155 dispensary tooth powder, 152 hemorrhage, 197 instruments, platinum plating of, 121 liniment, Buckley, 171 Hoff, 171 pharyngitis, 198 pulp digestant, 164 rubber, restoring, 30 rubbers, 29 silex, 18 Dentifrice, anatherin, 142 Dentition, 199 Depilatory compound, 249 pencil, 249 Desensitizing paste, Buckley, 187 Determining character of metal plate, 98 Developer for contrast work, etc., 289 for view work, 290 Diagnostic hints, 244 Diamond cement, 275 ink for etching glass, 273 Dichloramine-T solution, 175 Die metals, 64 Digestant, dental pulp, 164 Disappearing root filling, Ferris, 184 Disclosing solution, modified, 171 Skinner’s, 170 Disinfecting powder for stables, etc., 288 Disinfection of rooms, 289 Dislocation of the mandible, 200 Drops, tooth-ache, 246 Dry hair, hair tonic for, 248 mouth, 200 322 INDEX Dry plates, 296 soap powder, 254 Dusting powders for sore feet, 256 surgical, 168 Dyes, hair, 250 Dyspnea, 201 E Eau de botot, 143 cologne, 255 quinine, 249 Eczema, mouth-wash, 207 Elastic compound, 40 Electroplating of metals, 110 practical hints on, 110 Embalming fluid, 263 Emphysema of cheek, 201 Empyema of maxillary sinus, 201 Emulsion, iodoform, 177 Enamel, liquid continuous gum, 41 English cherry tooth paste, 154 odontine, 154 smelling salt, 256 tooth powder, 150 Engraved copper, cleaning of, 107 Engraver’s wax, 37 Estimating temperatures, 95 Etching, 132 Eucaine-formol-phenol paste, 183 Eucalyptol compound, 174 gutta-percha, 180 Eucapercha compound, Buckley, 180 Euroform paste, 162 Exostosis, 202 Extemporaneous solutions of hy- drogen peroxide, 176 Extinguishers, fire, 285 Eyeglasses, to prevent fogging of, 281 F Filtering of wax, 38 Fingernail bleach, 253 Fire bricks, 25 extinguishers, 286 gilding, 118 proofing of paper, 286 of textile materials, 287 of wood, 287 Fitzgerald’s tooth powder, 151 Flashlight powder, 301 Flavoring agents, 139 Fleming’s fixing fluid, 264 Floor or furniture wax, 280 Fluid, embalming, 263 Flux for soldering aluminum, 71 Fluxes for hard soldering, 69 for soft soldering, 70 Formagen, Abraham, 182 Formocresol, Buckley, 174 Formulas for lantern slides, etc., 289 “Four chlorides,” 288 Fracture of alveolus, 202 of teeth, 204 Fractures of jaws, 203 Freezing mixtures, 285 preventives for automobiles, 284 Frequency of pulse, 244 of respiration, 244 Frosting for window-glass, 281 G Gangrenous stomatitis, 222 Geranium-formol, 174 Gingivitis, 204 Glass, cement for, 275 lettering ink, 273 stoppers, removal of, 283 Glue, liquid, 275 waterproof, 275 Gold alloys, 58 filling, imitating, 109 plate, alloying, 57 for seamless crowns, 59 repairing of, 109 plating of aluminum, 117 outfit, inexpensive, 112 solutions, 114 with aluminum contact, 116 platinizing, 116 polishing fluid, 103 solder alloy, 65 solution for plating, 117 substitutes, 60 touch needles, 100 Greaseless toilet cream, 251 Gutta-percha, aluminum, 28 cement, 54 coppered, 28 eucalyptol, 179 impression, 28 INDEX 323 Gutta-percha, silver nitrate, 28 solution, 26 Gutta-percha-paraffin oil paste, 184 H Hair and scalp, remedies for, 247 dyes, 250 tonic for dry hair, 248 for oily hair, 247 Hand cleaning pastes, 253 cleansers for motorists, 255 cream, 251 lantern slides, 298 lotion, 252 Hard base plate wax, 33 tooth pastes, 156 Hardening fluid, Fleming’s, 264 Mueller’s, 263 Harlan’s tooth powder, 151 Head’s tooth powder, 151 Heat conducting power of metals, 96 Hectograph compound, 272 Hemorrhage, dental, 197 Hemostatic anesthetic solution, 161 Hints, diagnostic, 244 Horsley bone putty, 166 Hydrogen dioxide mouth washes, 143 peroxide solution, to preserve, 177 Hygiene, oral, 135 Hyperemia, 215 Hyperplasia of cementum, 205 Hypersensitive dentin, reducing, 185 Hypertrophy of the gingivse, 206 I Ideal base plate, 28 Imitating gold filling, 109 Impervious corks, 282 Impression material, 11 varnishes, 17 wax, 37 Indelible ink, 271 for hand-stamp, 27 2 Indestructible ink for writing on glass, 273 Indican, test for, 240 Injection for pyorrhea pockets, 167 Ink erasing compound, 274 Ink for etching glass, 273 glass lettering, 273 for hectograph, 272 indelible, 271 for marking linen, 271 standard blue-black, 271 for zinc labels, 274 Intensification, 294 Investment compounds, 21 for gold cast inlays, 23 Iodine caustic, Churchill, 170 paint, Carson, 170 solution, compound, Younger’s, 169 Iodized phenol, 173 Iodoform, aromatized, 177 emulsion, 177 liquid, 178 wax, 177 Iodo-glycerol, Talbot’s, 168 Iridio-platinum solder, 67 Iron and steel plating, 114 clearing solution, 295 J Jaws, fracture of, 203 Jeweler’s wax, 37 K Kaladont, 154 Kid glove cleanser, 287 Robert’s tooth soap, 157 Kolynos dental cream, 155 L Label varnish, 280 Lacquers, metal, 130 Lantern slides, formulas for, 289 plates, 296 Lassar’s tooth powder, 151 Lavender water, 256 Leucoplakia, 206 Library paste, 275 Liniment, chloroform, 171 dental, Buckley, 171 Hoff, 171 Lining rubber dentures, 108 Liquid corn remedy, 257 furniture polish, 280 glue, 275 324 INDEX Liquid iodoform, 178 metal polishes, 103 soap, 255 splint for fractures, 259 wart remedy, 257 Local anesthetic solutions, 158 Lock-jaw, 207 Low fusing alloys, 63 Lower denture alloy, 60 Lubricant, oil stone, 288 for surgeon’s gloves, 258 for syringe, pistons, etc., 258 Luminous paint for clock dials, 278 Luxation of mandible, 207 of teeth, 207 M Magnalium, 62 Making gold cohere, 108 of hand lantern slides, 298 Mandible, dislocation of, 200 Marble slabs, cleaning of, 287 Massage creams, 251 Massing fluids, 153 Materials for pulp capping, 184 for root canal filling, 179 Measures and weights, 302 Melting point, to determine, 39 Mercurial stomatitis, 222 Mercuric bichloride solution, 175 Mercury, refining of, 85 Metal or Metals, blackening of, 130 coloring of, 122 dies, carbon coating for, 64 electroplating of, 110 heat conducting power of, 96 lacquers, 130 plate, determining character of, 98 polish in powder form, 105 tensile strength of, 313 Metalloid compound, 40 Metric system, 303 Miller’s mouth washes, 144 tooth paste, 155 powder, 152 Mint tests for gold and silver, 98 Mirrors, silvering of, 280 Mixture, 1-2-3, Black, 174 Modeling composition, 39 wax, 37 Modern amalgam alloys, 86 Modified disclosing solution, 171 Ringer solution, 160 Moldine, 21 Mono-chlor-phenol compound, 175 Motorists’ hand cleansers, 255 Moulding sand, 21 oiled, 21 Moulds for duplicating plaster casts, 18 Mouth cachou, 247 tumors of, 229 washes, 141 alkaline, 142 antiseptic, 143 chinosol, 143 colors for, 142 eczema, 207 hydrogen dioxide, 143 Miller’s, 144 preparation of, 142 Pruyn’s, 144 resorcinol, 145 saccharin, 145 saponaceous, 145 thymol, 145 Muller’s hardening fluid, 263 N Nail polish, 253 Needles, gold-touch, 100 Necrosis of alveolar process, 208 arsenical, 193 phosphorus, 215 Neuralgia, 208 Nickel instruments, cleaning of, 105 plating solutions, 115 without battery, 120 Novocaine compound tablets, 160 O Oil solution, aristol, 178 stone lubricant, 288 Oily hair, tonic for, 247 Ointment, alopecia, 248 black silver nitrate, 166 1-2-3 mixture, Black, 174 Oral hygiene, 135 Ostitis and osteomyelitis, 211 Oxidizing tooth powder, 151 Oxpara, Jones, 183 INDEX 325 Oxychloride of magnesium cement, 54 of zinc cement, 53 Oxydase test, 242 Oxyphosphate of aluminum cement, 51 of copper cement, 52 of gold cement, 52 of silver cement, 52 Oxysulphate of zinc cement, 53 P Paint, blackboard, 278 iodine, 170 remover, 279 Painting of plaster casts, 19 Paper, fire proofing of, 286 water proofing of, 282 Pastes, arsenical, 162 bismuth, Morison, 166 bone cavity, 165 desensitizing, Buckley, 187 eucaine-formol-phenol, Witzel, 183 euroform, 162 for mounting photographic prints, 297 hand cleaning, 253 library, 275 polishing, 105 resorcin, Lassar, 166 silver plating, 118 tooth, 152 zinc, Lassar, 166 Pencil, dipilatory, 249 Pencils for writing on glass, 273 Pepsodent, 155 Pericementitis, 211 Pestle handles, cement for, 276 Pharyngitis, dental, 198 Phenol, camphorated, 172 compound, Buckley, 172 iodized, 173 Phenol-sulphonic acid, 175 Phenosalyl, 173 Phosphorus necrosis, 215 Photographic blue print paper, 296 stains, removal of, 301 Photographs, to transfer to glass, 198 Physiological saline solution, 160 Pickerill’s acid mouth wash, 144 Pink base plate wax, 33 Plain fixing bath, 293 Plaster, capsicum, 171 casts, to hasten setting of, 14 to make from life, 260 to prevent warpage of, 14 to reduce, 14 to repair, 16 to retard setting of, 14 Plaster-of-Paris bandages, to re- move, 15 to color, 11 encaustic, 13 to harden, 12 to increase cohesion of, 11 marbleized, 13 to remove from rubber plates, 15 Plastic compounds for facial de- fects, 260 Plastiline, 21 Plates, dry, 296 Plating iron and steel, 114 solutions, 113 Platinizing gold, 116 Platinum plating dental instru- ments, 121 solution, 115 solder, 67 Polish, nail, 253 tooth, for stains, 247 Polishes, liquid metal, 103 Polishing fluid, gold, 103 silver, 103 pastes, 105 powders, 102 Porcelain, cement for, 275 Potassium chlorate tooth paste, 156 Powder, flashlight, 301 for making a mouth wash, 146 Powders, polishing, 102 shampoo, 248 tooth, 146 Practical hints in electroplating, 110 Precious metals, refining of, 87 Preparation of a mouth wash, 142 Preparing transparent anatomical specimens, Spalteholz, 267 Preserving fluid for anatomical specimens, 262 Pruyn’s mouth wash, 144 Pulp capping materials, 186 varnishes, 55 mummifying pastes, 185 326 INDEX Pulpitis, 215 Pulse, frequency of, 244 Pyorrhea alveolaris, 219 astringent, Buckley, 169 pockets, injection for, 167 Q Quantitative estimation of sugar, 238 R Randolf’s alloy, 63 Reducing hypersensitive dentin, 186 solution, silver nitrate, Shanasay, 188 Reduction, 295 Reetz’s alloy, 63 Refining of mercury, 85 of precious metals, 87 Refrigerant counter-irritant, Buck- ley, 171 Remedies for hair and scalp, 247 for skin and hands, 251 for teeth, 246 Removal of broken instruments from root canals, 189 of rust from polished steel, 106 Repairing gold plate, 109 Resorcin paste, Lassar, 166 Resorcinol mouth wash, 145 Respiration, frequency of, 244 Restoring gold plates to their orig- inal color, 102 of hardened moldine, 21 Rhein’s tooth powder, 152 Robinson’s remedy, 186 Root canal filling materials, 179 Rosin solution for root canal filling, 184 Rubber cement for dental base plates, 55 dam, preserving of, 31 Ruoltz’s alloy, 63 S Saccharin mouth wash, 145 Saline tooth paste, 155 Saliva analysis, 240 tubes, cleaning of, 288 Salol tooth paste, 156 Samsioe’s alloy, 61 Saponaceous mouth wash, 145 Saponated tincture of cresol, 173 Scale of hardness, 314 Scorbutic stomatitis, 222 Seal for pyorrhea pockets, 167 Sealing wax for bottles, 283 Separating fluid for amalgam dies, 17 for plaster casts, 16 Shampoo powders, 248 Shaving cream, 254 Sheet wax, making of, 34 Shock, 220 Signs, cabalistic, 207 Silicate cements, 47 Silver coin alloy, 60 nitrate reducing solution, 188 plating, organic substances, 119 paste, 118 solutions, 113 polishing fluid, 103 solders, 67 Silvering of mirrors, 280 solution, 119 Sizing preparation for lantern screens, 300 Skin and hand, remedies for, 251 food, 252 lotion, 252 Skinner’s disclosing solution, 170 Smelling salt, English, 256 Soap, liquid, 255 powder, borax, 254 cleansers, 254 dry, 254 Soaps, tooth, 156 Sodium hypochlorite solution, Dakin’s, 178 phenolate, solution of, 173 Soft solders, 68 Solders, 65 aluminum, 68 for nickel, 68 iridio-platinum, 67 platinum, 67 silver, 67 soft, 68 teasing of, 70 Solid alcohol, 256 Solubility, table of, 308 Solution of aluminum acetate, 179 anesthetic, tropacocaine, 159 antiseptic, 176 INDEX 327 Solution, brass plating, 115 Burrow’s, 179 of chlorinated soda compound, 175 copper plating, 114 dichloramine-T, 174 for gutta-percha root canal fill- ing, 183 for restoring transparency of dentin, 185 gold plating, 114 local anesthetic, 158 mercuric bichloride, 176 modified Ringer, 160 nickel plating, 115 plating, 113 platinum plating, 115 physiological saline, 160 silver plating, 113 silvering, 119 of sodium phenolate, 173 Sorel’s magnesia cement, 54 Spence metal, 65 Sponge tin, 62 Stable tincture of iodine, 170 Standard blue-black ink, 271 Stanno-percha, 28 Steel, tempering, 93 working, 90 Stellite alloy, 63 Sticks, tooth-ache, 246 Sticky wax, 32 casting of sticks, 36 Stimulants, 139 Stomatitis, aphthous, 220 catarrhal, 221 gangrenous, 222 mercurial, 222 scorbutic, 222 ulcerative, 222 ulcero-membranous, 223 Stone, artificial, 24 the touch, 99 Stoppers for chemicals, 283 Straw hat cleanser, 287 Stronger tincture of aconite, 170 Styptic collodion, 165 cotton, 164 mixture, 165 Styptics, 164 Substitutes for gold, 60 for rubber gloves, 259 Sugar, quantitative estimation of, 238 tests for, 237 Sulfocyante test, 243 Suppurative pulpitis, 215 Surgical dusting powders, 168 • Swallowing artificial dentures, 224 Sweeping compound, 280 Syncope, 225 Syphilis of mouth, 226 System, metric, 303 T Table of solubility, 308 Tablets, novocaine, compound, 160 Teeth, fracture of, 204 luxation of, 207 remedies for, 246 Temperature and pulse, compari- son between, 245 of body, 245 produced by various flames, 95 in tempering steel, 94 Tempering of broaches, burs, etc., 95 of copper, 97 fluids for steel, 96 steel, 93 Temporary stopping, 27 Tensile strength of metals, 313 Test for acid index, 242 for albumin, 236 for alkalinity, 242 for indican, 240 for sugar, 237 for uric acid, 238 for urobilin, 240 oxydase, 242 sulfocyante, 243 Testing of new crucibles, 96 Thermometric equivalents, 311 Thrush, 229 Thymocamphene, 174 Thymol mouth wash, 145 tooth soaps, 157 Thymolized calcium phosphate, Buckley, 186 Thymophene, 174 Tin cement, 54 Tincture of aconite, stronger, 170 of iodine and aconite, Witzel, 169 328 INDEX Tincture of iodine, decolorized, 170 Toilet cream, greaseless, 251 Tooth pastes, 152 “common sense,” 154 English cherry, 154 hard, 156 Miller’s, 155 potassium chlorate, 156 saline, 156 salol, 156 polish for stains, 247 powders, 146 camphor, 150 colored, 150 dental dispensary, 152 English, 150 Fitzgerald’s, 151 Harlan’s, 151 Head’s, 151 Lassar’s, 151 Miller’s, 152 oxidizing, 151 Rhein’s, 152 soaps, 156 Austrian, 156 Robert’s, 157 thymol, 157 Tooth-ache cement, 247 drops, 246 gum, 246 sticks, 246 Touch needles, 99 Touchstone and its use, 99, 101 Transparent cement for photo- graphs, 297 Traumaticine, 26 Treatment of acute poisoning, 230 for burns and scalds, 257 Tropacocaine anesthetic solution, 159 True rubber solution, 30 Tumors of the mouth, 229 U Ulcerative stomatitis, 222 Ulcero-membranous-stomatitis, 223 Urea, 243 Uric acid, tests for, 238 Urine analysis, 191 Urobilin, test for, 240 Use of touchstone, 101 V Varnish for celluloid negatives, 297 clear, preparation of, 279 remover, 279 Varnishes, 17 Victoria metal, 62 Vulcanization, cold, 30 W Wart remedy, liquid, 257 Washes, mouth, 141 Water, lavender, 256 proofing of boots, 282 of canvas, 282 of paper, 282 Waterproof glue, 275 Watt’s alloy, 61 Wax, clarifying of, 38 engraver’s, 37 filtering of, 38 floor or furniture, 280 for partial impressions, 35 impression, 37 iodoform, 177 jeweler’s, 37 modeling, 37 Weights and measures, 302 Weston’s alloy, 61 Window-glass, frosting for, 281 Wind-shields, to prevent fogging of, 281 Wire gauges, comparison of, 314 Wood, copper plating of, 121 fire proofing of, 287 Working of steel, 90 Wounds, 230 X Xerostomia, 200 Z Zinc cements, oxychloride, 47 oxyphosphate, 42 oxysulphate, 47 labels, ink for, 274 paste, Lassar, 166